JP6890530B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a ball game machine, a lottery is executed when a gaming ball enters the starting port, and if the winning lottery is won, a profit state advantageous to the player is obtained. It is configured to generate and enjoy the game (for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2013-22220

When trying to equip such a ball game machine with a so-called set value function, there is a high possibility that fraudulent acts will be performed on the set value function, and measures to prevent this are desired.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of effectively preventing fraudulent acts on the setting function.

The above object of the present invention is achieved by the following means. The corresponding elements in the embodiments are shown in parentheses, but the present invention is not limited thereto.
(1) A control means (main control unit 20) that is configured to be able to execute the power-on process (FIGS. 6A to 16) when the power is turned on and that mainly controls the game operation.
Door open detection means (door open sensor 61) that can detect the open state of the front door that is openable and closable on the game machine body, and
Setting switch (setting key switch 94) and
Equipped with a RAM clear switch (98)
A gaming machine configured so that it can be set to one of a plurality of types of setting values having different advantages to the player.
The power-on process is
Setting change control processing (S023 in FIG. 6A, FIG. 10) for controlling the set value to a changeable setting change state, and
Setting confirmation control processing (S027 in FIG. 6B, FIG. 13) that controls the current setting value to a confirmable setting confirmation state, and
Backup restoration processing for restoring from backup (S028 in FIG. 6B, FIG. 14) and
Acquires a setting switch signal indicating an on / off state of the setting switch, a door opening signal indicating a door opening / closing state of the door opening detecting means, and a RAM clear switch signal indicating an on / off state of the RAM clear switch. Possible signal acquisition processing (S067 in FIG. 7) and
A determination process (S014 in FIG. 6A, S025, S026 in FIG. 6B) for determining the state of the signal acquired by the signal acquisition process is included.
The determination process is
Setting change transition determination process for determining whether or not to shift to the setting change control process based on the state of the setting switch signal, the state of the door open signal, and the state of the RAM clear switch signal (S014 of FIG. 6A). When,
Setting confirmation transition determination processing for determining whether or not to shift to the setting confirmation control processing based on the state of the setting switch signal, the state of the door opening signal, and the state of the RAM clear switch signal (S026 in FIG. 6B). And, including
When it is determined by the setting confirmation migration determination process that the process does not shift to the setting confirmation control process, the process is configured to shift to the backup restoration process (S026: ≠ W (1,1,0) in FIG. 6B).
A gaming machine characterized by that.
(2) The setting change transition determination process is performed.
If at least the state of the door open signal is the door closed state, it is determined that the process does not shift to the setting change control process (S014 in FIGS. 30 and 6A).
The gaming machine according to (1) above.
(3) The setting confirmation transition determination process is performed.
If at least the state of the door open signal is the door closed state, it is determined that the process does not shift to the setting confirmation control process (S026 in FIGS. 30 and 6B).
The gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.

According to the present invention, fraudulent acts on the setting function can be effectively prevented.

It is a front view which shows the appearance of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the structure of the game board and the production button of the game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the control device of the game machine. It is a figure which provides the explanation of the game state transition of the game machine. It is explanatory drawing which provides the explanation of the screen display of the liquid crystal display device which concerns on the game machine. It is a flowchart which shows the first half part of the main processing on the main control side which concerns on the game machine. It is a flowchart which shows the latter half part of the main processing on the main control side which concerns on the game machine. It is a flowchart which shows the initial setting process in FIG. 6A. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st power source abnormality check process in FIG. 6A. It is a flowchart which shows the command transmission processing in FIG. 6A. It is a flowchart which shows the setting change management process in FIG. 6A. It is a flowchart which shows the transmission command table selection process in FIG. 6B. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st command data creation process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the setting confirmation process in FIG. 6B. It is a flowchart which shows the backup restoration process in FIG. 6B. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd command data creation process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the operation confirmation timer setting process in FIG. 6B. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process of the main control side which concerns on the game machine. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd power source abnormality check process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the setting abnormality check process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol management process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 start opening check process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation start processing in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the first half part of the special symbol confirmation time processing in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the latter half of the processing during the special symbol confirmation time in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric accessory management process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the performance display monitor processing in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the out-of-area RAM check process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the operation confirmation process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the display data update process in FIG. This is an address map related to the memory space related to the main control unit of the gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the correspondence relationship of the setting key switch, the RAM clear switch and the door open sensor input information, the value of the W register, and the transition processing route related to the game machine. It is a figure which shows the source code (the first half part) corresponding to a part of processing of the main control side main processing, and the processing order for each processing state. It is a figure which shows the source code (the latter half part) corresponding to a part of the processing of the main control side main processing, and the processing order for each processing state. It is explanatory drawing which provides the explanation of the setting confirmation process (S932, S938, S939) of FIG. It is a figure which shows the command transmission address table (A) at the time of setting change, the spec designation command creation table (B), and the customer waiting command creation table (C) which concerns on the game machine. It is a figure which shows the command transmission address table (A) at the time of RAM clear, the RAM clear command creation table (B), the spec designation command creation table (C), and the customer waiting command creation table (D) which concerns on the game machine. Backup recovery command transmission address table (A), power failure recovery display command creation table (B), special figure 1 hold number designation command creation table (C), special figure 2 hold number designation command creation table (D) ). It is a figure which shows the identification display part LED data table (a), and the decimal value LED data table (b) which concerns on the game machine. It is explanatory drawing which provides the explanation of the display state of the performance indicator during various game periods. It is explanatory drawing which provides the explanation of the effect control command in each processing route. It is a flowchart which shows the setting confirmation process which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the source code of the setting confirmation processing which concerns on 2nd Embodiment (the figure (A) is the 1st Embodiment (comparative example), FIG. Show). It is a flowchart which shows the main process of the main control side which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the source code corresponding to a part of processing of the main control side main processing which concerns on 3rd Embodiment, and the processing order for each processing state. RAM clear command transmission address table (A), RAM clear command creation table (B), spec specification command creation table (C), customer waiting command creation table (D), game start command creation according to the fourth embodiment. It is a figure which shows the table (E). It is a figure which shows an example of the history list selection screen which concerns on this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the history confirmation screen (list display of setting history, error history, jackpot history) which concerns on this invention. It is a figure which shows the modification of the history confirmation screen which concerns on this invention.

Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. In the embodiment described below, a pachinko gaming machine will be described as an example of the gaming machine according to the present invention.

[First Embodiment]
<1. Outline of configuration: Fig. 1 and Fig. 2>
An outline of the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2. FIG. 1 is a front perspective view showing the appearance of the pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 2 is a view showing the front side of the gaming board.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1 (hereinafter abbreviated as “gaming machine 1”) is a gaming board in which a frame-shaped front frame 2 is openably attached to the front surface of a wooden outer frame 4 and attached to the back surface of the front frame 2. A game board 3 (see FIG. 2) is mounted in a storage frame (not shown), and a game area 3a formed on the surface of the game board 3 faces the opening of the front frame 2. A glass door 6 supporting transparent glass is provided on the front side of the game area 3a. Further, on the back side of the game board 3, various control boards (see FIG. 3) for controlling the game operation are arranged.

A key cylinder (not shown) for unlocking the door is provided on the front side of the glass door 6, and if a key is inserted into this key cylinder and operated on one side, the locked state of the glass door 6 with respect to the front frame 2 can be obtained. By operating the other side, the locked state of the front frame 2 with respect to the outer frame 4 can be released and the front frame 2 can be opened to the front side.

Below the glass door 6, a front operation panel 7 that is pivotally supported by a hinge (not shown) on the front frame 2 is arranged. The front operation panel 7 is provided with an upper tray unit 8, and the upper tray unit 8 is formed with an upper tray 9 for storing the discharged game balls.

Further, the upper saucer unit 8 has a ball removal button 14 for pulling out the game balls stored in the upper saucer 9 below the game machine 1, and payout of the game balls to the game ball lending device (not shown). A ball lending button 11 for requesting and a card return button 12 for requesting the return of the valuable value medium inserted in the game ball lending device are provided.

Further, the upper saucer unit 8 has a push button type effect button 13 (first operating means) configured to be operable by the player, and a cross-shaped direction key 75 (second operating means) that can be operated in the up, down, left, and right directions. (Operation means) is provided. The effect button 13 or the direction key 75 (up button 75a, right button 75b, down button 75c, left button 75d) is valid for receiving operation input during a predetermined operation reception valid period in the so-called "player participation type production" or the like. If a predetermined operation (for example, one press, long press, repeated hits, etc.) is performed during this period, the effect can be changed before and after the operation. In addition, these operation means can be used by the player on the game setting screen (menu screen in which the volume setting, the light amount setting, the production mode setting, etc. can be set) related to the game in the "customer waiting standby production (during the demo screen)" described later. It is also used when setting your favorite game. A built-in lamp (button LED 13b) is formed inside the frame effect button 13, and when the operation reception valid period is reached, the button LED 13b is lit in a predetermined color to notify that the operation is in the valid period. It has become like.

Further, a launch operation handle 15 for operating the launch device 32 (see FIG. 3) is provided on the right end side of the front operation panel 7.

Further, speakers 46 that exert a sound effect (sound effect) by sound are provided on both sides of the upper part of the front frame 2 and on the upper side of the firing operation handle 15. In addition, a decorative lamp 45 (full-color LED (for light effect) that exerts a light effect by decorating light in a suitable place of the gaming machine, for example, in the circumferential direction around the periphery of the front frame of the glass door 6 or inside the center decoration body 48 described later. A plurality of LEDs)) are provided.

(Game board: Fig. 2)
Next, the configuration of the game board 3 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in the figure, a ball guide rail 5 for guiding the launched game ball is annularly mounted on the game board 3 as a board surface partition member, and a substantially circular region surrounded by the ball guide rail 5 is formed on the game board 3. The game area 3a and the four corners are non-game areas.

A liquid crystal display (LCD) 36 is provided in a substantially central portion of the game area 3a. Under the control of the effect control unit 24, which will be described later, the liquid crystal display device 36 independently has a plurality of numbers, characters, symbols, and the like in three (left, middle, and right) display areas (design variation display areas). Various types of decorative symbols (for example, left symbol (corresponding to left display area), middle symbol (corresponding to middle display area), right symbol (corresponding to right display area)) including variable display operation (variable display and stop display). Display the effect as an image.

Further, in the game area 3a, a center decorative body 48 (flow path distribution means) is provided so as to surround the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 36 in a long-winding manner. The center decoration body 48 protects the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 36 from surrounding game balls, and is provided along the front side of the game board 3 and is fixed to the game board 3 with a front mounting plate 48a and a center decoration. An armor frame portion 48b that forms the outer periphery of the body 48 and surrounds the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 is integrally provided. A floating region through which the game ball can pass is formed between the upper surface of the center decoration body 48 and the ball guide rail 5, and the game ball is also guided to the right side of the center decoration body 48. The game ball driven into the upper side of the game area 3a by the launching device 32 is distributed to the left and right on the upper side of the armor frame portion 48b according to the launch strength or stroke length of the game ball, and is on the left side of the center decoration body 48. It flows down either the left flow path 3b or the right right flow path 3c.

In addition, the non-game area near the upper right edge (upper right corner) of the game board 3 is a various function display unit, and the 7-segment display (with dots) is on the upper start port 34 (for the first special symbol) and the lower part. Special symbol display device 38a (first special symbol display means) and special symbol display device 38b (second special symbol display means) configured side by side corresponding to the starting port 35 (for the second special symbol). And are provided. In the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, a "special symbol variation display game" is executed by the variation display operation of the "special symbol" (variation display operation in which the variation start and variation stop are set). Then, in the liquid crystal display device 36 described above, the decorative symbol by the image is variablely displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol by the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, and various notice effects (effect images) are displayed. At the same time, a'decorative pattern variable display game'is being executed. The details of the special symbol variation display game and the decorative symbol variation display game will be described later.

Further, in the various function display units, a composite display device (LED display for holding composite display) 38c composed of a 7-segment display (with dots) is arranged next to the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b. The compound is called the display of the number of balls on hold for each of the special symbol 1, special symbol 2, and normal symbol, and the status notification during the fluctuation time shortening function operation (during time reduction) and during the high probability state (during high probability). This is because it is a hold / time saving / high-accuracy composite display device (hereinafter referred to as “composite display device”) having five display functions.

Further, the various function display units are provided with a normal symbol display device 39a (normal symbol display means) in which a plurality of (two in this embodiment) LEDs are arranged next to the composite display device 38c. In this ordinary symbol display device 39a, the ordinary symbol variation display game is executed by the variation display operation of the ordinary symbol represented by the two LEDs. For example, as a variable display operation, the normal symbol on the LED repeatedly turns on and off in a seesaw manner, and stops with either side lit, so that the success or failure of the normal symbol fluctuation display game can be determined. There is. Further, a right-handed display device 39b is provided adjacent to the normal symbol display device 39a. The right-handed display device 39b is advantageous for "right-handed" in which the game ball aims to pass through the right-hand flow path 3c by the combination of the LED lighting and extinguishing states, or the game ball is left-hand flow path 3b. Notify whether "left-handed" aiming to pass through is advantageous. If the LED is lit, it is notified that it is advantageous to hit right. Further, a round number display device 39c is provided in which two LEDs (round display LEDs) are arranged adjacent to the right-handed display device 39b. The round number display device 39c notifies the specified number of rounds (maximum number of rounds) related to the jackpot by combining the lighting (red and blue) and off states of the two LEDs.

Below the center decoration body 48, an upper starting port 34 (first special symbol starting port: first starting means) and a lower starting port 35 (second special symbol starting port: second starting means) are provided. A normal variable winning device 41 is provided above and below, and detection sensors 34a and 35a (upper start port sensor 34a, lower start port sensor 35a: see FIG. 3) are formed inside each of the devices to detect the passage of a game ball. Has been done.

The upper starting port 34, which is the first special symbol starting port, is a first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "special symbol 1") in the special symbol display device 38a (first special symbol display device), and in some cases, a "special symbol". It is a winning opening related to the starting condition of the variable display operation (abbreviated as 1 ”), and is configured as a winning rate fixed winning device that does not have a“ starting opening opening / closing means ”that allows the starting opening to be opened or expanded. In the present embodiment, a left flow path to the upper start port 34 due to the action of a game ball falling direction changing member (for example, a game nail (not shown), a windmill 44, a center decoration body 48, etc.) in the game area 3a. The game ball that has flowed down 3b has a structure that makes it easy to enter (win), while the game ball that has flowed down the right flow path 3c has a structure that makes it difficult or impossible to enter.

The ordinary variable winning device 41 is configured as a winning rate variable winning device in which the winning rate of the game ball at the starting port can be changed by the starting port opening / closing means. In the present embodiment, a pair of left and right movable wing pieces (movable members) 47 are provided as a starting port opening / closing means, and the movable wing pieces 47 perform an opening / closing operation to open and close the lower starting port 35, which is a second special symbol starting port. Can be opened or expanded.

The lower starting port 35 of the ordinary variable winning device 41 is referred to as a second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "special symbol 2", and in some cases, "special symbol 2") in the special symbol display device 38b (second special symbol display device). It is a winning opening related to the starting condition of the variable display operation (abbreviated), and the winning area of the lower starting opening 35 is an open state that facilitates winning according to the operating state (operated or non-operating) of the movable wing piece 47. It is converted into a (easy-to-win state) and a closed state (difficult-to-win state) that makes it more difficult to win or makes it impossible to win than the open state. In the present embodiment, when the movable wing piece 47 is inactive, it holds a closed state (a winning impossible state) that makes it impossible to win a prize in the lower starting port 35.

Further, on both sides of the normal variable winning device 41, three general winning openings 43 are arranged on the left side and one on the right side, for a total of four, and inside each of them, a general winning hole for detecting the passage of a game ball is provided. A mouth sensor 43a (see FIG. 3) is formed.

Further, an ordinary symbol start port 37 composed of a passing gate (specific passing area) through which a game ball can pass is provided diagonally upward to the right of the ordinary variable winning device 41, that is, above the middle portion of the right flow path 3c. .. The normal symbol start port 37 is a winning opening related to the fluctuation display operation of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display device 39a, and inside the normal symbol start port sensor 37a (see FIG. 3), which detects a passing game ball. Is formed.

In the middle of the route from the normal symbol start port 37 in the right flow path 3c to the normal variable winning device 41, the large winning opening 50 can be opened or expanded by the retractable open door 52b. A device 52 (special electric accessory) is provided, and a large winning opening sensor 52a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has entered the large winning opening 50 is formed inside the device 52 (special electric accessory).

The circumference of the large winning opening 50 is a bulging portion (decorative member) 55 bulging from the surface of the game board 3, and the upper side 55a of the bulging portion 55 forms a downstream guide portion of the right flow path 3c. There is. If the large winning opening 50 is closed by the open door 52b (the large winning opening is closed), the downstream guide portion of the right flow path 3c (by forming a surface continuous with the upper side 55a of the bulging portion 55). It is designed to form a part of the upper side 55a). Further, in the downstream region of the right flow path 3c, in the region above the upper side 55a of the bulge portion 55, to be exact, in the game region above the grand prize opening 50, the flow path correction plate is substantially parallel to the flow direction of the game ball. The 51d is projected so as to move the flowing game ball toward the large winning opening 50.

The process of entering the game ball into the grand prize opening 50 is as follows. The game ball that has passed through the floating area between the upper surface of the center decorative body 48 and the ball guide rail 5 is on the top surface (upper side) 55a of the bulging portion 55 that protrudes from the game board 3 and functions as a guide for the game ball. It flows down along. Then, the game ball comes into contact with the right end of the flow path correction plate 51d protruding from the three surfaces of the game board, whereby the flow direction of the game ball is corrected to the direction (downward direction) of the large winning opening 50. At this time, if the large winning opening 50 is covered by the retractable open door 52b (the large winning opening is closed), the game balls roll on the large winning opening 50, and the game balls are further arranged in a predetermined arrangement (not shown). The game nail guides the player in the direction of the tulip-type normal variable winning device 41 (lower starting port 35). At this time, if the lower start opening 35 is in a winning state (starting opening open state), the game ball can win in the lower starting opening 35, but the open door 52b is retracted into the game board surface and the large winning opening 50 If is open (the big winning opening is open), the game ball is guided into the big winning opening 50.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player aims at the launch position on the special variable winning device 52 side (when the gaming ball is aimed so as to pass through the right flow path 3c), the upper start port The game ball is difficult to be guided or is not guided to the 34 side. Therefore, in the "large winning opening closed state", it is difficult or impossible to win a prize in each of the starting ports 34 and 35 unless the movable wing piece 47 of the normal variable winning device 41 operates. However, the movable wing piece 47 operates in an opening / closing pattern that is at least more advantageous than the normal state in the gaming state accompanied by the electric support state described later. Therefore, in the case of this electric support state, instead of "left-handed" aiming at the game ball to pass through the left flow path 3b, aiming at the game ball passing through the right flow path 3c " "Right-handed" is considered to be advantageous. In other words, whether to hit "left-handed" or "right-handed" will be advantageous for the player, depending on the game state, and under the state without electric support (for example, the normal state or "Left-handed" is advantageous in the latent probability state described later), and "right-handed" is advantageous in the state with electric support (for example, time saving state or probability change state).

The number, shape, formation position, etc. of each of the above-mentioned winning means can be appropriately changed according to the playability. Further, which of the left flow path 3b and / or the right flow path 3c can be won by each winning means can be appropriately changed according to the game playability.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the number of prize balls per winning ball promised for each winning opening among the various winning openings provided in the game area 3a (for example, three upper starting openings 34). , The lower starting port 35 is 1, the large winning opening 50 is 15, the general winning opening 43 is 6, and the normal symbol starting opening 37 is 0 (no prize ball). It has become. The game balls that do not win in each of the above winning openings are discharged from the gaming area 3a through the out opening 49. Here, the "winning" is not a structure in which the winning opening takes in the game ball inside, or the winning opening takes in the game ball inside, but a winning opening consisting of a passing gate (for example, a normal symbol start opening 37). ), It means that the game ball passes through the gate, and when the game ball is actually detected by each winning detection switch formed for each winning opening, "winning" is made in the winning opening. Is treated as if it occurred. The game ball related to this winning is also referred to as a "winning ball". If a game ball enters the winning opening, the game ball will be detected by the winning detection switch. Therefore, unless otherwise specified in the present specification, has the game ball been detected by the winning detection switch? Regardless of whether or not, it may be referred to as "winning" including the case where a game ball enters the winning opening.

<Movable body accessory>
Further, in the area of the game board, a plurality of movable body accessories are arranged at positions that do not interfere with the flow of the game ball. In this example, the first movable body accessory (clock-shaped accessory) 80 is arranged on the upper right side of the center ornament body 48, that is, at a position that does not interfere with the flow of the game ball passing through the right flow path 3c, and is oblique to the right. A second movable accessory (flower-shaped accessory) 90 is arranged on the lower side. The clock-type accessory 80, which is the first movable accessory, includes a clock board portion 81 composed of a number display unit having numbers from the Roman letters "I" to "XII" and divided into 12 number sectors. It has a clock hand 82 composed of a short hand and a long hand that can rotate on the clock face 81 and indicate the hour and minute as needed, and is configured as a clock-type accessory 80 as a whole. In this clock-type accessory 80, the clock hands 82 rotate at a high speed, and the number sectors of the clock face portion 81 develop colors with a predetermined "color and number" to show the player the degree of expectation for hitting. .. Further, in the flower-shaped accessory 90, which is the second movable accessory, a corolla A2 composed of a plurality of petals is arranged around the flower center A1, and the corolla A1 and the corolla A2 are moved vertically (falling) or left and right. The first movable body 91 configured to be movable (protruding movement) and the calyx B1 located around the outer side of the corolla A2 are attached to the tip of the stalk B2, and the calyx B1 and the stalk B2 can be moved vertically (falling). It is composed of the second movable body 92 configured in the above. As shown in the figure, the first movable body 91 and the second movable body 92 are arranged in a state in which they are united with the solid line position near one side (right side) of the liquid crystal screen as the initial position. In the case of this embodiment, the first movable body 91 and the second movable body 92 can operate independently of each other, and the first movable body 91 and the second movable body 92 can move in the vertical direction while being united. is there. The movable body accessory functions as an effect means, and depending on its operation mode, it realizes a movable body effect such as suggesting the degree of expectation for hitting.

<2. Control device: Fig. 3>
Next, with reference to FIG. 3, the control device that controls the game operation control of the game machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 3 is a control block diagram showing an outline of the control device.

The control device of the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is referred to as a main control board (main control means) 20 (hereinafter referred to as "main control unit 20") that collectively controls control related to overall gaming operation (game operation control). , The effect control board (effect control means) 24 (hereinafter referred to as "effect control unit 24") that receives the effect control command from the main control unit 20 and controls the execution control (appearance control) of the effect by the effect means. A payout control board (payout control means) 29 that controls the payout of prize balls by the game ball payout device 19, and a power source (including a backup power source) required for each board of the game machine from an external power source (not shown). ) Is generated and supplied mainly to a power supply board (power supply control means (not shown)). A liquid crystal display device 36 as an image display device is connected to the effect control unit 24. The power supply route is omitted in FIG.

(2-1. Main control unit 20)
The main control unit 20 is equipped with a microprocessor incorporating a CPU 201 (main control CPU), and is a ROM 202 (main control) that stores various data necessary for game operation control in addition to a control program that describes a game operation control procedure. It is equipped with a ROM) and a RAM 203 (main control RAM) that functions as a work area and a buffer memory, and constitutes a microcomputer (Z80 system equivalent) as a whole.

Although not shown, the main control unit 20 applies interrupt signals to the CTC and CPU, which provide the Z80 system with a periodic interrupt, a pulse output creation function (bit rate generator) with a constant cycle, and a time measurement function. An interrupt controller circuit that exerts an interrupt enable / interrupt prohibition function such as a timer interrupt, a reset circuit that can reset the CPU by outputting a system reset signal when the power is turned on or off, or when a power failure is detected, and a control program. Watchdog timer (WDT) circuit that monitors the operation abnormality of, out-of-designated area travel prohibition (IAT) circuit that monitors whether the program is executed correctly within the preset address range, and a certain range of hardware It also has a counter circuit for generating random numbers. At least the main control unit (payout control board) 20 and the payout control board 29 start executing necessary backup processing prior to power cutoff by receiving a voltage drop signal received from the power supply board, and before power cutoff. The game operation can be resumed after the power is restored (backup function). In this gaming machine 1, the stored contents of each RAM can be retained for at least several days.

The counter circuit includes a random number generation circuit that generates a random number and a sampling circuit that samples a random number value at a predetermined timing from the random number generation circuit, and acts as a 16-bit counter as a whole. By sending an instruction to the sampling circuit according to the processing state, the CPU 201 acquires the numerical value indicated by the random number generation circuit as an internal lottery random number value (big hit determination random number (random number size: 65536)). , The random number value is used for the big hit lottery. It should be noted that the random number for the internal lottery is obtained by adding the soft random number value generated by appropriate software processing and the hard random number value in order to prevent the hitting and the like.

<Memory address map: Fig. 29>
Here, in order to facilitate the understanding of the present invention, FIG. 29 shows an outline of an address map relating to the memory space (RAM 203, ROM 202) used by the main control unit 20. The memory space shown in FIG. 29 is mainly composed of two spaces, a memory space accessed by a 16-bit address and an I / O space accessed by an 8-bit address.

As shown in the figure, the memory space used by the main control unit 20 includes addresses 0000H to FFFFH as a memory address map. Specifically, addresses 0000H to 01FFH are the memory space of RAM 203 (512 bytes), addresses 0200H to 0FFFH are unused areas (hereinafter referred to as "access prohibited areas"), and addresses 1000H. Addresses 1072H are the memory space of the internal function register (register group for controlling each function mounted on the main control unit 20), addresses 1073H to 7FFFH are access prohibited areas, and addresses 8000H to A7FFH are ROM202 memories. Spaces, addresses A800H to FFFFH, are assigned to the access prohibited area.

As shown in the figure, the area of ROM 202 is a "program / data area" in which addresses 8000H to A6FFH describe a series of game control procedures in the memory space (10240 bytes) of addresses 8000H to A7FFH, addresses A700H to Allocate up to A77FH to'ROM comment storage area', A780H to A79FH to "CALLV instruction vector area", A7A0H to A7A7H to "interruption processing vector area", and A7A8H to A7FFH to "HW parameter area". Has been done.

The "program / data area" of the ROM 202 includes a "game control program (program in the area)" for executing game operation processing related to normal game progress such as a symbol variation display game and a winning game, and a base display described later. An area that stores an "information display control program (out-of-area program)" for executing information display processing (base display processing) related to'performance information display'that is not directly related to the game progress, and various fixed data related to the program. Is. After the reset, the CPU 201 starts executing the program from the address 8000H. As shown in the figure, the RAM 203 is provided with a work area (a RAM area in the area of addresses 0000H to 00FFH and a RAM area outside the area of addresses 0100H to 01FFH) corresponding to the in-area program and the out-of-area program, respectively. Has been done.

The "ROM comment area" is an area in which arbitrary data such as a program title, a manufacturer name, and a product version can be set. The "CALLV instruction vector area" is an area for setting the upper address of the subroutine of the CALLV instruction described later (CALLV instruction vector table), and the "interrupt processing vector area" is the start address of the timer interrupt processing (main). Area to set (interrupt processing vector table). The "HW parameter area" is a parameter settable area for setting CPU internal functions in terms of hardware. The parameters set in the HW parameter area include, for example, a periodic reset setting, a system clock setting, an INT / NMI setting, a program end address (HPRGEND) used in the program / data area, a start address (HRAMSTAT) in the access prohibited area, and the like. Data related to the end address (HRAMEND), security code, manufacturer code, product code, etc. are included. Access to the program / data area (HPRGEND + 1 to A6FFH area (area where programs and data are not stored)) after the address set by the program end address (HPRGEND), ROM comment area (ROM comment area) Illegal when an event such as access to (A700H to A77FH), access to the area (access prohibited area) between the start address (HRAMSTAT) and the end address (HRAMEND), and write operation to the ROM area is detected. It is assumed that an access has occurred, and an illegal reset that resets only the CPU core occurs. When an illegal reset occurs, it is controlled to an error state, the progress of the game is stopped, and until a new setting value is set (until the setting change management process described later (step S023 in FIG. 6A) is executed). ), The error is not cleared.

Returning to the description of FIG. The main control unit 20 includes an upper start port sensor 34a for detecting a prize in the upper start port 34, a lower start port sensor 35a for detecting a prize in the lower start port 35, and a game ball for the normal symbol start port 37. The normal symbol start port sensor 37a for detecting the passage of the above, the large winning opening sensor 52a for detecting the winning of the large winning opening 50, the general winning opening sensor 43a for detecting the winning of the general winning opening 43, and the out opening 49. And an OUT monitoring switch 49a for detecting a game ball (so-called out ball) discharged from the game machine through each winning opening is connected, and the main control unit 20 can receive detection signals from these. Based on the detection signals from each sensor, the main control unit 20 grasps which winning opening the game ball has won (winning).

Further, the main control unit 20 includes a RAM clear switch 98 (for example, a push button type switch) for initializing a predetermined area of the RAM 203, and a fraudulent act (radio error, magnetometer) against the pachinko gaming machine 1 (not shown). Fraud detection sensors (vibration sensor, radio wave sensor, magnetic sensor, etc.) for detecting errors (errors, vibration errors, etc.) are connected, and the main control unit 20 can receive detection signals from these.

Further, the main control unit 20 includes a normal electric accessory solenoid 41c for controlling the opening and closing of the movable wing piece 47 of the lower starting port 35, and a large winning opening solenoid 52c for controlling the opening and closing of the opening door 52b of the large winning opening 50. Is connected, and the main control unit 20 can transmit control signals for controlling them.

Further, the special symbol display device 38a and the special symbol display device 38b are connected to the main control unit 20, and the main control unit 20 can transmit a control signal for displaying and controlling the special symbols 1 and 2. There is. Further, a normal symbol display device 39a is connected to the main control unit 20, and a control signal for displaying and controlling the normal symbol can be transmitted.

Further, the main control unit 20 is connected to the composite display device 38c, the right-handed display device 39b, and the round number display device 39c, and the main control unit 20 is for displaying and controlling various information displayed on these devices. The control signal can be transmitted.

Further, a frame external terminal board 21 is connected to the main control unit 20, and the main control unit 20 receives predetermined game information (for example, hit game start information, winning information to the start port) from the frame external terminal board 21. Signals (outer end signals) including (special symbol fluctuation start information), prize ball count information, security information (for example, vibration sensor error, radio wave sensor error, magnetic sensor error, RAM clear, setting change, etc.) The external terminal board 21 for the frame can be output to the outside of the gaming machine. The external terminal board 21 for the frame is configured to be connectable to a so-called data counter DT provided outside the gaming machine or the hall computer HC, and is an external terminal for the frame. The signal (outer end signal) output from the board 21 is sent to the data counter DT and the hall computer HC. The data counter DT is a game information notification that notifies specific game information about the connected game machine. It is a device and is usually installed on the upper part of the game machine. Further, the hall computer HC monitors and collects the game information of the game machine based on the outer end signal output from the external terminal board 21 for the frame, and pachinko. It is a management computer dedicated to game stores that comprehensively manages the operating status of game machines installed in the hall.

In addition, the main control unit 20 corresponds to the type test (test related to the type verification of the gaming machine based on the rules regarding the certification of the gaming machine and the type verification, etc.) conducted by the Security Electronics and Communication Technology Association (Hotsukyo). Therefore, it is possible to output a type test signal that specifies the game operation in real time from the external terminal board 21 for the frame. When installing a gaming machine that conforms to the type test in a pachinko hall, no change in the conforming control program is permitted. Therefore, the type test signal is repeatedly output processed even after being installed in the pachinko hall (see the test firing test signal terminal management process described later (see step S823 in FIG. 25)).

A payout control board (payout control unit) 29 is connected to the main control unit 20, and the payout control board 29 is connected to a launch control board (launch control unit) 28 that controls the launch device 32 and a game ball to be paid out. A game ball payout device (game ball payout means) 19 for performing the above is connected. The main control unit 20 can transmit a control command related to payout (payout control command for specifying the number of prize balls) to the payout control board 29. The main roles of the payout control board 29 are reception of a payout control command from the main control unit 20, prize ball payout control of the game ball payout device 19 based on the payout control command, and transmission of a payout status signal to the main control unit 20. And so on. The main control unit 20 monitors whether or not the function of the game ball payout device 19 is normal (whether or not a ball jam or insufficient payout of prize balls has occurred) based on the payout status signal.

Further, a payout control board (payout control unit) 29 is connected to the main control unit 20, and when it is necessary to pay out prize balls, a control command (number of prize balls) related to payout is given to the payout control board 29. The specified payout control command) can be sent.

The payout control board 29 is connected to a launch control board (launch control unit) 28 that controls the launch device 32 and a game ball payout device (game ball payout means) 19 that pays out game balls. The main roles of the payout control board 29 are reception of payout control commands from the main control unit 20, prize ball payout control of the game ball payout device 19 based on the payout control command, transmission of a status signal to the main control unit 20, and the like. Is.

The game ball payout device 19 is provided with a supply shortage detection sensor 19a for detecting a supply shortage of game balls and a ball counting sensor 19b for detecting a game ball (prize ball) to be paid out. It is possible to receive each detection signal of. Further, the game ball payout device 19 is provided with a payout motor 19c for driving a ball payout mechanism unit (not shown) for paying out the game ball, and the payout control board 29 controls the payout motor 19c. It is possible to transmit the control signal of.

Further, the payout control board 29 has a full detection sensor 60 (in the present embodiment, a detection sensor that detects the storage state of the game balls stored in the upper tray 9) for detecting the full state of the upper tray 9 with the game balls. The door opening sensor 61 is connected. The door opening sensor 61 according to the present embodiment is a detection sensor that functions as a door opening detecting means and detects an open state of the front frame 2 and / or the front operation panel 7. For example, the front frame 2 is attached to the outer frame 4. On the other hand, it is configured to be ON (open state detection) when it is opened to the front side and OFF (closed state detection) when it is closed.

The payout control board 29 can transmit various status signals to the main control unit 20 based on the detection signals from the fullness detection sensor 60, the door opening sensor 61, the supply shortage detection sensor 19a, and the ball counting sensor 19b. It has become. This status signal includes a "ball jam signal" indicating a full state, a "door opening signal" indicating that the front frame 2 and the front operation panel 7 are open, and a shortage of game balls supplied from the game ball payout device 19. "Displenishment out signal" indicating that the prize ball has been insufficiently paid out or an abnormality has occurred in the ball counting sensor 19b, "counting error signal", and "payout completion signal" indicating that the payout operation has been completed. It is configured to be able to transmit a state signal. Based on these status signals, the main control unit 20 determines whether the front frame 2 / front operation panel 7 is in the open state (door opening error) and whether the game ball payout device 19 is in the normal payout operation (supply shortage error). , Monitor the full state of the upper saucer 9 (ball clogging error) and the like. In the above description, it has been described that the detection signal (door opening signal) from the door opening sensor 61 is input to the main control unit 20 via the payout control board 29, but the main control unit does not go through the payout control board 29. The configuration may be directly input to 20.

Further, a launch control board 28 is connected to the payout control board 29, and it is possible to transmit a launch permission signal ES permitting launch to the launch control board 28. The launch control board 28 controls energization of the launch solenoid provided in the launch device 32 based on the output of the launch permission signal ES from the payout control board 29, and is a game ball operated by the launch operation handle 15. The firing operation of is realized. Specifically, it is detected that the launch permission signal ES is output from the payout control board 29 and that the player is touching the handle by the touch sensor (not shown) provided on the launch operation handle 15. The firing operation of the game ball is permitted on condition that the firing operation stop switch (not shown) provided on the firing operation handle 15 is not operated. Therefore, when the launch permission signal ES is not output, the launch operation is not executed even if the launch operation handle 15 is operated, and the game ball is not launched. Further, the launch strength of the game ball can be changed according to the operation amount of the launch operation handle 15. When the payout control board 29 detects the ball clogging error, the ball clogging signal is transmitted to the main control unit 20 and the output of the firing permission signal ES to the firing control board 28 is stopped, so that the full state of the upper tray 9 is resolved. It is designed to stop the launching operation until it is done.

A setting key switch 94, a setting change switch 95, and a setting change completion switch 96 are connected to the main control unit 20, and the main control unit 20 can receive detection signals from these switches. A setting display 97 is connected to the main control unit 20, and the main control unit 20 can transmit a control signal for displaying and controlling the display.

The setting key switch 94 can be turned on / off by inserting a setting key possessed by a person concerned with the game store (hall clerk) when the power is turned on, so that the setting value can be changed in the "setting change allowable state". It is a key switch for switching to. Further, the setting change switch 95 is a setting change switch for changing the set value in the setting change allowable state. Further, the setting change completion switch 96 is a setting confirmation switch used when confirming the selected setting value. The setting change switch 95 and the setting change completion switch 96 are both switches that can be operated by the operator (for example, a push button type switch). The setting key switch 94, the setting change switch 95, the setting change completion switch 96, and the RAM clear switch 98 are formed in appropriate places inside the gaming machine from the viewpoint of preventing fraudulent activity, and the front frame 2 is not opened. As long as it is, the ON / OFF operation from the outside is impossible.

Further, the setting display 97 displays information related to the set value, and functions as a setting display means. In the case of this embodiment, it is composed of one 7-segment display and is mounted on the main control unit (main control board) 20. The setting display 97 is not limited to the main control board, but is a payout control board 28, a launch control board 29, and a relay board (relay board that relays the connection between various display devices, switches, etc., and the control board: shown in the figure. It can be provided at an appropriate place inside the game machine, such as an effect control unit (effect control board (including a liquid crystal control board)) 24.

(About set value)
The above-mentioned "set value" gradually changes the ball output rate (so-called machine discount (PAYOUT rate)), and in the present embodiment, six levels of setting values 1 to 6 are provided. ing. This "set value" defines at least the lottery probability (winning probability) of a big hit (the winning type at which the condition device described later is activated) in each of the settings 1 to 6 (6 stages), and is a set value. The higher the value, the higher the jackpot lottery probability (big hit winning probability) is set, which is advantageous to the player. For example, at low probability, setting 1 is 1/410, setting 2 is 1/390, setting 3 is 1/370, setting 4 is 1/350, setting 5 is 1/330, setting 6 is 1/320, and so on. is there. That is, the higher the set value, the easier it is to win a big hit (the higher the machine discount), which is advantageous to the player. As described above, the set value is a value that mainly defines the events that affect the machine discount for each stage, and means the value for the grade related to the susceptibility of a specific event such as a big hit. Such a "set value" is determined by the hall clerk operating the setting change switch 95 solely based on the sales strategy of the pachinko hall (game store).

When a plurality of types of jackpots are provided, the winning probability of one or a plurality of types of jackpots can be changed according to the set value. For example, when there are four types of jackpots 1 to 4, the higher the set value, the higher the winning probability of all jackpots 1 to 4, or some jackpots may be configured. Only a certain jackpot 1 to 3 may be configured to be high (in this case, the jackpot 4 has a common winning probability for all set values), or only a specific jackpot (for example, jackpot 1 only). ) May be configured to be high only (in this case, the winning probabilities common to all set values for jackpots 2 to 4). Further, the higher the set value is, the higher the total winning probability of the jackpots 1 to 4 may be. Further, the winning probability of the small hit type that does not trigger the operation of the conditional device can be changed according to the set value, as in the case of the large hit described above.

(About the operation to change the set value)
In the present embodiment, when the power is turned on, at least when the setting key switch 94 and the RAM clear switch 98 are in the ON state, the setting change is controlled to the allowable state, and when the power is turned on by other key operations or the like. , It is controlled to the setting change prohibition state. When the setting change switch 95 is turned ON in this setting change allowable state, the current display value of the setting display 97 is "1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6 → 1 → 2 → 3 → ...". It is switched and displayed so as to circulate in the range of 1 to 6. Then, when the desired setting value is displayed, when the setting change completion switch 96 is turned ON (setting confirmation operation), the current display value is confirmed as the current setting value, and the setting value data is the predetermined area of the RAM 203 (the setting confirmation operation). It is stored (stored) in the set value storage area). After that, the game will be started under the fixed set value. Then, when the setting key switch 94 is operated from the current ON state to the OFF state, the setting change allowable state is terminated. The main control unit 20 is a setting value selection means for selecting one of a plurality of types of setting values having different advantages for the player based on the operation of a predetermined operation means, and a setting value selection means. It is equipped with a function unit as a setting value setting means for setting the setting value selected by.

Further, the main control unit 20 can transmit various game processing information such as information about the special symbol variation display game and error information to the effect control unit 24 by the effect control command according to the processing state. .. However, in order to prevent the goto action, the main control unit 20 only transmits a signal to the effect control unit 24, and has a one-way communication configuration in which the signal from the effect control unit 24 cannot be received. ..

A performance display 99 is connected to the main control unit 20, and the main control unit 20 can transmit a control signal for display control of the display.

(About the game result information displayed on the performance display 99)
The performance display 99 functions as an information display means for displaying (notifying) information (hereinafter referred to as "performance information") related to the game result of a predetermined period (specific game period), and includes a plurality of 7-segment LEDs. In the performance display 99 of the present embodiment, four 7-segment LEDs (7-segment displays 99a to 99d) in which a display unit and a circuit unit are unitized are arranged side by side, and these are mounted on, for example, the main control board 20. Then, a display capable of displaying a 4-digit number is constructed. The details will be described later, but the above-mentioned "performance information" is information mainly used by pachinko hall stores and related agencies for confirmation and investigation, for example, illegal adjustment of game nails and goto acts. Information for investigating whether or not the original ball ejection performance (designed ball ejection performance) of the gaming machine is properly exhibited, such as whether or not the ball ejection performance is abnormal due to the above, in other words, "game". Information about achievements ". Therefore, the performance information itself is information that is not directly related to the progress of the game when the player plays the game, unlike the advance notice effect. Therefore, the performance display 99 is not installed in a place that is visible to the player, but is installed in a place that is easily visible inside the gaming machine. Specifically, the main control unit (so that the display unit of the performance display 99 composed of four 7-segment LEDs is not obscured by a sticker, a structure, etc., in a place that is easy to see from the back surface of the gaming machine. Main control board) 20, payout control board 28, launch control board 29, relay board, effect control unit (effect control board (including liquid crystal control board)) 24, or a board case that protects the control board. It is mounted on the top. Further, the four 7-segment LEDs are arranged side by side and can display a 4-digit number, and each 7-segment LED has a decimal point DP (dot) under the 7-segment number.

Specifically, the following information can be adopted as the performance information.
(1) The total number of payouts paid out by winning in the specific state (total number of prize balls in the specific state: α) is divided by the total number of out balls in the specific state (number of outs in the specific state: β). Information based on the value (α / β) (specific ratio information) can be adopted as performance information. Such specific ratio information is useful as an index for evaluating the ball ejection performance of the gaming machine.
(1-1) The above "total number of payouts" is a game ball (award) paid out when a prize is won in the winning openings (upper starting opening 34, lower starting opening 35, general winning opening 43, large winning opening 50). Sphere) is the total value. In the case of the present embodiment, the number of upper starting ports 34 is 3, the number of lower starting ports 35 is 1, the number of large winning openings 50 is 15, and the number of general winning openings 43 is 6. The total number of out balls is the number of game balls driven into the game area 3a from the launching device 32 (the number of game balls detected by the OUT monitoring switch 49a).
(1-2) Further, which state is adopted as the "specific state" can be appropriately determined according to the performance information to be acquired. In the present embodiment, any of the normal state, the latent probability state, the time saving state, the probability variation state, the big hit game, the small hit game, and the like can be adopted (details of each game state will be described later). To do). Further, not only one state may be measured, but a plurality of types of states may be measured. For example, a plurality of types of states such as a normal state and a latent state, a normal state and a small hit game, and all game states except during a hit game can be appropriately selected as measurement targets.
(1-3) Further, as the period in the specific state, the period focusing on the jackpot lottery probability may be the measurement target instead of focusing on each game state such as the normal state or the winning game. For example, a period in which the jackpot lottery probability is in a low probability state and / or in a high probability state may be measured. The hit game by big hit (during the big hit game) is controlled to a low probability state, and during the hit game by small hit (small hit game), the game state at the time of winning is continued, that is, during the small hit game. , The big hit lottery probability state at the time of small hit winning is continued. Therefore, when it is desired to measure the period of the pure low probability state, the period other than during the big hit game may be the measurement target. Further, when it is desired to measure the period of the low probability state and / or the high probability state excluding the hit game of both the big hit and the small hit, the period excluding the hit game may be the measurement target. The details of the big hit type, the small hit type, the operation mode of these hit games, and the like will be described later.
(1-4) Further, as the "total number of payouts", the number of payouts excluding one or more specific winning openings from the measurement target may be used as the total number of payouts (total number of payouts excluded from specific winning openings). For example, among the winning openings, those excluding the large winning openings 40 and 50 from the measurement target (in this case, the total number of payouts is the one excluding the hits from the measurement target) as the total number of payouts. May be good.
(2) In addition, only any one of the total number of payouts, the total number of payouts excluding specific winning openings, and the total number of out balls may be measured, and the measurement result may be used as performance information.
(3) Further, information on the bonus ratio (total number of payouts by bonus / total number of payouts of all winning openings) may be displayed. As a result, the percentage of the total payout game balls paid out by the accessory such as the normal variable winning device 41 (lower starting port 35) and the special variable winning device 52 (large winning opening 50) can be used as the performance information.

Of the above-mentioned information (1) to (3), one or a plurality of the above-mentioned information can be adopted as the performance information. Further, when a plurality of performance information is adopted as the display target, the first performance information (base value described later) is displayed on the first performance display, and the second performance information (for example, accessory ratio information) is separately provided. A plurality of performance indicators corresponding to each performance information may be provided, such as displaying on the second performance indicator. Further, when displaying a plurality of performance information on one performance display 99, one performance information and another performance information may be switched and displayed at predetermined time intervals, or a specific switch may be used. The configuration may be such that the display can be switched and displayed by the ON / OFF operation of. Further, what kind of information is adopted as the performance information can be appropriately determined.

In the present embodiment, the total number of payouts in the normal state (number of payouts in the normal state) and the total number of out balls in the normal state (number of outs in the normal state) are measured in real time, and the number of payouts in the normal state is the number of outs in the normal state. A value obtained by multiplying the value divided by 3 by 100 (value calculated by multiplying the number of payouts at normal times by the number of outs at normal times x 100) is adopted as performance information (also referred to as a base value), and this is used as a predetermined mode by the performance display 99. (The displayed value is the value rounded to the first decimal place). Therefore, each data of the normal payout number, the normal out number, and the base value is stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 203 (normal payout number storage area, normal out number storage area, specific ratio information storage area), respectively. It has become like. However, instead of simply measuring permanently and displaying the base value (performance information), when the total number of out balls reaches a predetermined specified number (for example, 60,000), the measurement is temporarily terminated and the measurement is terminated. The base value at the end of measurement is stored as history information in a predetermined area (performance display storage area) of RAM 203 (the current base value is stored). In the case of the present embodiment, the "specified number" that triggers the end of the above measurement is not the number of outs in the normal state, but the total number of out balls during all game states (including during the winning game) (hereinafter, "total number of outs"). ") Is adopted. The total number of out-states is also measured in real time and stored in the corresponding area (storage area for all-state outs) of the RAM 203. In the following, unless otherwise required for convenience of explanation, various data used for base value calculation (the above-mentioned normal payout quantity storage area, normal out quantity storage area, specific ratio information storage area, all state out). The storage area (such as the number storage area) is collectively referred to as the "measurement information storage area".

Then, after storing the base value of this time as history information, the measurement information storage area used in this measurement is cleared, and the number of next normal payouts, the number of normal outs, the base value and the number of all state out balls Start measurement. As a result, the next base value is measured and stored in real time.

On the performance display 99, the previous base value as history information and the base value currently being measured in real time are alternately switched and displayed at predetermined time intervals (configured so that simultaneous display is possible). May be). In the case of this embodiment, among the four 7-segment LEDs, whether the two 7-segment displays 99a and 99b on the left half of the front are the base values (real-time base value: first base value) being measured in real time. , Or it functions as an "identification display unit (identification segment)" that displays identification information (identifier) that can identify whether it is the previous base value (history base value: second base value), and the two on the right half of the front. The 7-segment displays 99c and 99d are designed to function as a "base display unit (ratio segment)" that displays a base value (numerical value). When displaying a'real-time base value'on the base display unit, for example, "bL." Is displayed on the identification display unit, and when displaying a'history base value'on the base display unit, the identification display unit is displayed. Is displayed as, for example, "b6." (Identifier display). Therefore, the display of the performance display 99 (7-segment display 99a to 99d) is displayed as "bL.31" if the real-time base value is 31, and "b6.29" if the history base value is 29. Is displayed. In addition, the base value is displayed on the numerical display after rounding off to the first decimal place, but if the rounded value is 3 digits or more, "99." indicating overflow is displayed on the base display. It has become.

In the present embodiment, as an example of the display form of the performance display 99, the display of a plurality of types of base values (here, real-time base value and history base value) is switched every predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). However (periodic switching display mode), the performance indicator 99 may be operated only for a predetermined period (door opening period) such as when the door (front frame 2) is opened. Further, the real-time base value and the history base value may be switched and displayed based on a predetermined button operation or switch operation.

Note that the history base value is not limited to the previous base value, and may be configured so that the base value of a specific number of times such as two times before or before (three times before) can be displayed, and the base value up to how many times before. Can be appropriately determined as to whether or not to display. Further, regarding the performance display 99, at least the real-time base value and the previous history base value may be displayed. Also, regarding the switching between the real-time base value and the base value, it is necessary to appropriately determine whether to use the automatic switching display form (periodic switching display form) or the artificial switching display form based on the operating means. it can.

(2-2. Production control unit 24)
The effect control unit 24 is equipped with a microprocessor having a CPU 241 (effect control CPU), a ROM 242 (effect control ROM) that stores the effect data required for the effect control process, and a RAM 243 (effect control ROM) that functions as a work area or a buffer memory. It is mainly composed of a microprocessor equipped with an effect control RAM), and also has an acoustic control unit (sound source LSI), RTC function unit (Real Time Clock), a counter circuit for random numbers, an interrupt controller circuit, a reset circuit, and a WDT circuit. Etc. are provided to control the overall production operation. Further, the RTC function unit is a clock IC that ticks the time, and functions as a clock means that provides time information in real time such as the current time (“current time is hour, minute, second”). The RTC function unit also functions as a calendar information providing means for providing calendar information regarding dates (month, day, day of the week). Since the RTC function unit is equipped with a secondary battery and can operate permanently by charging the secondary battery with the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply board, the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off. Even if it is, it keeps timing the current date and time. The RTC function unit may have a time lag (about 15 seconds per month) as time passes due to a frequency shift of the internal transmitter or the like. Therefore, accurate time information is provided by adjusting the time of the RTC function unit based on the accurate time information provided by the time adjusting means from the outside of the gaming machine.

The main roles of the effect control unit 24 are receiving the effect control command from the main control unit 20, determining the selection of the effect based on the effect control command, controlling the image display of the liquid crystal display device 36 which is the effect means, and controlling the sound of the speaker 46. , Light emission control of the decorative lamp 45 and various LEDs (button LED 13b, other production LEDs (not shown)), operation control of movable body accessories (clock accessory 80, flower-shaped accessory 90), and the like.

The effect control unit 24 includes a display control unit (not shown) that controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 36. This display control unit expands VDP, which controls overall video output processing such as image expansion processing and image drawing, an image ROM that stores image data (directed image data) that VDP performs image expansion processing, and VDP. A VRAM (Video RAM) that temporarily stores the image data, a liquid crystal control CPU that outputs control data necessary for VDP to perform display control, and a program that describes the display control operation procedure of the liquid crystal control CPU and its It is mainly composed of a liquid crystal control ROM that stores various data necessary for display control and a liquid crystal control RAM that functions as a work area or a buffer memory.

Further, the effect control unit 24 emits light to the light display device 45a including the decorative lamp 45 and various effect LEDs in order to display various effects (light effect, sound effect, and movable body effect by the movable body accessory). A display control unit, an acoustic control unit (sound source LSI) for the sound generator 46a including the speaker 46, a drive control unit (motor drive circuit) for the movable accessory motor 80c for operating the movable accessory (not shown), and the like. I have. The effect control unit 24 can transmit control signals related to the effect means to these control units.

Further, the effect control unit 24 is connected to a position detection sensor 82a that monitors the movement of the movable body accessory, and the effect control unit 24 is based on the detection information from the position detection sensor 82a and the current operation of the movable body accessory. The operation mode is controlled while monitoring the position (for example, the amount of movement from the origin position). Further, based on the detection information from the position detection sensor 82a, a malfunction in the operation of the movable body accessory is monitored, and if a malfunction occurs, this is notified as an error.

Further, the effect control unit 24 is connected to an effect button switch 13a that detects the operation of the effect button 13 and a direction key switch (not shown) that detects the operation of the direction keys 75 (75a to 75d) to control the effect. The unit 24 can receive the operation detection signal from the effect button 13 and the direction key 75.

When the effect control unit 24 receives the effect control command sent from the main control unit 20, the effect control unit 24 determines by lottery or uniquely from a plurality of types of effect patterns prepared in advance based on the information contained in the command. Then, various production means are controlled at the required timing to bring out the desired production. As a result, the display of the effect image by the liquid crystal display device 36 corresponding to the effect pattern, the reproduction of the sound from the speaker 46, and the lighting / blinking drive of the decorative lamp 45 (surrounding LED 45) and other effect LEDs are realized, and various effects are realized. By developing patterns (decorative pattern variation display operation, notice effect, etc.) in chronological order, a "effect scenario" in a broad sense is realized. Further, the effect control unit 24 can identify what kind of operation has been performed based on the operation detection signal from the effect button (frame effect button 13, direction key 75) switch during the predetermined operation reception valid period. It is possible to control the appearance of the effect according to the operation status (operation mode). For example, pressing, long pressing, repeated hits, four-way operation of the direction key 75, and the like are identified, and the desired effect is displayed to the effect means.

Note that the effect control command defines the function by a 2-byte configuration consisting of a 1-byte length mode (MODE) and a 1-byte length event (EVENT), and in order to distinguish between MODE and EVENT, Bit7 of MODE is used. Bit7 of ON and EVENT is turned OFF. When this information is transmitted as valid, a strobe signal is output corresponding to each of the mode (MODE) and the event (EVENT). That is, when there is a command to be transmitted, the CPU 201 (main control CPU) sets and outputs mode (MODE) information for transmitting the command to the effect control unit 24, and the first time after a predetermined time has elapsed from this setting. The strobe signal is transmitted. Further, the event (EVENT) information is set and output after a lapse of a predetermined time from the transmission of the strobe signal, and the second strobe signal is transmitted after the lapse of a predetermined time from this setting. The strobe signal is controlled in the active state by the CPU 201 for a predetermined period during which the CPU 241 (effect control CPU) can reliably receive the command.

Further, the effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) generates an interrupt based on the input of the strobe signal, executes the control program for the command reception interrupt process, and acquires the effect control command in this interrupt process. It has become. Further, unlike the CPU 201, the CPU 241 is executing an interrupt process (a timer interrupt process that is periodically executed) based on another interrupt when an interrupt occurs based on the input of a strobe signal. Even if there is, the command reception interrupt process is performed by interrupting the process, and the command reception interrupt process is preferentially performed even if other interrupts occur at the same time.

<3. Overview of operation>
Next, a gaming operation related to the gaming machine 1 using the control device (FIG. 3) will be described.

(3-1. Symbol variation display game)
(3-1-1. Special symbol variation display game, decorative symbol variation display game)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control unit 20 is based on predetermined starting conditions, specifically, that the game ball enters (wins) the upper starting port 34 or the lower starting port 35. In, a "big hit lottery" is performed by a random number lottery. Based on the lottery result, the main control unit 20 variablely displays the special symbols 1 and 2 on the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b to start the special symbol variable display game, and displays the result as a special symbol after a lapse of a predetermined time. Derived display is performed on the device, thereby ending the special symbol variation display game.

Here, in the present embodiment, the big hit lottery based on the winning of the upper starting port 34 and the big hit lottery based on the winning of the lower starting port 35 are performed separately and independently. Therefore, the jackpot lottery result for the upper starting port 34 is derived on the special symbol display device 38a side, and the jackpot lottery result for the lower starting port 35 is derived on the special symbol display device 38b side. Specifically, on the special symbol display device 38a side, on the condition that the game ball enters the upper start port 34, the special symbol 1 is variablely displayed and the first special symbol variable display game is started. On the other hand, on the special symbol display device 38b side, the special symbol 2 is variablely displayed and the second special symbol variable display game is started on the condition that the game ball enters the lower starting port 35. ing. Then, when the special symbol variation display game on the special symbol display device 38a or the special symbol display device 38b is started, after a predetermined variation display time elapses, if the jackpot lottery result is a "big hit", a predetermined "big hit" In the mode, in other cases, in a predetermined "missing" mode, the special symbol being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed, whereby the game result (big hit lottery result) is derived.

In the present specification, for convenience of explanation, the first special symbol variation display game on the special symbol display device 38a side is referred to as "special symbol variation display game 1", and the second special symbol display device 38b side is referred to as "special symbol variation display game 1". The special symbol variation display game is referred to as "special symbol variation display game 2". Unless otherwise required, "special symbol 1" and "special symbol 2" are simply abbreviated as "special symbol" or "special symbol", and "special symbol variable display game 1" and "special symbol variable display game 2". May be referred to as a "special symbol variation display game".

Further, when the above-mentioned special symbol variation display game is started, the decorative symbol (directing game symbol) is variablely displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 to start the decorative symbol variation display game, which accompanies this. Then, various productions are developed. When the special symbol variation display game ends, the decorative symbol variation display game also ends, the special symbol display device reflects a predetermined special symbol indicating the jackpot lottery result, and the liquid crystal display device 36 reflects the jackpot lottery result. The decorative design is derived and displayed. That is, the result of the special symbol variation display game is reflected and displayed by the dramatic decorative symbol variation display game including the variation display operation of the decorative symbol.

Therefore, for example, when the result of the special symbol variation display game (result of the jackpot lottery) is "big hit", the decorative symbol variation display game develops an effect that reflects the result. Then, in the special symbol display device, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a big hit (for example, the 7-segment is in the display state of "7"), the liquid crystal display device 36 displays "left", "middle", and "right". In each display area of "", the decorative symbols reflect the "big hit" (for example, in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" display areas, the three decorative symbols are "7", "7", and "7". 7 ”is displayed) and the display is stopped.

In the case of this "big hit", specifically, the special symbol variation display game ends, and the decorative symbol variation display game ends accordingly, and as a result, the symbol mode of the "big hit" is derived and displayed. After that, the large winning opening solenoid 52c (see FIG. 3) of the special variable winning device 52 operates to open and close the opening door 52b in a predetermined pattern, whereby the large winning opening 50 is opened and closed, which is more than in the normal game state. A special gaming state (big hit game) that is advantageous to the player occurs. In this big hit game, the opening door 52b allows the opening time of the big winning opening to elapse until a predetermined time (maximum opening time: 29.8 seconds, for example), or the number of game balls that have won the big winning opening (big winning opening). A predetermined number of winning balls to 50) (maximum number of winning balls: maximum number of winning balls allowed for a winning opening whose entrance is opened or expanded by one operation of the accessory: for example, 9) The "round game", in which the winning area is opened or expanded until the number of winnings is reached, and the big winning opening is closed when any of these conditions is met, is defined as a predetermined number of rounds (for example, a maximum of 16). Round) Repeated. The condition for closing the large winning opening 50 is not limited to this, and may be based only on the opening time of the large winning opening, or based only on the number of game balls that have won the large winning opening. Is also good.

When the jackpot game starts, the opening effect is performed using the jackpot start interval time, and after the opening effect is completed, the round game is performed a plurality of times up to a predetermined number of predetermined rounds. Then, when the specified number of rounds is completed, the ending effect is performed using the jackpot end interval time. As a result, the jackpot game ends. That is, the jackpot game is roughly divided into each game period of the opening effect period, the round game execution period up to the maximum number of rounds, and the ending effect period. In addition, during the round game, the production during the round and the interval production between the rounds appear between the round games.

Regarding the information necessary for executing the above-mentioned decorative symbol variation display game, first, the main control unit 20 first enters (wins) a game ball into the upper start port 34 or the lower start port 35, and specifically. , "Big hit", "Small hit", or "Loss" on condition that the game ball is detected by the upper start opening sensor 34a or the lower start opening sensor 35a and the start condition (starting condition related to the special symbol) is satisfied. If it is a "big hit", the big hit type is selected, if it is a "small hit", the small hit type is selected, and if it is a "miss", the big hit type is selected. A big hit lottery including'design lottery (winning type lottery)'to draw a lottery for the lost type is performed (if there is only one type of big hit, small hit or lost, it is not necessary to perform the type lottery, so the lottery is omitted. (Maybe), based on the lottery result information, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol and the special symbol (special stop symbol) to be finally stopped and displayed are determined. Then, as an effect control command for specifying the processing state, a "variation pattern designation command" including at least variation pattern information of the special symbol (for example, information on the jackpot lottery result, the variation time of the special symbol, etc.) is sent to the effect control unit 24 side. Send. As a result, the basic information required for the decorative symbol variation display game is sent to the effect control unit 24. In this embodiment, a "decorative symbol designation command" including information on the special stop symbol (design lottery result information (information on the winning type)) is also transmitted to the effect control unit 24 in order to enrich the variation of the effect. It has become like.

The variation pattern information of the special symbol may include information for designating whether or not a specific advance notice effect (for example, "reach effect" or "pseudo-continuous effect" described later) is generated. In detail, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is roughly classified into a "hit fluctuation pattern" in the case of a hit and a "loss fluctuation pattern" in the case of a loss according to the result of the big hit lottery. For example,'reach fluctuation pattern'that specifies the occurrence of reach effect,'normal fluctuation pattern' that does not specify the occurrence of reach effect,'pseudo-ream reach variation pattern' that specifies the occurrence of pseudo-ream effect and reach effect, pseudo Multiple types of fluctuation patterns are included, such as'pseudo-ream without reach fluctuation pattern', which specifies the occurrence of continuous production and does not specify the occurrence of reach production. It should be noted that, in order to secure the production time of the reach effect and the pseudo-continuous effect, basically, the reach variation pattern and the variation pattern with pseudo-ream are set to have a longer variation time than the normal variation pattern. In the present embodiment, as the normal fluctuation pattern, a plurality of types of normal fluctuation patterns of normal fluctuation 2s, normal fluctuation 8s, normal fluctuation 12s, etc. (2s, 8s, 12s, etc. indicate fluctuation time (seconds)) are defined. However, these are selected only when they are lost.

The effect control unit 24 is time-series during the decorative symbol variation display game based on the information included in the effect control commands (here, the variation pattern designation command and the decorative symbol designation command) sent from the main control unit 20. The content of the production to be developed (the production scenario such as the advance notice production) and the decorative design to be finally stopped and displayed (decorative stop design) are determined, and the decorative design is changed and displayed according to the time schedule based on the fluctuation pattern of the special design. Run the symbol variation display game. Further, when the player participation type production is incorporated in the production scenario, the production according to the operation situation is displayed based on the operation detection signal from the production button. As a result, the decorative symbol by the liquid crystal display device 36 is variablely displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol by the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, and the period of the special symbol variable display game and the decorative symbol variable display game are in progress. The period of is substantially the same time width. Further, the effect control unit 24 controls the liquid crystal display device 36, the light display device 45a, or the sound generator 46a, respectively, so as to correspond to the effect scenario, and develops various effects in the decorative symbol variation display game. As a result, image reproduction (image effect) on the liquid crystal display device 36, sound effect reproduction (sound effect), and lighting / blinking drive of the decorative lamp 45, LED, etc. (light effect) are realized.

In this way, the special symbol variation display game and the decorative symbol variation display game have an inseparable relationship, and what reflects the display result of the special symbol variation display game is expressed in the decorative symbol variation display game. , These two symbol variation display games may be regarded as equivalent symbol games. Unless otherwise specified in the present specification, the above two symbol variation display games may be simply referred to as "symbol variation display games".

(3-1-2. Ordinary symbol variation display game)
Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, based on the fact that the game ball has passed (winning) through the normal symbol start port 37, the main control unit 20 performs an "auxiliary winning lottery" by a random number lottery. Based on this lottery result, the normal symbol represented by the LED is variablely displayed on the normal symbol display device 39a to start the normal symbol variable display game, and after a certain period of time, the result is a combination of lighting and non-lighting of the LED. It is designed to stop and display. For example, when the result of the normal symbol variation display game is "auxiliary hit", the display unit of the normal symbol display device 39a is in a specific lighting state (for example, all two LEDs 39 are lit, or "○" and "○" and " Of the LEDs expressing "x", the LED on the "○" side is in the lit state) to stop and display.

In the case of this "auxiliary hit", the normal electric accessory solenoid 41c (see FIG. 3) is activated, whereby the movable wing piece 47 opens in an inverted "C" shape and the lower starting port 35 opens. Alternatively, the game ball is expanded to a state in which the game ball easily flows in (starting opening open state), and an auxiliary game state (hereinafter referred to as "solenoid open game") that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state occurs. In this general electric opening game, the movable wing piece 47 of the normal variable winning device 41 is used until the opening time of the lower starting port 35 elapses for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds), or the lower starting port 35 is won. Until the number of game balls reaches a predetermined number (for example, 4), the winning area is opened or expanded, and when any of these conditions is satisfied, the lower starting port 35 is closed, and the like is performed a predetermined number of times (for example). , Up to 2 times).

Here, in the present embodiment, each start port 34 to 35 or the normal symbol start port 37 is awarded during the special / decorative symbol variation display game, the normal symbol variation display game, the big hit game, or the public electric open game. When is generated, that is, when a detection signal is input from the start port sensors 34a to 35a or the normal symbol start port sensor 37a and the corresponding start condition (symbol game start condition) is satisfied, this is used to start the variable display game. As the data related to the right, except for the data related to the variable display, the maximum number of reserved storages (for example, a maximum of 4), which is a predetermined upper limit, is retained and stored. The pending data that is not used for this symbol variation display operation or the game ball related to the reserved data is also referred to as an "operation pending ball". In order to clarify the number of operation holding balls to the player, a dedicated holding display (not shown) provided at an appropriate position in the game machine 1 or a holding display provided as an icon image on the screen by the liquid crystal display device 36. Turn on the device.

Further, in the present embodiment, up to four operation-holding balls related to the special symbol 1, the special symbol 2, and the normal symbol are reserved and stored in the corresponding storage area of the RAM 203, and are held as the number of times the fluctuation of the special symbol or the ordinary symbol is confirmed. The maximum number of stored balls (maximum number of reserved balls) for each of the special symbol 1, the special symbol 2, and the normal symbol is not particularly limited. In addition, all or part of the maximum number of reserved memories of each symbol may be different, and the number can be appropriately determined according to the playability. In the following, each of the special symbol 1, the special symbol 2, and the normal symbol operation holding ball will also be referred to as a special figure 1 operation holding ball, a special figure 2 operation holding ball, and a normal figure operation holding ball, respectively.

(3-2. Game state)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is configured to be capable of generating a plurality of types of gaming states in addition to the above-mentioned jackpot, which is a special gaming state. In order to facilitate the understanding of the present invention, first, functions (means) related to the occurrence of various gaming states will be described.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a "probability variation function (probability variation function)" in which the main control unit 20 (CPU201) is responsible for the functional unit. There are two types of this, a probabilistic function related to a special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "special symbol probabilistic function") and a probabilistic function related to a normal symbol (hereinafter referred to as "ordinary symbol probabilistic function").

The special symbol probability change function changes the jackpot lottery probability from a low probability (for example, 1/320) of a predetermined probability (normal probability) to a high probability (for example, 1/32), which is more advantageous than the normal gaming state. It is a function to generate a "high probability state (big hit high probability state)". In addition, the normal symbol probability change function changes the lottery probability per auxiliary from a low probability (for example, 1/200), which is a predetermined probability (normal probability), to a high probability (for example, 199/200), and is more than a normal game state. Is also a function to generate an advantageous "probability change state per auxiliary".

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with a "variation time shortening function (time saving function)" in which the main control unit 20 is responsible for its functional unit. There are two types of this: a time saving function related to a special symbol (hereinafter referred to as a "special symbol time saving function") and a time saving function related to a normal symbol (hereinafter referred to as a "normal symbol time saving function").

The special symbol time reduction function generates a "special symbol time reduction state" that shortens the average time required for one special symbol fluctuation display game (the average time from when the special symbol starts to change to when it is stopped and displayed). It is a function to make it. Under the gaming state (special symbol time saving state) in which this special symbol time saving function is operating, the average fluctuation time of the special symbol in one special symbol variation display game is shortened, and the average fluctuation time per unit time is shorter than that in the normal gaming state. The number of big hit lottery is improved. The number of lottery lottery is improved. In addition, the normal symbol time saving function shortens the average time required for one normal symbol fluctuation display game (the average time from when the normal symbol starts to change to when it is stopped and displayed). Is a function to generate. Under the gaming state (normal symbol time saving state) in which the normal symbol time saving function is activated, the average fluctuation time of the normal symbol in one normal symbol variation display game is shortened (for example, from 20 seconds to 1 second). ), The number of lottery times is improved, in which the number of lottery per auxiliary per unit time is improved as compared with the normal game state.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has an "open extension function" in which the main control unit 20 is responsible for its functional unit. The open extension function is a function of generating an "open extension state" in which the open operation period (opening time and / or number of times of opening of the movable wing piece 47) of the movable wing piece 47 of the normal variable winning device 41 is extended. This open extension state is a so-called "electric chew support state". Under the gaming state (open extension state) in which the open extension function is operating, the open operation period (start opening open state time) of the movable wing piece 47 is extended from, for example, 0.2 seconds to 1.7 seconds. The number of times of opening and closing is extended from, for example, once (when the opening extension function is not operating) to twice (when the opening extension function is operating), and the movable wing piece 47 per unit time is higher than in the normal gaming state. The operating rate is improved.

By operating one or a plurality of types of each of the above functions, it is possible to change the internal gaming state (internal gaming state) of the gaming machine. In the following, for convenience of explanation, the gaming state in which the special symbol probability change function, the special symbol time saving function, the normal symbol probability change function, the normal symbol time reduction function, and the open extension function are activated is referred to as a "probability change state", and among these functions, The game state in which the special symbol probability change function is removed is referred to as a "time saving state", and the game state in which at least the special symbol probability change function is activated and the open extension function is not activated is referred to as a "latent state (latent probability)". Further, a state in which all functions are not in operation (non-operation) is referred to as a "normal game state (normal state)". Therefore, paying attention to the jackpot lottery probability in these gaming states, when the gaming state is "time saving state" or "normal state", the jackpot lottery probability becomes "low probability" and the gaming state is "latent state". Or, in the case of "probability change state", the jackpot lottery probability is "high probability".

Further, under the above-mentioned electric chew support state (hereinafter referred to as "state with electric support"), the operating rate (opening time and number of times of opening) of the movable wing piece 47 of the normal variable winning device 41 is improved, and the lower starting port 35 is reached. Since the winning rate of the game increases and the winning frequency per unit time increases, the game state is more advantageous for the player than when the player is not in the electric chew support state (hereinafter referred to as "the state without electric support"). .. Focusing on the presence or absence of this electric chew support state, when the game state is "normal game state" or "latent state", it becomes "no electric support state", and the game state is "time saving state" or "probability change state". If it is, it will be in the state with electric support. A gaming state focusing on the operating status of each function (special symbol probability change function, special symbol time reduction function, normal symbol probability change function, normal symbol time reduction function, and open extension function) related to determination of the jackpot lottery probability and the presence / absence of an electric support state. Is also referred to as "internal gaming state".

What kind of game state the current game state is is managed by using an identifier of "game state number YJ". For example, when YJ is "00H", specify "normal state", when "01H", specify "time saving state", when "02H", specify "latent state", and when "03H", specify "probability changing state". To do. Further, regarding the operation status of each of the above functions that determine the game state, the operation (5AH) / non-operation (00H) is managed on the main control unit 20 side depending on the ON / OFF state of the flag corresponding to these functions. It has become so.

<4. About hit>
Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the “hit” of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described.

(4-1. About hit type and hit game)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, the types of hits drawn in the above-mentioned special symbol variation display game, that is, the types of hits subject to the big hit lottery, are "big hits 1 to 1" belonging to the big hit types. A plurality of types of hits such as "11" and "small hit 1" belonging to the small hit type are provided. The above-mentioned "big hit" is a hit that triggers the operation of the conditional device, and "small hit" is a hit that belongs to the "non-big hit" type that does not trigger the operation of the conditional device. Here, the "condition device" is a device whose operation is a condition necessary for the operation of the accessory continuous operation device (device for continuously operating the special electric accessory) for performing the round game, and is a specific special device. It is a device that operates when a combination of symbols is displayed or when the game ball passes through a specific area in the big winning opening (excluding the one that wins the big winning opening while the accessory continuous operation device is operating). Therefore, in the case of a small hit, the round game itself is not executed, and the opening / closing operation of the big winning opening is controlled in an operation mode that is the same as or very similar to the round game by the big hit, or a completely different operation mode from the round game by the big hit. However, as with the big hit, the small hit is also a winning type that triggers the transition to the special game state (trigger of the winning game) accompanied by the opening and closing operation of the big winning opening. , Small hits are different in nature from mere "loss".

Here, the notations such as "16R", "8R", "4R", and "2R" in the "contents of hit" column in the figure indicate the specified number of rounds (maximum number of rounds) related to the jackpot, respectively. In addition, the notation of "long opening" in the same column means that the maximum opening time of the large winning opening in one round game is expected to reach the maximum number of winnings (9). Indicates a jackpot set to "opening time (for example, 29.8 seconds)", and "short opening" means "short opening time (for example, 1.8)" in which the maximum opening time of the big winning opening is shorter than "long opening". Indicates the jackpot set in "seconds)". Therefore, the profit status during the big hit game becomes higher as the maximum number of rounds is relatively larger, and the long opening is higher than the short opening. For example, if the jackpot is 1 (12R long open probability variation jackpot), it means that the maximum number of rounds is 12R, and the jackpot of each round game is a jackpot that is opened and closed in a long opening pattern.

Further, FIG. 4 shows the transition destination of the game state after the end of the big hit game according to the game state at the time of winning when each big hit is won. For example, jackpot 1 (12R long open probability variation jackpot) is shifted to "probability variation state (high probability, with electric support)" regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning, and jackpot 7 (2R short opening). The latent probability jackpot) is shifted to the "latent probability state (high probability, no electric support)" when the game state at the time of winning is the normal state, and in the case of the latent probability, time reduction, and probability change state, " It shifts to the probabilistic state. In addition, the jackpots 2, 4, 6, 9 and 11 are all jackpots that trigger the transition to a time saving state (low probability, with electric support), and the jackpots 2, 4, 9 are "time saving A (time saving A). The number of times is shifted to "100 times)", and the jackpots 6 and 11 are shifted to "time saving B (time saving number of times 50 times)". In addition, during the big hit, a hit game (big hit game) in which the big winning opening is opened and closed occurs, but all the above functions are disabled, and basically under the same game state as the above normal state. Placed in. The other big hits are as shown in FIG.

Regarding the "latent state", "probability change state", and "time saving state" according to the present embodiment, the number of times the special symbol variation display game (number of changes of the special symbol) is executed is a predetermined number of times (special symbol variation display game). It continues until the end of 1 and 2 (total number of executions of special symbols 1 and 2), and when the special symbol variation display game ends without winning a big hit (excluding small hits) within the specified number of times. From the next game, it will shift to the normal state (normal game state). In the case of the present embodiment, a predetermined specified number of times (ST specified number of times: 65536 times in this case) is set as the latent probability state or the probability change state (number-cut probability change type (ST machine type)). In addition, a predetermined specified number of times (time reduction number: 100 times in the case of time reduction A and 50 times in the case of time reduction B) is set for the time reduction state. The latent probability state or the probability change state may be a "general probability change machine type" in which the high probability state is continued until the next big hit is won, instead of setting the above ST specified number of times. Further, as for the number of time reductions, an appropriate number of times can be set. In addition, regarding the transition to the latent probability state or the probability change state, the transition condition can be that the game ball enters (passes) into a specific area in the big winning opening during the big hit game (V probability change machine type). ..

However, when a small hit is won, the internal gaming state at the time of the small hit is continued as it is, and the transition control of the internal gaming state due to the small hit is not performed. Therefore, the game state at the time of winning the small hit and the game state after the small hit game are both the same game state. For example, if a small hit 1 is won during the probability change state, the probability change state is continued during and after the hit game. In this respect, the property is different from the above-mentioned jackpot in which the transition control of the gaming state is performed. Utilizing such a property of a small hit, for example, an operation mode of a big winning opening of a hit game by a small hit 1 and a hit game by a specific big hit (here, a big hit 7 (2R short open latent probability big hit)) Are substantially the same, and the effects during the hit are also substantially the same. Furthermore, if the same effect mode (CZ effect mode described later) is used after these hit games, the winning type won this time will be concealed. be able to.

In the present embodiment, in the normal state, the same CZ mode (CZ effect) is used for a predetermined period (for example, until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is completed 4 times) when the "small hit 1" and the "big hit 7" are won. Mode). As a result, it is concealed whether the big hit won this time is a big hit 7 or a small hit 1. That is, the jackpot lottery probability state is concealed, and the expectation of the high probability state can be increased in the CZ effect mode. In addition, the substance of the CZ production mode that is shifted when the small hit 1 is won is "CZ (CZ (normal))" whose internal game state is the "normal state", and is shifted when the big hit 7 is won. The substance of the CZ effect mode is "CZ (CZ (latent probability))" in which the internal gaming state is the "latent state".

Although not shown, a plurality of types of losses (for example, losses A, B, C) having different symbol lottery (winning type lottery) probabilities are provided as "loss" types that are not big hits and small hits. There is. Further, as for the small hit, one type of small hit 1 is provided on the special figure 1 side, but the present invention is not limited to this, and one or a plurality of types of small hits are provided on the special figure 1 side and / or the special figure 2 side. It may be provided in. In addition, the types of big hits and small hits can be appropriately determined according to the playability. In addition, a "normal jackpot" that shifts to the normal state may be provided regardless of the game state at the time of winning.

<5. About production>
(5-1. Production mode)
Next, the effect mode (effect state) will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with a plurality of types of effect modes that produce effects related to the game state, and is configured to be capable of transition control between each effect mode in response to the transition of the game state. ing. The production modes are "normal production mode" in the case of "normal state", "CZ production mode" in the case of "CZ", "latent production mode" in the case of "latent state", and "probability change state". A plurality of types of production modes are provided according to each game state, such as a "probability variation effect mode" in the case of a case and a "time reduction effect mode" in the case of a "time reduction state". The time saving effect mode may be a common time saving effect mode for the time saving A and the time saving B, or may be different production modes.

The effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) has a function unit (effect state transition control means) for transition control between a plurality of types of effect modes. The effect control unit 24 specifies a specific effect control command sent from the main control unit 20 (CPU201), specifically, the current game state or the fact that the game state is transferred. Based on the effect control command, it is configured to be capable of transition control between a plurality of types of effect modes in a form that maintains consistency with the game state on the main control unit 20 side. Such specific effect control commands include a variation pattern specification command, a game state specification command, a customer waiting command, and a predetermined command transmitted during a hit (a big hit start command for specifying a big hit start or a big hit end is specified. There is a big hit end command). Further, the effect control unit 24 has a function unit (effect state management means) for managing the effect mode related to the game state, and manages the current effect mode.

(5-2. Production under each production mode)
Further, in each production mode, the background display as the background is different in each production mode so that the player can grasp what kind of game state the player is staying in in the production mode. The production has come to appear. In addition to changing the above-mentioned "background effect" to suggest the game state, it is possible to use decorative patterns with different patterns corresponding to each effect mode, or to suggest the game state by sound effect or light effect. You can also. Further, each effect mode is not limited to one type, and a plurality of types can be provided.

(5-3. Notice production)
Next, the advance notice production will be described. The effect control unit 24 is based on the content of the effect control command from the main control unit 20, specifically, at least the variation pattern information included in the variation pattern designation command, and variously related to the current effect mode and the jackpot lottery result. It is configured so that the appearance of the "notice effect" can be controlled. Such a notice effect suggests (notices) the degree of expectation of winning whether or not the player has won the winning type, and works as a "fanning effect" to fuel the player's expectation of winning the winning type. Typical notice productions include "reach production (production mode related to reach fluctuation pattern)", "pseudo-continuous production", "player participation type production", and "look-ahead notice production". The content of the game is enlivened by the advance notice. The effect control unit 24 includes a notice effect control means capable of executing (appearing) and controlling these advance notice effects.

The “reach effect” refers to an effect mode accompanied by a reach state, and specifically, an effect mode in which a game result can be derived and displayed via the reach state. The reach effect includes a plurality of types of reach effect associated with the winning expectation. For example, there are cases where the winning expectation is relatively higher than when normal reach (N reach) appears. Such a reach production is called "super reach (SP reach)". Most of these "SP reach" have a relatively longer production time (variable time) than the N reach in order to fuel the player's expectation of winning. The N reach of the present embodiment includes a plurality of types of N reach such as "N reach 1 and 2", and the SP reach includes a plurality of types of SP reach such as "weak SP reach, medium SP reach, and strong SP reach". Is included. Regarding the relationship of the winning expectation between the same type of reach, there is a relationship of "N reach 1 <N reach 2" and "weak SP reach <medium SP reach <strong SP reach". The actual expectation of winning a big hit changes depending on whether or not other notice effects are involved. For this reason, for example, even when a weak SP reach appears, the winning expectation level can be equal to or higher than that of the medium SP reach if a notice effect with a high expectation for a big hit is involved.

The "pseudo-continuous production" refers to a production mode accompanied by a pseudo continuous fluctuation display state (pseudo-variation) of a decorative pattern. This "pseudo-variation" means that a part or all of the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the decorative symbol variation display game (during the temporary stop state, it may be in the reach state or the non-reach state). A variable display mode in which a display operation such as executing a re-variable display operation of a decorative symbol from the temporarily stopped state is repeated once or a plurality of times. In this respect, it is different from the "look-ahead notice effect" described later, which can be developed over a plurality of symbol variation display games. Basically, the rate of occurrence of such "pseudo-ream" is set so that the higher the number of pseudo-variations, the higher the expectation of winning. For example, the more the number of pseudo-variations, the more the winning. Expectations for the occurrence of highly expected notice effects (SP reach, etc.) are increasing.

The "player participation type production" is a production mode belonging to the so-called "button notice production", in which the player performs a predetermined operation (for example, pressing, long pressing, repeated hitting, etc.) on the production button 13 (operation means). This is a notice production mode in which the content of the production can be changed based on the operation). In the player participation type effect, an operation instruction effect for instructing the effect button 13 to perform a predetermined operation appears during the predetermined button valid period, and the effect button 13 is operated during the button valid period. Based on this, the current production mode changes to another production mode (production during operation) (for example, the character display changes, a special sound effect or light effect is generated, etc.), and the production mode before and after the operation (production). Depending on the content), the degree of expectation of winning will be announced.

The "look-ahead notice effect" is mainly for the hold display mode and the destination of the operation hold ball (undigested operation hold ball) that has not yet been used for the execution of the symbol change display game (special symbol change display operation). This is an effect mode in which the winning expectation degree regarding the operation holding ball can be notified in advance by using the background effect of the symbol variation display game executed in.

The screen display of the liquid crystal display device according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 5, including the pre-reading notice effect. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram provided for explaining the screen display of the liquid crystal display device 36 according to the present embodiment.

In a part of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 (in the figure, below the display area of the decorative symbol), a hold display area 76 for displaying the number of special pattern 1 operation hold balls and the number of special figure 2 operation hold balls are displayed. A hold display area 77 to be displayed is provided, and the presence or absence of the operation hold ball is indicated by a lighting state (with operation hold ball: “○ (white circle)” in the figure) or an off state (without operation hold ball:). Information on the current number of pending balls is notified by the dashed circles in the figure).

The display regarding the presence or absence of the operation holding ball (hereinafter referred to as "hold display") is sequentially displayed in the order of occurrence (winning order), and in each of the hold display areas 76 and 77, the leftmost operation hold ball corresponds to the operation hold ball. Of all the active hold balls in the hold display, it is displayed as the earliest (that is, the oldest) active hold ball on the time axis. In the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, hold display units a1 to d1 (icon images) composed of hold icons (icon images) provided in a part of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 in the same number (4 pieces) as the maximum number of hold storages (4). (Corresponding to the special symbol 1 side) and a2 to d2 (corresponding to the special symbol 2 side) are provided. Further, on the left side of the hold display areas 76 and 77, a changing display area 78 for showing the operation hold ball actually used in the special symbol change display game is provided. In the case of this embodiment, the changing display area 78 is configured so that an image in which the icon of the game execution hold K currently used for the game is placed appears on the icon of the seat J. That is, when the variable display of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is started, the oldest icon (icon image) of the hold a1 or a2 displayed in the hold display areas 76 and 77 is the hold K during game execution. As an icon, the icon is moved onto the icon of the seat J in the changing display area 78, and the state is maintained for a predetermined display time.

When an operation-holding ball is generated, as an effect control command, the look-ahead determination information related to the jackpot lottery result and the number of operation-holding balls at the time of the look-ahead judgment (the number of existing operation-holding balls including the operation-holding ball generated this time) are input. A identifiable "hold addition command" is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (see step S323 in FIG. 21 described later).

Specifically, the pre-reading determination information includes the jackpot lottery result (big hit lottery result at the start of fluctuation) executed when the operation holding ball is provided to the symbol variation display game in the main control unit 20. It refers to game information related to a look-ahead fluctuation pattern obtained when a look-ahead determination is made for a fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation. Therefore, this pre-reading determination information includes at least the pre-reading determination result (pre-reading winning result) information of the winning lottery result at the start of the fluctuation, and other information such as the pre-reading determination result (pre-reading symbol result) information of the symbol lottery result and the fluctuation start. The look-ahead determination result (look-ahead fluctuation pattern) information regarding the time fluctuation pattern can be included. What kind of information is included in the hold addition command to be sent to the effect control unit 24 can be appropriately determined depending on what kind of notice content is to be notified. It should be noted that the "look-ahead fluctuation pattern" obtained by the look-ahead determination when the operation-holding ball is generated does not necessarily have to be the "variation pattern at the start of fluctuation" obtained when the operation-holding ball is subjected to the fluctuation display operation. .. For example, in the case of a fluctuation pattern in which "N reach 1" is specified at the start of fluctuation, the content specified by the look-ahead fluctuation pattern is not the type of reach itself of "N reach 1", but the gist of it, "N reach". Species (N reach 1 or N reach 2) ”may be specified.

When the effect control unit 24 receives the hold addition command, based on the look-ahead determination information included in the hold addition command, the effect control process related to the "look-ahead notice effect" is performed as a part of the display control process related to the hold display. Specifically, based on the information included in the hold addition command, a look-ahead notice lottery is performed to draw a lottery as to whether or not the look-ahead notice effect can be executed. A look-ahead notice effect will be displayed according to the degree of expectation of winning. The winning probability of the pre-reading notice lottery is higher for the "big hit" than for the "missing", and for the reach type with a relatively high expectation of winning. Therefore, the degree of expectation of winning the winning type is indicated depending on whether or not the pre-reading notice effect occurs.

In this embodiment, when the look-ahead notice lottery is won, among the hold icons of the hold display units a1 to d1 and a2 to d2, the hold icon targeted for the look-ahead notice is, for example, a normal hold display (normally). Pre-reading notice effect of "hold display change system" such as changing from white of hold display mode) to special hold color such as blue, green, red, rainbow color of notice display and hold display of color (special hold display mode) (Pending change notice) will be held. FIG. 5 shows an example in which the hatched hold display unit b1 has changed to a special hold display. Here, the display of the blue, green, red, and rainbow colors of the hold icon means that the winning expectation is high in the order of this color, and in particular, the display of the rainbow-colored hold icon is a big hit confirmation (correct). Since it is a premium hold icon (notice of reservation) to be displayed, this hold display unit functions as a hold display means for displaying the number of operation holds. However, when executing the look-ahead notice effect, the hold display mode of one of the hold display units a1 to d1 and a2 to d2 is changed to a predetermined look-ahead notice display mode (special hold display mode). However, this works as a means to bring out the look-ahead notice effect.

The existing operation hold balls are sequentially digested when the symbol variation display game is executed. At this time, in order to express that one operation-holding ball has been digested, the display position of the hold display unit corresponding to the existing operation-holding ball is moved forward (shifted to the left side in sequence), and the number of the display is reduced. Although control (shift display) is performed, the above-mentioned special hold display continues to be displayed continuously while changing the display position of the hold display during this period. Further, when the hold K during game execution is placed on the seat J, basically, the same display mode as the hold display mode in the hold display areas 76 and 77 is maintained, and the operation related to the current symbol variation display game is maintained. The pre-reading notice display mode for the reserved ball is notified to the player even during the game.

Further, in the lower right corner of the liquid crystal screen shown in FIG. 5, as a display area for a sub-effect (sub-effect) different from the main effect such as a decorative symbol or a notice effect, a variable display operation of a special symbol or a normal symbol is related. A sub-display area 75 is provided and is indicated by six small squares. In the illustration, the sub display area 75 is exaggerated for convenience of explanation.

Of the six squares related to the sub-display area 75, the upper and middle rows are display areas related to special symbols, and the lower row is a display area related to ordinary symbols. Specifically, the left square in the upper row is the first reserved number display area for displaying the number of balls held in special figure 1, and the right square in the upper row is the first square for displaying whether or not special figure 1 is in variable display. 1 It is a fluctuation presence / absence display area, and the left square in the middle row is the second holding number display area that displays the number of balls on hold, and the right square in the middle row is whether or not special figure 2 is displaying fluctuations. Is the second fluctuation presence / absence display area for displaying. In the present embodiment, the number of holds is indicated by Arabic numerals in the first hold number display area and the second hold number display area, and the first change presence / absence display area and the second change presence / absence display area are not shown, but are symbols. If it is fluctuating, "⇔" is displayed blinking, and if the symbol is stopped, any of "x", "△", and "○" is displayed. In the display of "x", "△", and "○", "x" indicates a lost symbol, "△" indicates a small hit symbol, and "○" indicates a stopped state in a large hit symbol. Therefore, when any of these "x", "Δ", and "○" is displayed, the special symbol is in the non-variable state (stop display state). Further, the left square in the lower row is a third reserved number display area for displaying the number of balls held in the normal figure operation, and the right square in the lower row is a third fluctuation presence / absence display for displaying whether or not the normal figure is in the variable display. It is an area. In the 3rd reserved number display area, the number of reserved balls for normal operation is indicated by Arabic numerals, and in the 3rd fluctuation presence / absence display area, although not shown, "red circle" and "blue circle" are displayed when the symbol is changing. Are displayed alternately, and if the symbol is stopped, either "○ (white circle)" or "● (black circle)" is displayed. "○" indicates a lost symbol, and "●" indicates a stopped state in a normal symbol. In the figure, special figure 1 has "3" operating reserved balls, special figure 1 has a non-variable state (stopped at a lost symbol), special figure 2 has "0" operating reserved balls, and special figure 2 has a non-variable state (lost). An example is shown in which the number of balls held to operate the normal figure is "1" and the normal figure is in a non-variable state (stopped at the winning symbol).

Since the images displayed in the first fluctuation presence / absence display area and the second fluctuation presence / absence display area indicate whether or not the fluctuation display of the special figures 1 and 2 is in progress, 4 different from the three decorative symbols As the second symbol, it is referred to as the "fourth symbol" of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2. Further, the effect image displayed in the third variation presence / absence display area is a variation display of the ordinary decorative symbol by the image in time with the variation display of the ordinary symbol by the ordinary symbol display device 39a, and the third variation presence / absence is displayed. The display area is a display area for a normal decorative symbol variation display game.

(5-4. Directing means)
Various effects in the game machine 1 are expressed by the effect means provided in the game machine. Such a directing means may be any stimulus transmitting means capable of exerting a directing effect by appealing to human perception such as sight, hearing, and touch, and is a light generating means (light directing means) such as a decorative lamp 45 or an LED device. ), Sound generator (sound effect means) such as speaker 46, effect display device (display means) such as liquid crystal display device 36, pressurizing device that transmits contact pressure to the operator's body, and applies wind pressure to the player's body. A typical example is a wind pressure device or a movable body accessory that exerts a visual effect by its operation. Here, the effect display device is a display device that appeals to the eyes like the image display device, but differs from the image display device in that it includes a display device that does not depend on an image (for example, a 7-segment display). The term "image display device" mainly refers to a type in which an effect is displayed by displaying an image, and a device that displays an effect by means other than an image, such as a 7-segment display, is included in the concept of the effect display device.

<Processing on the main control unit side: FIGS. 6A to 36>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 6A to 36, the game operation processing on the main control unit 20 side of the present embodiment will be described. The processing on the main control unit 20 side is an infinite loop-shaped main processing (main control side main processing: FIGS. 6A and 6B) and a timer interrupt processing activated by a scheduled interrupt from the CTC (main control side timer interrupt). Processing: Consists of including FIG. 17).

<6. Main control side main processing: FIG. 6A and FIG. 6B>
The main process on the main control unit 20 side (main process on the main control side) will be described with reference to FIGS. 6A and 6B.

6A and 6B are flowcharts showing the details of the main processing on the main control side. In the following description of the main processing on the main control side, processing closely related to the present invention will be described with reference to the source code shown in FIGS. 31A and 31B (which may also be referred to as a “program” depending on the situation). However, FIGS. 31A and 31B exemplify a part of the source code of the main processing on the main control side described in the storage order in the memory, and the arrow on the right side of the description column of the source code. Is executed according to the combination of the input state (ON / OFF state) of the setting key switch 94, the door opening sensor 61, and the RAM clear switch 98 (setting key switch signal, door opening signal, RAM clear switch signal). About the processing route ("setting change processing route", "RAM clear processing route", "setting confirmation processing route", "backup restoration processing route", "repower on wait processing (RAM error processing) route" described later) The processing contents executed in the processing route and the execution order of the processing are shown corresponding to the source code. In each processing route, the processing of steps S011 to S014 described later is executed in common, and then, depending on the combination of the ON / OFF state of the setting key switch 94, the door opening sensor 61, and the RAM clear switch 98. , Processing is branched (conditional branching).

When the main control side starts the main process, the watchdog timer (WDT) function is exerted and the CPU is activated when a system reset occurs when recovering from a power failure or power failure, or when the control program runs out of control. May be forcibly reset (WDT reset). In any case, when the main control side main process is started, the main control unit 20 (CPU201) first executes the initial setting process necessary for starting the game operation as a part of the power-on process (step S011). ).

(7. Initial setting process: Fig. 7)
First, the initial setting process of step S011 will be described with reference to the columns (SPa1 to SPA26) of the initial setting process of FIGS. 7 and 31A. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the details of the initial setting process.

In FIG. 7, when a system reset or a WDT reset occurs, the CPU 201 first sets itself to the interrupt disabled state as an initial setting at startup (steps S051 and SPA1).

Next, the stack pointer SP is set (step S052). Here, 00FFH is set (set) in the stack pointer SP (SPa2). As a result, the address 00FEH or less in the RAM 203 is set as the stack area for the in-area program, and the address 01FEH or less is set as the stack area for the out-of-area program (see FIG. 29).

Next, the protected and prohibited areas of the RAM are invalidated in preparation for the use of the stack in the first power supply abnormality check process (_ VDDCHK) described later (step S053, SPA3). RAM protection is a function for preventing rewriting of RAM due to malfunction or erroneous operation. The operation of RAM protection is as follows. RAM protection is effective (RAM protection state) after a system reset or WDT reset occurs when the power is restored. Data can be read from the RAM when RAM protection is enabled, but data cannot be written to the RAM. Therefore, when writing data to RAM, it is necessary to disable RAM protection. In the present embodiment, the validity / invalidity of the RAM protect and the RAM access prohibited area is controlled according to the value of the RAM protect register (RAMPT). Specifically, when the RAMPT is 00H, it is controlled to "RAM access prohibited area invalid, RAM protect invalid", and when the RAMPT is 01H, it is controlled to "RAM access prohibited area invalid, RAM protect enabled", and RAMPT When is 80H, it is controlled to "RAM access prohibited area is valid, RAM protection is invalid". Further, when the RAM PT is 81H, it is set to "RAM access prohibited area valid, RAM protect valid". Therefore, here, 00H is set in the RAMPT (SPa3). When a system reset or a WDT reset occurs, the RAMPT is set to the RAM protected state (RAMPT = 81H), and the CTC and WDT are initialized. However, even if the system reset or WDT reset is performed, the stored contents of the RAM do not change.

Next, various setting processes at the time of turning on the power are executed (step S054). Here, in consideration of the possibility that the power is turned off / on during the setting change (for example, the setting change management process in step S023 described later), first, the exclusive OR (XOR) between the WA register pairs is taken into consideration. ) Is obtained (WA = 0000H) (SPa4), and the information for outputting the security signal (illegal detection signal for external output) of the external terminal board 21 for the frame is utilized by utilizing the fact that the value of the WA register pair is zero. It is used to clear the external terminal port 2 (P_GAIBU2) corresponding to the terminal to zero, and to set ON / OFF of the dynamic lighting data and the launch control signal (launch permission signal ES by the payout control board 28) for the setting display 97. The LED common port (P_LEDCMN) and the LED common buffer (W_LEDCMN) are each cleared to zero (Spa5 to Spa7). As a result, the output port for the security signal is temporarily cleared, and the setting display 97 is set to the off state. In addition, the launch control signal is set to the OFF state, and it is prevented that the launch control signal is inadvertently output.

Next, the first power supply abnormality check process (_ VDDCHK) is executed (step S055). Here, the first power supply abnormality check process (_ VDDCHK) of the subroutine is called and executed by the CALLV instruction (SPa8). This'CALLV'instruction is a kind of CALL instruction, but unlike a normal CALL instruction, it is an instruction to execute a subroutine defined in advance in the vector table (CALLV instruction vector table) of the CALL instruction vector area of ROM202. It has become. In detail, the normal CALL instruction (CALL mn) is an instruction that executes a subroutine starting from the address (mn address) specified by the upper address and the lower address, whereas the CALLV instruction is one of the addresses. Since the upper address that composes the part is defined in the vector table as a specific value, the address of the subroutine can be specified by specifying only the lower address, and the subroutine is called with a smaller amount of data than the CALL instruction. It is a special CALL instruction that can be executed (CALLV instruction is 1 byte, normal CALL instruction is 3 bytes). Therefore, the CALLV instruction is suitable for executing a frequently used subroutine.

(8. First power supply abnormality check process: Fig. 8)
The first power supply abnormality check process (_ VDDCHK) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the details of the first power supply abnormality check process.

In this first power supply abnormality check process, the CPU 201 first clears the WDT (step S701), and then acquires the input information of the power supply abnormality signal indicating a power failure from the external signal input register (PINSTS) (step S702). .. As shown in the figure, the 0th bit (b0 to b7) of the external signal input register (PINSTS) has the 0th bit (b0) of the upper start port sensor signal (upper start port sensor 34a) ON /. The OFF state, the first bit (b1) is the ON / OFF state of the lower start port sensor signal (lower start port sensor 35a), and the second bit (b2) is the ON / OFF state of the power supply abnormality signal (voltage drop signal). The third bit (b3) to the seventh bit (b7) are unused.

When the power supply abnormality signal acquired in step S702 is in the ON state (b2 = 1) (step S703: YES), the process proceeds to the first process (step S011) of the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 6A, and when the power is turned on. And so on, the processes after step S011 are sequentially executed. However, when the acquired power supply abnormality signal is not in the ON state (step S703: NO), it is assumed that the operation is normal, and the first power supply abnormality check process is exited, and the internal function register initial setting process (step S056) of FIG. 7 is performed. Transition.

Returning to FIG. 7 again, if the power supply abnormality signal is not in the ON state, the internal function register initial setting process is executed (step S056, Spa9 to Spa13). Here, the internal function register value of the CPU including each part of the microcomputer is executed. Perform the initial setting process for. In D_REGINI1 shown in FIG. 31A, initial values related to various internal function register values inside the CPU are defined, and according to SPA9 to Spa13, for example, in addition to the RAM protect register, CTC, WDT, serial port for transmission / reception, interrupt mode ( (Set to interrupt mode 2), interrupt priority, internal hard random number, internal soft random number, and other internal function registers are set to initial values.

Next, as a process of managing the start-up waiting time of the sub control board (effect control unit 24), the processes of steps S057 to S062 are executed. Specifically, first, as the above-mentioned start waiting time setting process, the loop count (for example, 240) is set in the B register (step S057, SPA14), and the start wait count value (for example, 13880) is set in the WA register pair. Is set (step S058, Spa15). Then, as the subtraction process of the start waiting time, the value of the WA register pair is decremented (step S059, Spa16), the value of the WA register pair becomes zero (step S060: NO, Spa17), and the value of the WA register pair is decremented. When becomes zero (step S060: YES, Spa17), the first power supply abnormality check process of FIG. 8 is executed (step S061, Spa18) until the number of loops (value of the B register) becomes zero (step). S063: NO, Spa19), the processing of steps S059 to S062 is repeated. As a result, the CPU 201 waits for the execution of subsequent processing until the sub-control board starts normally. The startup waiting time secured by the series of processes in steps S059 to S063 is set to about 2000 ms in consideration of the number of instruction cycles of SPA10 to Spa15, the count value for starting, the number of loops, and the CPU operating frequency. Will be done. The reason for counting the start-up waiting time in this way is that it is preferable not to execute an inadvertent timer interrupt process (FIG. 17) until the game start enable condition is satisfied in order to avoid a control burden when the power is restored. Because. Details will be described later, but in this timer interrupt process, input management process for monitoring the ON / OFF state of switches, LED management process for LED display control, control process for symbol variation display game, control process for hit game, etc. , Various processes related to normal game progress are executed.

Therefore, in the case of the present embodiment, the timer interrupt process on the main control side is not activated at this stage (the timer interrupt process is activated in step S036 described later). Therefore, since the timer value cannot be counted by the timer interrupt process, a device is devised to set the startup waiting time using the number of instruction cycles, the count value for starting, the number of loops, the CPU operating frequency, and the like.

If the start waiting time has elapsed (step S063: YES (B = 0)), the standby screen display command data (BA01H) is acquired (step S064, SPA20), and the acquired command data is shown in FIG. It is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 by the command transmission process (step S070) (step S065, Spa21). The command transmission process in step S065 is a subroutine (_CMDOUT) that is called and executed by a CALLV instruction as shown in FIG. 9 as shown in SPA21 of FIG. 31A. For example, a predetermined register pair (for example, The effect control command data having a length of 2 bytes set in the DE register) is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 side (SPa20 to Spa21, step S070). The command transmission process (_CMDOUT) is a subroutine commonly used in various processes that require the transmission of command data. In the present embodiment, when it is necessary to transmit the effect command, the command transmission process (_CMDOUT) of FIG. 9 is called and executed by the CALLV command after the command data is acquired. This simplifies the command transmission control process when transmitting the effect control command at various timings, thereby reducing the control load.

When the effect control unit 24 receives the standby screen display command, the effect means is used to display the standby effect when the power is turned on. For example, the liquid crystal display device 36 is made to display an effect image such as "Please Wait".

Next, the first power supply abnormality check process of FIG. 8 is executed (step S066, SPA22), and the “power-on signal and payout communication confirmation signal (hereinafter,“ power-on signal ”)” from the payout control board 29 is output. Wait for it to be sent (steps S067 to S069, Spa23 to Spa26). This power-on signal is a signal that is output when the payout control board 29 normally starts up, and ON / OFF information of the power-on signal is acquired from the input port 1 (P_INPT1) described later. The CPU 201 waits for the payout control board 29 to start normally without completing the initial setting process. Therefore, if the payout control board 29 is not functioning normally due to some trouble, the steps S066 to S069 are performed. The game operation is not started only by repeating the process. Then, when the power-on signal is turned ON (step S069: ON), the initial setting process is exited, the process returns to the main control side main process of FIG. 6A, and the branch determination information acquisition process of step S013 is executed. To do.

If the processing flow of steps S066 to S069 described above is described in detail according to the source code (SYSTEM_50 shown) shown in FIG. 31A, the processing content is as follows.

In SYSTEM_50 of FIG. 31A, the CPU 201 first calls and executes the first power supply abnormality check process (_ VDDCHK: FIG. 8) of the subroutine by the CALLV instruction, and checks whether or not the power supply abnormality signal is ON (SPa22). ..

Next, the 8-bit data (input information) of the input port 1 (P_INPT1) is read into the A register (SPa23), and the read data is transferred (COPY) to the W register (SPa24). These Spa23 to Spa24 correspond to the "input port 1 data acquisition process" of the process of step S067, and the information of the input port 1 acquired in this process (input port 1 (P_INPT1) set in the W register). The input information) is also used in the “branch determination information acquisition process (step S013)” shown in FIG. 6A, which will be described later.

As shown in the figure, the 0th bit (b0 to b7) of the input port 1 (P_INPT1) has the 0th bit (b0) indicating the ON / OFF state of the setting key switch signal (setting key switch 94). , The first bit (b1) indicates the ON / OFF state of the supply shortage signal, the second bit (b2) indicates the ON / OFF state of the ball count error signal, and the third bit (b3) indicates the disconnection detection signal 1. The 4th bit (b4) is the ON / OFF signal of the disconnection detection signal 2, and the 5th bit (b5) is the ON / OFF state of the door opening signal (door opening sensor 61) (opening of the door (for example, front frame 2) / The closed state), the sixth bit (b6) indicates the ON / OFF state of the RAM clear signal (RAM clear switch 98), and the seventh bit (b7) indicates the ON / OFF state of the power-on signal.

The above-mentioned "RAM clear signal" is a signal for determining whether or not to initialize a predetermined area of RAM, and is usually an ON / OFF state (ON operation / OFF operation) of the RAM clear switch 98 operated by a hall clerk. Has a value corresponding to. The "setting key switch signal" is one of the signals for determining whether or not to shift to the setting change mode in which the set value can be changed, and is usually ON / ON of the setting key switch 94 operated by the hall clerk. It has a value corresponding to the OFF state (ON operation / OFF operation). Therefore, if the acquisition timing of the RAM clear signal or the setting key switch signal is delayed, the hall clerk releases the switch and misses the ON operation. However, in the present embodiment, such a situation is avoided. Therefore, these signals are acquired promptly when the power is restored. The "disconnection detection signal" is an error signal that occurs when the wiring (harness) connecting the boards or between the boards and various sensors is detected when the wiring (harness) is disconnected or short-circuited. For example, if the wiring between the main control unit 20 (main board) and the payout control board 29 is broken, or if the wiring between the main control unit 20 and the upper start port sensor 34a is broken, signals cannot be transmitted or received. Therefore, the disconnection detection signal is also quickly acquired. For each bit value, it is "1" when indicating the ON state, and is "0" when indicating the OFF state.

After finishing Spa23 to Spa24, the value of the 7th bit (b7) of the A register, that is, the ON / OFF data of the power-on signal of the input port 1 (P_INPT1) is set in the carry flag CF (SPa25). If the carry flag CF is not 1 (CF ≠ 1), that is, if the power-on signal is not ON (b7 ≠ 1), the jump is made to the start address of SYSTEM_50, that is, the first power supply abnormality check process in step S066. Returning to (_ VDDCHK), the processes of steps S066 to S069 are repeatedly executed until the carry flag CF is 1 (CF = 1), that is, the power-on signal is ON (b7 = 1) (SPa26). Then, when the power-on signal is turned ON, the initial setting process is exited, the process returns to the main control side main process of FIG. 6A, and then the branch determination information acquisition process of step S013 is executed.

Returning to the description of FIGS. 6A and 6B, when the above-mentioned initial setting process (step S011) is completed, the branch determination information acquisition process of FIG. 6A is executed (step S013). In this branch determination information acquisition process, the value of the W register, that is, the 8 bits of the input port 1 (P_INPT1) transferred to the W register in the input port 1 data acquisition process (step S067) during the initial setting process of FIG. The logical product (AND) of the data and the mask data "01100001B" is taken, and the bits other than the 0th bit corresponding to the setting key switch signal, the 5th bit corresponding to the door open signal, and the 6th bit corresponding to the RAM clear signal are obtained. Mask the bits (SPb1). As a result, the ON / OFF state (signal state (input state)) of the current setting key switch signal, door open signal, and RAM clear signal is acquired in the W register. For example, if the bit pattern of the W register after masking is "01100001B (0th bit, 5th bit, 6th bit are ON)", the setting key switch signal, the door open signal, and the RAM clear signal are in the ON state, respectively. If it is "00000001B (0th bit is ON)", it means that the door open signal and the RAM clear signal are in the OFF state, and only the setting key switch signal is in the ON state.

In the present embodiment, a combination of three signals, a setting key switch signal (setting key switch 94), a door opening signal (door opening sensor 61), and a RAM clear signal (RAM clear switch 98), that is, a combination of ON / OFF states, that is, The processing content (processing route) to be executed differs depending on the value of the W register (combination of the values of the 0th bit, the 5th bit, and the 6th bit) obtained by the mask processing in step S013 (SPb1). It has become.

(About the processing content of the migration destination by conditional branching: Fig. 30)
In order to facilitate the understanding of the present invention, it is first executed according to the value of the W register (combination of the values of the 0th bit, the 5th bit, and the 6th bit) described above with reference to FIG. The outline of the processing route will be explained. FIG. 30 shows the execution according to the combination of the ON / OFF states of the setting key switch signal, the door opening signal, and the RAM clear signal (combination of the values of the 0th bit, the 5th bit, and the 6th bit of the W register). Indicates the processing route (migration destination processing route).

As shown in FIG. 30, there are a total of eight types of ON / OFF state combinations indicating the input states of the three signals of the setting key switch signal, the door opening signal, and the RAM clear signal. That is, it is branched (shifted) to any of the following processing routes (a) to (d) according to the value of the W register obtained in the branch determination information acquisition process (step S013). ing. In the following, for convenience of explanation, the combination of the values of the W register (0th bit, 5th bit, 6th bit) is set to'W (x, y, z)'(however, "x, y, z". Each value of "" is written as 0 or 1).

<(B) Setting change processing route (setting change mode)>
When the input states of the three signals of the setting key switch signal, the door open signal, and the RAM clear signal are all ON states (when W (x, y, z) = W (1, 1, 1)), CPU201 Shifts the processing state to the "setting change processing route (steps S021 to S024, S030 to S032)" on the assumption that the setting change mode transition condition is satisfied. This setting change processing route is a processing route in which'setting change management process (step S023)'that controls the setting changeable state and'intra-area RAM clear process (step S031)' that clears a predetermined area of RAM are executed. For example, it is transferred when a person related to the hall or the like performs a "setting change operation". Although details will be described later, when the route is shifted to the setting change processing route, the area (area) of the work area (storage area) of the RAM 203 excluding at least the storage area (measurement information storage area) related to the display control of the performance display 99. The entire area of the RAM in the area except the outer RAM) is cleared (reset).

In the present embodiment, when the process is not transferred to the setting change processing route, one of the following "RAM clear processing route", "setting confirmation processing route", and "backup restoration processing route" is processed according to the value of the W register. Migrated to root.

<(B) RAM clear processing route (RAM clear mode)>
When at least one of the setting key switch signal and the door open signal is in the OFF state and the RAM clear signal is in the ON state (W (x, y, z) = W (1, 0, 1), W ( 0, 1, 1), W (0, 0, 1)), CPU201 assumes that the RAM clear mode transition condition is satisfied, and sets the processing state to "RAM clear processing route (steps S029 to S032)". Migrate to. This RAM clear processing route is a processing route in which the intra-area RAM clear processing (step S031) is executed without executing the setting change management process (step S023) described later. Is shifted to the case where a specific area of RAM is cleared by "RAM clear operation" without performing "setting change operation". Although details will be described later, the "specific area" is a storage area of the RAM 203 excluding at least the set value storage area and the out-of-area RAM area. Therefore, when the RAM clear processing route is executed, the range of RAM clear is limited as compared with the case where the above setting change processing route is executed.

<(C) Setting confirmation processing route (setting confirmation mode)>
When the setting key switch signal and the door open signal are in the ON state and the RAM clear signal is in the OFF state (when W (x, y, z) = W (1, 1, 0)), the CPU 201 confirms the setting. Assuming that the mode transition condition is satisfied, the processing state is shifted to the "setting confirmation processing route (steps S027 to S028)". This setting confirmation processing route controls the current setting value to a confirmable setting confirmation state without executing the setting change management process (step S023) and the in-area RAM clear processing (step S031). (Step S027)'and'backup restoration process (step S028)'to restore backup data are executed as a processing route. For example, a hall-related person or the like performs a "setting confirmation operation" to perform the current setting value. Will be migrated when confirming.

<(D) Backup recovery processing route (backup recovery mode)>
When at least one of the setting key switch signal and the door open signal is in the OFF state and the RAM clear signal is in the OFF state (W (x, y, z) = W (1, 0, 0), W (0) , 1, 0), W (0, 0, 0)), the CPU 201 shifts the processing state to the "backup recovery processing route (step S028)" on the assumption that the backup recovery mode transition condition is satisfied. .. In this backup restoration processing route, the backup restoration processing (step S028) is performed without executing any of the setting change management processing (step S023), the in-area RAM clear processing (step S031), and the setting confirmation processing (step S027). Is executed, for example, when a person involved in the hall or the like restores the power supply without performing any of the setting change operation, the RAM clear operation, and the setting confirmation operation.

<(F) Power supply wait processing route (RAM error mode)>
If the process is not transferred to the "setting change processing route" in (a) above as described above, the "RAM clear processing route", "setting confirmation processing route", and "backup restoration processing route" in (b) to (d) above It will be shifted to any processing route, but in the present embodiment, prior to these processes, "RAM error determination process (RAM error determination process) for determining whether or not an abnormality (RAM error) has occurred in the contents of RAM 203 (RAM error determination process). Steps S015 to S016) "are to be executed. When it is determined in this RAM error determination process that a RAM error has occurred, it is assumed that the RAM error mode (power re-on wait processing mode) transition condition is satisfied, and the processing state is "power re-on wait processing route". (Steps S017 to S020) ”. When the route is shifted to the power re-on wait processing route, for example, the progress of the game processing is forcibly stopped as a predetermined error processing.

As described above, the power re-on wait processing route is a processing route that is migrated when an abnormality occurs in the RAM contents, but when it is migrated to the above setting change processing route, the RAM error determination processing is performed. It is not executed and therefore is not migrated to the power cycle wait processing route. Details will be described later, but when the route is shifted to the setting change processing route, the entire area of the RAM in the area (including the setting value storage area) is performed by the setting change management process (step S023) and the RAM clear processing in the area (step S031) described later. The work area related to a normal game) is substantially initialized (cleared). That is, when shifting to the "setting change processing route", even if the RAM data is damaged, the damaged data is initialized. Therefore, when the setting is changed, a RAM error does not occur after that, and it is not necessary to execute the RAM error determination process and check whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the RAM contents. .. For this reason, when shifting to the setting change processing route, the RAM error determination process is prevented from being executed, and the contents of the RAM are not checked indiscriminately to reduce the control load.

On the other hand, when shifting to the "RAM clear processing route" that clears a specific area of the RAM in the area, or the "setting confirmation processing route" or "backup recovery processing route" that does not execute the RAM clear processing itself, the RAM Even if the data is corrupted, it may remain uncleared. As a result, there may be a problem that the processing runs out of control or the backup data cannot be restored. Therefore, when migrating to a processing route other than the setting change processing route, the contents of the RAM are checked in advance prior to the execution of the processing, and if there is an abnormality, it is assumed that a RAM error has occurred and the power supply is supplied. It is designed to shift to the re-input waiting processing route. As a result, even when the process route is shifted to a processing route other than the setting change processing route, it is possible to prevent a problem caused by data corruption or the like. When a RAM error occurs, the RAM error is not cleared unless the power is turned on again and the RAM is cleared by the setting change processing route (see FIGS. 6A and 8 described later).

Returning to the description of FIG. 6A, after executing the branch determination information acquisition process (step S013), it is determined whether or not to shift the processing state to the'setting change processing route (setting change processing mode)'(setting change). Branch determination process: Step S014).

In this setting change branch determination process, the value of the W register of the first operand is compared with the 8-bit data '01100001B' specified by the second operand by the CP instruction, and the difference between them is calculated (SPb2). The process is branched according to whether or not the comparison result (subtraction result) is zero, that is, whether or not the setting key switch signal, the RAM clear signal, and the door open signal are all in the ON state (SPb3). When the calculation result by SPb2 is zero, the bit pattern of the W register is the same value as '01100001B', that is, the setting key switch signal, the RAM clear signal, and the door open signal are all ON states W (1, It is a combination of 1, 1) (W (x, y, z) = W (1, 1, 1)). On the other hand, if the comparison result by SPb2 is not zero, the combination is other than that. (W (x, y, z) ≠ W (1, 1, 1)).

Specifically, when the comparison result by SPb2 is zero, that is, "W (x, y, z) = W (1, 1, 1)", 1 is set in the zero flag ZF, and the comparison result is not zero. That is, when "W (x, y, z) ≠ W (1, 1, 1)", 0 is set in the zero flag ZF. Then, when the zero flag ZF is 1 (ZF = 1), that is, W (1, 1, 1) by the JR instruction of SPb3 (“JR NZ, SYSTEM_300”), the setting change mode transition condition Is established, the processing state is shifted to the setting change processing route (subsequent program'SPc1'is executed), and the zero flag ZF is not 1 (ZF = 0), that is, it is not W (1, 1, 1). (Jump to SYSTEM_300), assuming that the setting change mode transition condition is not satisfied, the processing state is shifted to the RAM error determination processing (determination processing in step S015) described later. As described above, in the present embodiment, the RAM error determination processing (steps S015 and S016) is not executed when the route is shifted to the setting change processing route.

In SPb3, as a jump instruction, an 8-bit relative jump "JR instruction" is adopted instead of a 16-bit absolute jump "JP instruction". In the JP instruction, the jump destination address is specified as an absolute address (16 bits (2 bytes)), whereas in the JR instruction, the jump destination address is specified as a relative address (8 bits (1 byte)). The JR instruction has the advantage that the program capacity can be reduced by one byte. However, since the range in which the jump destination can be specified for the JR instruction is in the range of -128 to +127 bytes from the location of the program counter (PC register), the range is also limited by the JP instruction for absolute jump. In this embodiment, from the viewpoint of reducing the program capacity, JR instructions are used for all the jump instructions used in the source code shown in FIGS. 31A and 31B, and a device is devised to maximize the small memory capacity. ..

(B. Setting change processing route (setting change mode): S014 → S021 to S024 → S030 to S032)
The processing contents of the setting change processing route will be described with reference to FIGS. 6A to 6B, FIGS. 10 and 31A to 31B. In the source code shown in FIGS. 31A and 31B, the execution order of the processing by the setting change processing route is indicated by a thick arrow and a number related to the “when setting change” column. In the following, in order to avoid duplicate description, the processing of steps S021 to S024 and steps S030 to S032 will be mainly described among the setting change processing routes.

When shifting to the setting change processing route, first, the command data (BA5AH) during the setting change is acquired (steps S021, SPc1), and the acquired command data is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 by the above command transmission process (_CMDOUT) (. Step S022, SPc2). When the effect control unit 24 receives the setting changing command, it executes the "setting changing effect" to notify that the setting value is being changed by using the effect means. For example, the decorative lamp 45 is turned on in all blue, the alarm sound of "setting is being changed ♪" is output from the speaker 16, and the effect image of "setting is being changed" is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36. The effect control unit 24 terminates the effect during setting change during execution when the setting completion command (BA09H), which will be described later, is received.

Next, the setting change management process (M_SETTI) is executed (step S023). Here, the subroutine setting change management process (M_SETTEI) is called and executed (SPc3).

(10. Setting change management process: Fig. 10)
The setting change management process (M_SETTEI) in step S023 will be described. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the details of the setting change management process.

In FIG. 10, the CPU 201 first clears the backup flag BF (step S901).

Next, the input data creation process is executed (step S902). In this input data creation process, input information such as the RAM clear switch 98, the setting change switch 95, and the setting key switch 96 is acquired. For example, the input management process of the main control side timer interrupt process (S083 in FIG. 17). Is to be called and executed.

Next, it is determined whether or not the set value Nc (set value data) stored in the set value storage area (W_SETTEI) of the RAM in the area is an abnormal value (value other than 00H to 05H) (step S903). In the present embodiment, when the setting change processing route is executed, the power restart waiting processing route (steps S017 to S020: RAM error processing) is not executed. Therefore, the set value Nc is checked in advance before the setting change operation, and if an abnormality occurs, the set value storage area is cleared (step S904). The processing contents of steps S903 to S904 will be described in detail below.

If it is a normal game operation, the set value storage area should store any set value data (set value Nc) of '00H to 05H (normal value)' corresponding to the settings 1 to 6. Is. However, there may be a case where the set value data is damaged due to some trouble and a value that does not correspond to any of the settings 1 to 6 is set. Therefore, when the set value Nc is not within the range of 00H to 05H, it can be determined that some trouble has occurred in the set value Nc.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the process of step S903, it is determined whether or not the set value Nc is within the range of 00H to 05H. Specifically, after acquiring the set value Nc in the C register, the value of the C register (set value Nc) and 06H are compared with each other by the CP instruction to obtain the difference between them, and the comparison result (subtraction result) is obtained. When "set value Nc <06H (subtraction result is negative)" (step S903: YES), it is assumed that the set value Nc is within the normal range, and the process jumps to step S905 described later, while "set value Nc". In the case of "≧ 06H (subtraction result is not negative)" (step S903: NO), it is assumed that the set value Nc is an abnormal value, and the initial value 00H (setting 1) is set in the set value storage area (setting). Value Nc ← 00H). The initial value of the set value is not limited to the setting 1 (00H), and may be any value of the setting 2 to the setting 6 (01H to 05H).

Proceeding to the process of step S905, the first power supply abnormality check process (_ VDDCHK) shown in FIG. 8 is executed (step S905).

Next, a security signal (setting changing signal and / or door open state signal) indicating that the setting is being changed (setting changing operation) is output from the frame external terminal board 21 (step S906), and then, The chattering prevention waiting time (for example, about 0.12 ms) is set (step S907). Then, it waits for the chattering prevention waiting time to elapse (step S908, step S909: NO). In the present embodiment, the processing of steps S905 to S916 is repeated at high speed until the setting completion change switch 96 is turned off (step S916: YES described later), and whether or not there is a setting change operation each time, that is, setting. Whether or not the change switch 95 has changed from OFF to ON is determined, but by providing the chattering prevention waiting time in steps S907 to S909, erroneous detection due to chattering of the setting change switch 95 can be prevented.

When the chattering prevention waiting time becomes 0 (step S909: YES), the above input data creation process is executed (step S910), and whether or not the setting change switch 95 is in the ON state, that is, the setting change operation is performed. The presence or absence is determined (step S911). In the present embodiment, when the ON edge of the setting change switch 95 is detected, it is determined that the setting change operation has been performed. In the present embodiment, the input data creation process for acquiring the input information of the setting change switch 95 is executed not only in step S910 immediately before step S911 but also in step S902 at the start of the setting change management process. .. This is because when the setting change process is started while the setting change switch 95 is being pressed, even if the ON edge of the setting change switch 95 suddenly stands up, it is detected empty in step S910. This is to prevent the determination process in step S911 from being affected.

If the setting change switch 95 is not in the ON state (step S9111: NO), it is assumed that there is no setting change operation, and the process proceeds to step S915. On the other hand, when the setting change switch 95 is in the ON state (step S911: YES), the current set value Nc is changed (updated) assuming that there is a setting change operation (step S912). As described above, the setting value during the setting change (during the setting change operation) is switched so as to circulate in the range of the settings 1 to 6 each time the setting change switch 95 is operated.

Then, when the process of step S912 is completed, it is determined again whether or not the current set value Nc is a normal value (step S913), and if it is not a normal value (step S913: NO), the set value Nc is set. Set 00H (setting 1) corresponding to setting 1 (setting value Nc ← 00H) (step S914).

Next, based on the current set value Nc, the setting display data to be displayed on the setting display 97 is created and output (step S915). As a result, the setting display 97 displays the current setting value during the setting change. However, the set value displayed here is a "provisional set value" before the set value is finalized.

When the process of step S915 is completed, it is determined whether or not the setting change completion switch 96 is in the ON state, that is, whether or not the setting change operation (setting change period) is completed (step S916). If the setting change completion switch 96 is not in the ON state (step S916: NO), assuming that the setting change operation is not completed (setting change operation end condition is not satisfied), the process proceeds to step S905, and thereafter, the setting change completion switch 96 is performed. Is turned on (until the setting change operation end condition is satisfied), the processes of steps S905 to S916 are repeatedly executed.

If the setting change completion switch 96 is turned on (step S916: YES), assuming that the set value is confirmed, the current set value Nc (setting work value of the C register) is stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 203. (Step S917).

Next, the set value confirmation display process is executed (step S918). In this setting value confirmation display process, the current setting display data is cleared and the setting confirmation LED lighting display data is output. The setting confirmation LED of the present embodiment has the function of the DP section (decimal point) of the setting display 97, which is a 7-segment LED, and when the setting change completion switch 96 is turned on, the set value being displayed disappears. , Only the DP section lights up, and it is notified that the set value has been confirmed (setting confirmation display). In the present embodiment, the display mode in which only the DP unit is lit when the setting is confirmed has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is not particularly limited as long as the display mode can identify that the set value has been determined. For example, a setting value display such as "7" or "8" that does not exist in the 6-step setting may be adopted, or an alphabet or the like may be adopted. However, it is preferable that the display mode is such that it can be identified that the set value has been determined.

The display mode of the set value confirmation display is not limited to the mode of lighting only the DP unit, and may be the following display mode of (A) or (B).
(A) Display (lights up) the DP section for a predetermined time together with the confirmed set value. For example, if the set value is 6, "6." or the like is displayed for 1 second.
(B) Instead of clearing the setting display data immediately, after displaying the finally confirmed set value for a predetermined time, turn on the DP section (simply display the predetermined time set value, and the DP section will display it. It does not have to be lit).
In the case of the above (A) and (B) configurations, the fixed set value is displayed for a predetermined time as compared with the configuration of'turning off the confirmed set value display and turning on only the DP unit' described in step S918. , There is an advantage that the operator (for example, a person involved in the hall) can firmly confirm the fixed set value.

Next, the output of the security signal (setting changing signal) is stopped (step S920), the setting completion command data (BA09H) is acquired (step S921), and the acquired command data is transmitted by the command transmission process (_CMDOUT). It is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S922). When the effect control unit 24 receives the setting completion command, the effect during the setting change being executed is terminated, and the "setting change completion effect" for notifying that the setting change is completed (the setting value is confirmed) is predetermined. It is executed for a period (predetermined time: for example, 10 seconds). For example, the decorative lamp 45 is turned on in all red, the speaker 16 outputs a sound (setting change completion sound) such as "setting has been changed ♪", and the liquid crystal display device 36 has "setting changed". Display the effect image (setting change completion screen).

In the present embodiment, after the setting change management process (step S023) is completed, the contents of the RAM are cleared by the in-area RAM clear process (step S031) described later, so that the RAM clear is executed. It is preferable to notify. Therefore, a configuration capable of notifying that the RAM clear has been executed may be configured to accompany the setting change completion effect (RAM clear notification effect when the setting is changed). For example, the liquid crystal display device 36 can simultaneously (duplicately) display the display of "setting has been changed" and the display of "RAM cleared". Further, after the setting change completion effect is completed, a dedicated effect (RAM clear notification effect) for notifying the RAM clear may be executed. As the RAM clear notification effect, for example, the decorative lamp 45 is turned on in red for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), and an alarm sound at the time of RAM clear is output from the speaker 16. Further, the liquid crystal display device 36 displays a background screen (background image corresponding to the normal effect mode (normal state)) in the normal state (low-accuracy screen display), and the decorative design is a decoration for clearing the RAM. A combination of symbols (for example, "731": decorative symbol when the RAM is cleared) can be displayed (display mode when the first power is turned on). In this case, regarding the display state of the liquid crystal display device 36, the display state (display mode when the first power is turned on) is maintained even after the RAM clear notification by the decorative lamp 45 and the speaker 16 is completed, and the game is not started. When a predetermined time (for example, 180 seconds) has elapsed, the mode can be shifted to the customer waiting mode (“customer waiting standby effect (customer waiting demo screen)” described later). Further, the present invention is not limited to this, and the RAM clear notification effect may be executed without executing the setting change completion effect.

Then, wait until the setting key switch 94 is turned off (step S923: NO), and if the OFF state of the setting key switch 94 is confirmed (step S923: YES), the setting display 97 is displayed (here, here). Turn off the setting confirmation LED (DP unit) and exit the setting change management process. This completes a series of setting change operations. In the present embodiment, the setting change completion effect is displayed for a predetermined time regardless of whether or not the setting key switch 94 is in the OFF state. After that, the process returns to the main control side main process of FIG. 6A, and proceeds to the process of step S024 described later.

In this embodiment, in order to reduce the control load, at least until the game start ready state is set (until the CTC setting process of step S036 described later is executed (the main control side timer interrupt process of FIG. 17 starts). Error related to "door opening error" even if the door opening sensor 61 is in the ON state (front frame 2 is in the open state) (before the operation is performed) or at least until the loop processing of steps S040 to S045 is executed). Notification (door opening error notification) is not executed. However, from the viewpoint of security, when the door open sensor 61 is in the ON state, information indicating that the door is in the open state is transmitted to the hall computer HC by a security signal.

(Ψ: When notifying a door opening error)
Of course, the "door opening error notification" may be configured to be executable even before the game start ready state is set. For example, the decorative lamp 45 blinks in red, the speaker 16 outputs a door opening alarm sound of "door is open ♪", and the liquid crystal display device 36 displays an effect image of "door is open". By the way, when changing the setting, normally, after opening the front frame 2, the setting change operation (setting key switch 94, RAM clear switch 98, etc. is turned on) is performed, but a door opening error occurs. When it is configured to be able to notify, a door opening error occurs from the start to the end of the setting change operation. Therefore, there is a problem of preferentially notifying the door opening error notification and the setting changing effect or the setting change completion effect. However, in order to clearly notify the processing status, the setting is changed rather than the door opening error notification. It is preferable to set a high notification priority for the medium effect and the setting change completion effect. Specifically, when the setting change is started (when the setting changing command is received), the door opening error notification is switched to the setting changing effect, and after the setting change completion effect is completed (when the setting completion command is received). , Configure to switch to door open error notification. As a result, it is possible to clearly notify that the setting is being changed and that a new setting value has been selected and determined (including switching to the same setting value). Also, when executing the above-mentioned RAM clear notification effect or RAM clear notification effect when the setting is changed, the notification priority of the RAM clear notification effect, etc. should be set higher than the door opening error notification in order to clearly notify the processing status. Is preferable.

It should be noted that "setting a high notification priority" means, for example, that (戊) one production is executed with full priority over other productions, and (self) overlaps (simultaneously). It is a concept that includes the case of execution. However, in the case of duplicate execution, the production mode (notification mode) is set according to the notification priority, such as emphasizing the production having the higher notification priority (“Ω::” in the setting confirmation described later. The same applies to "when notifying a door opening error"). For example, in terms of the relationship between the setting changing effect (notification priority high) and the door opening error notification (notification priority low), in the former case (戊), the door opening error notification is interrupted and the setting is changed. Refers to the form of performing a medium production. In the latter case (self), it refers to a form in which a door opening error is notified in a form accompanying the setting changing effect. For example, the effect by the decorative lamp 45 and the speaker 16 is the effect mode of the setting changing effect, the liquid crystal display device. In 36, the characters "settings are being changed" are displayed in a large size, and "the door is open" is displayed in a smaller size, indicating an effect mode that emphasizes the one with the higher notification priority.

(Modification 1-1)
In the present embodiment, an example in which a dedicated setting change switch 95 is provided as the setting change switch has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead of the setting change switch 95, the RAM clear switch 98 may function as a setting change switch. In this case, the setting change operation can be performed by operating the RAM clear switch 98 without providing the setting change switch 95.

(Modification 1-2)
Further, in the present embodiment, a dedicated setting change completion switch 96 is provided as a setting change completion switch, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead of the setting change completion switch 96, the setting key switch 94 may function as a setting change completion switch. In this case, the setting change end operation can be performed by operating the setting key switch 94 without separately providing the setting change completion switch 96. In the case of this modification, the ON / OFF determination process of the setting change completion switch 96 in the process of step S916 is the ON / OFF determination process of the setting key switch 94. Further, the determination process in step S923 becomes unnecessary (the process of the broken line portion in the figure may be deleted), which leads to a reduction in the control load.

(Modification 1-3)
Further, other sensor switches, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball (for example, sensors 34a, 35a, 52a, 43a, 49a, etc.) may function as a setting change completion switch. In this case, in the determination process of step S916, it may be determined that the set value has been determined when the sensor detects the game ball (ON state) by, for example, maintaining the game ball in the winning opening. .. In addition, among the above-mentioned "modification example 1-1" to "modification example 1-3", one modification example or a combination of a plurality of modification examples can be adopted.

As described above, when the setting change management process is completed, the process proceeds to step S024 of FIG. 6A, the address of the command transmission address table (D_MKCADR2A) at the time of setting change is acquired (step S024), and then the transmission command table selection process (_MKCADR) is completed. ) Is executed (step S030). By the processing of steps S024 and S030, the effect control command (see the column of "setting change" in FIG. 36) is transmitted after the setting change is completed.

The contents of the processing of the above "steps S024 and S030" will be described in detail according to the source code of FIG. 31A as follows.

Command at the time of setting change After setting the start address of the transmission address table (D_MKKADR2A) in the HL register pair (SPd1), jump to SYSTEM_250 (SPd2), and then call and execute the transmission command table selection process (_MKKADR) by the CALLV command (_MKKADR). SPf2). The command transmission address table and transmission command table selection process at the time of setting change will be described in detail below.

(33A. Command transmission address table at the time of setting change (D_MKCADR2A): FIG. 33A (A))
The command transmission address table at the time of changing the above settings will be described with reference to FIG. 33A. FIG. 33A (A) shows a command transmission address table at the time of setting change.

In the command transmission address table at the time of setting change according to the present embodiment, the loop number (number of tables to be specified) data and the head of the command creation table are used as data for creating the effect control command data transmitted at the time of setting change. The address is fixed. In the case of the present embodiment, the tables to be designated are the "spec specification command creation table (D_SPEC)" shown in the figure (B) and the "customer waiting command creation table (D_BA04)" shown in the figure (C). Since there are two types, the number of loops is 2.

(Command creation table: Fig. 33A (B) (C))
Next, the spec specification command specification command creation table (D_SPEC) and the "customer waiting command creation table (D_BA04) will be described.

As shown in the figure, the above-mentioned "spec specification command creation table (D_SPEC)" and the above-mentioned "customer waiting command creation table (D_BA04)" include addition value data (here, 00H) and command data to be transmitted. Is stipulated.

This "addition value data" is offset data used when making changes to the reference command data (reference command data). Therefore, when the added value data is 00H, the reference command data is acquired as the command data actually transmitted, and when the added value is not 00H (for example, in the case of 01H), the added value is added to the reference command data. The command data (in this example, the reference command data + 01H) to which is added is acquired as the command data actually transmitted.

(11. Send command table selection process: Fig. 11)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 11, the transmission command table selection process (_MKCADR) in step S030 will be described. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing a transmission command table selection process.

In FIG. 11, the CPU 201 first sets the number of loops by referring to the “command transmission address table at the time of setting change” in FIG. 33A (A) acquired in step S024 (SPd1) (step S071).

Next, the command creation table is selected with reference to the command transmission address table at the time of setting change (step S072). Here, the spec specification command creation table shown in FIG. 33A (B) and the waiting command creation table shown in FIG. 33A (C) are sequentially selected in the two loops. Then, the first command data creation process shown in FIG. 12 is executed.

(12. First command data creation process: Fig. 12)
FIG. 12 shows a flowchart of the first command data creation process in step S073. In the first command data creation process, as shown in FIG. 12, first, the command data to be transmitted is acquired by referring to the command creation table selected in step S072 (step S076), and then the command transmission of the subroutine is performed. The process (_CMDOUT) is called and executed, and the acquired command data is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S077). Here, in two loops,'F611H (spec specification command data)' based on the spec specification command creation table and'BA04H (customer waiting command data)' based on the customer waiting command creation table are acquired. , These command data will be sequentially transmitted to the effect control unit 24. That is, before the setting change operation is completed, the setting changing command (BA5AH) is performed, and after the setting changing operation is completed, the setting completion command (BA09H), the spec specification command (F611H), and the customer waiting command (BA04H) are completed. ) Is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 in this order (see the description of “setting change” in FIG. 36).

After executing the first command data creation process (step S073) of FIG. 12, the number of loops is decremented (step S074), and the processes of steps S072 to S075 are repeated until the number of loops becomes zero. Then, when the number of loops becomes zero (step S075: = 0), the transmission command table selection process is exited.

The transmission command table selection process (_MKCADR) of FIG. 11 is also commonly used when the RAM clear processing route (steps S029 to S032) described later is executed. When this RAM clear processing route is executed, it is not the "command transmission address table at the time of setting change" shown in FIG. 33A selected in the setting change processing route, but the "command transmission address table at the time of RAM clear (D_MKCADR2)" described later. Is selected (see step S029 in FIG. 6B, FIG. 33B). Then, the transmission command table selection process (_MKCADR) is executed (step S030), and the target effect control command is transmitted.

When the production control unit 24 receives the above-mentioned customer waiting command, a “customer waiting production (customer waiting demo)” for explaining the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and introducing (demonstrating) the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 based on a predetermined execution condition. Screen) ”appears. Specifically, after receiving the customer waiting command, the game is not started, that is, the operation hold ball is not generated (without receiving the hold addition command), and the predetermined time (for example, 180 seconds) is set. When it has passed, the waiting-for-customer effect is displayed.

As described above, after the setting change operation is completed, the main control unit 20 transmits the setting completion command (step S921) to the effect control unit 24, followed by the customer waiting command. However, the effect control unit 24 does not execute the customer waiting standby effect (customer waiting demo screen, etc.) at least until the setting change completion effect is completed. After the setting change completion effect is completed, the RAM clear notification effect described above may be executed, and after the RAM clear notification effect is completed, the customer waiting standby effect may be executed. When the customer waiting standby effect is displayed after the setting change completion effect, the customer waiting command may be waited for 180 seconds to be executed after the customer waiting command is received, or the operation may be executed immediately (without waiting for the 180 seconds elapsed). You may.

In addition, after the customer waiting standby effect (demo screen display) is started, if a predetermined condition is satisfied, the mode is shifted to the "power saving mode". In the case of the present embodiment, in the power saving mode, for example, after the start of the customer waiting standby effect, the operation hold ball does not occur and the menu screen (game setting screen) is not switched to, for a predetermined time (for example, 120 seconds). Can be used as the transition condition (power saving mode transition condition). When the power saving mode transition condition is satisfied, the effect control unit 24 ends the customer waiting standby effect and shifts to the power saving mode, and at the same time, displays an effect dedicated to the power saving mode (effect during the power saving mode). For example, the liquid crystal display device 36 is displayed with a power saving screen (for example, the character display of "power saving is in progress" is displayed on the liquid crystal screen), and a part or all of the decorative lamp 45 and other effect LEDs are controlled to be turned off. (Power saving control).

By the way, in the present embodiment, when the game is not in progress (including the case where the operation holding ball is zero (including the case where the operation is not shifted during the customer waiting standby production), not in the symbol variation display game), or during the demo screen display. , When the operation of the effect button 13 or the direction key 75 is detected, the volume and light intensity can be switched to the "menu screen (game setting effect)" where the game can be set and displayed. This menu screen It is preferable to notify the player of the timing at which the game can be switched to, that is, the button operation valid period (menu screen switching operation valid period) in the demo screen. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the button LED 13b is excluded from the power saving target, and during the menu screen switching operation valid period, the button LED 13b is lit or blinks in a notification mode (for example, orange) different from the normal notification mode (for example, white). It is designed to notify that it is a period during which the switching operation to the menu screen is possible.

(RAM clear processing in area: step S031)
Returning to the description of FIG. 6B, when the transmission command table selection process (step S030) described above is completed, the in-region RAM clear process is then executed (steps S031, SPg1 to SPg3). In this area RAM clear processing, at least the set value storage area of the area RAM area for storing the data used in the normal game processing (processing related to the symbol variation display game, processing related to the winning game, etc.) is set. Initializes (clears) all areas (normal data storage area) except for, and returns the operating state of the game machine to the initial state. Therefore, even if the in-area RAM clear processing is executed, the out-of-area RAM (see FIG. 30) used for processing related to the base value (performance display) is not cleared.

In the present embodiment, the program and storage area for processing related to performance display are different from the area (intra-area memory (first memory area)) accessed by the CPU 201 during normal game progress (out-of-area memory (second memory area)). Memory area)). Specifically, the main control unit 20 can store game data used in game processing related to'normal game progress'(for example, processing other than processing related to display of the performance display 99) according to the processing state. Information display processing related to the first RAM area (RAM in the area) and the'performance information display (base display)'which is not directly related to the progress of the game according to the processing state (steps S034, S043, and 17 in FIG. 6B). RAM 203 including a second RAM area (out-of-area RAM) capable of storing performance information data used in step S102 and the like, and a first ROM area (inside the area) for storing a game control program for executing the above-mentioned normal game processing. The game control operation is executed based on the ROM 202 including the ROM) and the second ROM area (out-of-area ROM) for storing the information display control program for executing the information display process, the game control program, and the information display control program. CPU 201 and the like. Here, the target of clearing is only the RAM area (RAM in the area) related to the memory in the area. Even if the data is in the RAM in the area, the set value storage area (set value data) is not subject to clearing. The initialization, change, and the like of the set value data are executed in the setting change management process (step S023 in FIG. 6A) shown in FIG. 10 which has already been described.

The above-mentioned "normal data storage area" includes various flags, operation timers, counters, etc. used mainly in the various random number update processes (step S041) described later and the timer interrupt process on the main control unit side (FIG. 17). , A storage area corresponding to each of these game progress data is defined. The following data are typical data for game progress. The following is a partial example of typical game progress data.

(A) Flags related to various functions for specifying the game state ("Public accessory open extension state flag" for specifying the operating state of the opening extension function, "Normal symbol time saving" for specifying the operating state of the normal symbol time saving function "Status flag", "Normal symbol probability change state flag" that specifies the operating state of the normal symbol probability change function, "Special symbol time reduction state flag" that specifies the operating state of the special symbol time saving function, and specifies the operating state of the special symbol probability change function. "Special symbol probability change state flag": game state specification flag)
(B) "Special symbol time reduction counter" that counts the number of operations of the special symbol time reduction function, "Special symbol probability variation counter" that counts the number of operations of the special symbol probability change function,
(C) "Various data related to big hit lottery and auxiliary hit lottery (big hit judgment flag, small hit judgment flag, normal symbol hit judgment flag, special symbol judgment data, normal symbol judgment data, special stop symbol number, normal stop symbol number, Various random numbers used for each lottery, etc.) "
(D) "Parameters related to the variable display operation state of special symbols and normal symbols (changing flag, special symbol operation status, normal symbol operation status, special symbol operation confirmation data, etc.)", "The current game state can be specified. Game status data (game status number YJ) ”,“ Number of operating holding balls (Special Figure 1 number of operating holding balls, Special Figure 2 number of operating holding balls, normal number of operating holding balls) ”,
(E) "Various data related to the execution of the winning game (current number of rounds (number of special electric accessory operations), specified number of rounds, number of large winning openings, conditional device operation flag, small hit medium flag, accessory continuous operation" Device operation flag, special electric accessory operation status, round display LED number, etc.) "," Various data related to the execution of the general electric accessory opening game (ordinary electric accessory operation status, ordinary electric accessory operation flag, etc.) "
(F) "Various operation timers that manage the progress of the game (excluding timers related to the base value display)", "Winning counter that counts the number of winning balls",
(G) "ON / OFF data related to switches and sensors (excluding ON / OFF data of sensors such as winning openings related to base value display)",
(H) “Various error flags”, “backup flag BF”, and the like.
In any case, when the in-area RAM clear process (step S031) is executed, all the data in the normal data storage area is set to the initial state except for the set value storage area and the out-of-area RAM.

In the present embodiment, as shown in the address map of FIG. 29, 0 to 255 bytes in the RAM 203 are defined as the in-region RAM, and 256 to 511 bytes are defined as the out-of-region RAM. Further, in the case of the present embodiment, the start address (address 0000H) of the RAM in the area is secured for one byte as the set value storage area. Further, among the RAMs in the area, a predetermined area other than the set value storage area and the normal data storage area is used as a stack area for saving the return address when the subroutine is called. Specifically, 2 bytes are used as a stack area for saving (PUSH) the return address at the time of calling the'zero set process (_ZEROSET2)'shown in SPg3 of FIG. 31A by the CALLV instruction. The above-mentioned zero set process (_ZEROSET2) is a process for clearing the data at the designated address to zero.

Therefore, it is necessary to exclude the set value storage area and the area used as the stack area for the return address, which is a total of 3 bytes, from the area to be cleared of the RAM in the area. Therefore, in the in-area RAM clear processing, first, the next address of the set value storage area (W_SETTEI) is set in the HL register pair as the start address of the area to be cleared (SPg1), and the data is cleared. 253 is set in the B register (SPg2) as the number of processing times of the zero set processing (_ZEROSET2) to be performed. Then, the zero set process (_ZEROSET2) of the subroutine is called and executed by the CALLV instruction (SPg3). As a result, the area (253 bytes) excluding the set value storage area of the RAM in the area and the stack area for saving the return address is cleared to zero.

Although details will be described later, the out-of-area RAM, that is, the RAM area related to performance information (measurement information storage area, performance display storage area, etc.) is not targeted for clearing by the in-area RAM clear processing, but is mainly controlled. In the performance display monitor process (step S102 in FIG. 17) during the side timer interrupt process, the contents of the out-of-area RAM are checked, and if there is an abnormality in the contents, the RAM clear process (out-of-area RAM clear process) is executed. (See step S102 in FIG. 17, step S824 in FIG. 25, etc.). As a result, for example, the RAM clear operation or the setting change operation is performed in order to end the business hours during the winning game or the probability change state and to change the game state to the normal state (initialization) or to change the set value. Even if this is done, only the normal data storage area is cleared without clearing the data related to the base value. Therefore, it is possible to take over across a power failure without being affected by the RAM clear operation or the setting change operation.

Returning to the description of FIG. 6B, when the intra-regional RAM clearing process in step S031 is completed, then, the initial value at the time of RAM clearing is set for the specific data of the intra-regional RAM (normal data storage area) (power on). Time initial data setting process: Step S032, SPg4 to SPg6). In this power-on initial data setting process, the start address of the work area initial setting table (D_INSET) (not shown) is set in the HL register pair (SPg4), and specific data is set in the designated work area by the CALLV instruction. To call and execute'data set processing (_DTSET)'for (SPg5).

In the above-mentioned "work area initial setting table (D_INSET)", data that specifies a specific address of the RAM in the area and initial data at the time of clearing the RAM set in the storage area specified by the address are defined. By executing the above "data set processing (_DTSET)", the initial data is set in the storage area of the designated destination.

In the present embodiment, the error notification timer (W_SGTMER), the special figure 1 stop symbol number (W_T1STPNO), and the special figure 2 stop symbol number (W_T2STPNO) are designated as the storage area of the designated destination, and the error notification timer (W_SGTMER) is used. 30000 ms is set, and the special figure 1 stop symbol number (W_T1STPNO) and the special figure 2 stop symbol number (W_T2STPNO) have the same special stop symbol number 200 (specific loss symbol data: for example, stop corresponding to loss A). Design data) is set. The error notification timer here is the output time of a RAM clear signal (one of the security signals (which may be a security signal common to the security signal whose settings are being changed)) indicating that RAM clear has been executed. The RAM clear signal is output to the hall computer HC through the frame external terminal board 21. In the present embodiment, the same special stop symbol number is set for the special figure 1 stop symbol number and the special figure 2 stop symbol number as the initial data, but different lost symbol data may be set for each. In addition, the data may be other than the lost symbol data. For example, data corresponding to a specific symbol (a symbol dedicated to clearing the RAM) that is not displayed during the game may be set. Further, non-lighting (light-off) data (light-off data) may be set. Further, as for the data related to the normal symbol (normal stop symbol number (W_FSTPNO)), the lost symbol data, the non-lighting data, and the like may be set in the same manner as the special symbol.

Then, when the data set processing (_DTSET) of SPg5 is completed, the process jumps to step S033 (SYSTEM_850) described later (SPg6). As a result, the setting change processing route is completed, and the processing state is shifted to the processing of step S033 of the merging point.

In the setting change branch determination process (step S014), in order to determine that the setting change transition mode transition condition is satisfied, after opening the front frame 2, the setting key switch 94 and the RAM clear switch 98 are used. It is necessary to turn on the power with both turned on. This is because when the setting key switch 94 or the RAM clear switch 98 is turned on after the front frame 2 is opened and the power switch (not shown) inside the gaming machine is turned on, from the power on to the ON operation. , Usually takes a few seconds. However, before the ON operation, the process of step S067 during the initial setting process of FIG. 7 is executed and the input information of the input port 1 (P_INPT1) is acquired. Therefore, at least the door open signal is in the ON state. However, the OFF state is detected for the setting key switch signal and the RAM clear switch signal. That is, when the setting change branch determination process is executed, a combination other than W (1, 1, 1) is acquired, and it is assumed that the setting change transition mode transition condition is not satisfied in the setting change branch determination process, and the setting is changed. This is because the processing route is not executed. In this case, as shown in the figure, the processing route in which the processing after step S015 is executed is followed, and thereafter, the setting change operation is controlled to the prohibited state. In this case, after the power is turned off once, the power may be turned on again while the setting key switch 94 and the RAM clear switch 98 are turned on. If it is determined that the setting change transition mode transition condition is satisfied, the allowable state of the setting change operation is maintained even if the setting key switch 94 and the RAM clear switch 98 are subsequently turned off. However, in the case where the setting key switch 94 is used as the setting change completion switch instead of the setting change completion switch 96, the setting key switch 94 is turned off after the setting change transition mode transition condition is satisfied, as described above. When set to, the setting change period (setting change operation) ends.

Next, each processing route of the RAM clear processing route (RAM clear mode), the setting confirmation processing route (setting confirmation mode), and the backup restoration processing route (backup restoration mode) will be sequentially described. In order to facilitate the understanding of the present invention, first, "RAM error determination processing (steps S015 to S016)" executed prior to these processing routes will be described in detail.

(RAM error determination process: steps S015 to S016)
As described above, when the determination result in step S014 of FIG. 6A is a combination other than W (1, 1, 1), it is assumed that the setting change mode transition condition is not satisfied, and the processing state is set to steps S015 to S015. The process proceeds to the "RAM error determination process" in step S016 (SPb3: jumps to SYSTEM_300 when the zero flag ZF = 1).

This RAM error determination process is a process for determining whether or not to shift the processing state to the'power re-on wait processing route (RAM error mode)'in steps S017 to S020. In the RAM error determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the RAM is abnormal (step S015), but the data of the RAM area to be determined here is the set value data of the set value storage area (W_SETTEI). As described above, the setting values are defined in 6 stages of settings 1 to 6, and if normal, the setting value storage area (W_SETTEI) corresponds to the 6 stages of setting values. Any value from 00H to 05H should be stored. However, due to some trouble such as noise, an abnormal value other than 00H to 05H may be stored.

Therefore, in this process, the CP instruction is used to compare the set value data in the set value storage area (W_SETTEI) with 06H to calculate the difference between them (SPh1), and if the comparison result is negative (“setting”). (When the value Nc <06H "), assuming that the set value Nc is a value within the normal range, the process proceeds to the determination process of step S016 (SPh2: when the carry flag CF = 1, the process of SPh3 is executed), while that. If the comparison result is not negative (when the set value Nc ≧ 06H), it is assumed that the set value Nc is an abnormal value, and the process proceeds to the power re-turning wait processing route in steps S017 to S020 related to the power re-turning wait processing ( SPh2: If the carry flag CF ≠ 1, jump to SYSTEM_400). The details of the power re-on wait processing route will be described later.

In the determination process of step S015, when it is determined that the RAM is not abnormal (step S015: NO), it is subsequently determined whether or not the backup flag BF is a normal value (5AH) (step S016, SPh3 to SPh4). ). This backup flag BF is set to "5AH (normal value)" as the backup flag of the RAM in the area when the backup process is normally executed in the process of the second power supply abnormality check process (step S081 in FIG. 17) described later. It is set in the storage area (W_BACKFLG). Therefore, under normal conditions, the backup flag BF should be 5AH. However, there may be a case where the backup flag BF is not a normal value due to some trouble. Therefore, in this process, the value of the backup flag BF (W_BACKFLG) is compared with 5AH (normal value) by the CP instruction to calculate the difference between them (SPh3), and when the comparison result is zero (SPh3). BF = 5AH), assuming that the backup flag BF is a normal value, the process proceeds to the determination process in step S025 (SPh4: when the zero flag ZF = 1, jumps to SYSTEM_600), while the comparison result is not zero (BF). ≠ 5AH), assuming that the backup flag BF is an abnormal value, the process shifts to the power re-on wait processing route described later (SPh4: When the zero flag ZF = 0, SPi1 of SYSTEM_400 at the next address is executed).

If the backup flag BF is also a normal value (5AH) and the RAM is not abnormal, the process proceeds to the RAM clear branch determination process shown in FIG. 6B (step S025, SYSTEM_600 in FIG. 31B). This RAM clear branch determination process is a process of determining whether or not to shift the processing state to the'RAM clear processing route (RAM clear mode)'.

Here, the RAM clear branch determination process is executed in a combination in which the value of the W register is other than W (1, 1, 1), specifically, as shown in FIG. 30, the setting key switch signal (0th). This is the case where at least one of the bit), the door opening signal (fifth bit), and the RAM clear signal (sixth bit) is in the OFF state (when the determination result in step S014 is NO). Of these, in order for the RAM clear processing route transition condition to be satisfied, it is sufficient that at least the RAM clear signal is in the ON state, that is, the sixth bit is 1.

Therefore, in the RAM clear branch determination process, it is determined whether or not the sixth bit of the W register is 1. First, the value of the 6th bit of the W register is set in the carry flag CF (SPj1), and then, if the carry flag CF is 1 (CF = 1) by the JR instruction of SPj2, the RAM clear processing route transition condition is set. Assuming that it is established, the process jumps to the first process of the RAM clear processing route, that is,'SYSTEM_200' shown in FIG. 31A corresponding to step S029. However, if the carry flag CF is not 1 (CF ≠ 1), it is assumed that the RAM clear processing route transition condition is not satisfied, and the setting confirmation branch determination process in step S026, which is the next process, that is, SYSTEM_600 shown in FIG. 31B SPk1 processing is executed. The details of the setting confirmation branch determination process (step S026) will be described later.

(B. RAM clear processing route (RAM clear mode): S025 → S029 to S032)
The processing content of the RAM clear processing route will be described. In the source code shown in FIGS. 31A and 31B, the execution order of the processing by the RAM clear processing route is indicated by a thick arrow and a number related to the "RAM clearing time" column. In the following, in order to avoid duplicate description, the processing of steps S029 to S032 will be mainly described among the RAM clear processing routes.

When shifting to the RAM clear processing route, first, the address of the RAM clearing command transmission address table (D_MKCADR2) in FIG. 33B is acquired (steps S029, SPe2), and then the transmission command table selection process (_MKCADR) in FIG. 11 is executed. (Step S030, SPf2 of SYSTEM_250). The address acquisition process of step S029 and the address acquisition process of step S024 already described are substantially the same except for the address table to be acquired (see SPd1 and SPe2).

(33B. Command transmission address table when clearing RAM (D_MKCADR2): FIG. 33B)
FIG. 33B shows the above-mentioned RAM clearing command transmission address table. Since the basic configuration of the RAM clear command transmission address table is the same as that of the setting change command transmission address table shown in FIG. 33A, the details thereof will be described by omitting them as appropriate.

When the command transmission address table at the time of RAM clear is referred to, as shown in FIGS. 33B (B) to 33B (D),
(B) "RAM clear command creation table (D_BA02)",
(C) "Spec specification command creation table (D_SPEC)",
(D) "Customer waiting command creation table (D_BA04)",
The three types of command creation tables are sequentially selected (the number of loops is 3), and the command data defined in these command creation tables is sequentially transmitted to the effect control unit 24 in three loops (FIG. Refer to 11 transmission command table selection process). That is, in the RAM clear processing route, three types of commands, a RAM clear command (BA02H), a spec specification command (F611H), and a customer waiting command (BA04H), are transmitted to the effect control unit 24 in this order. (Refer to the description column of "RAM clear" in FIG. 36).

When the effect control unit 24 receives the RAM clear command (BA02H), the effect mode is set to the "normal effect mode" in the initial state, the effect state is returned to the initial state, and the RAM is cleared by using the effect means. The error notification (RAM clear notification effect) corresponding to the above is executed for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). For example, the decorative lamp 45 is turned on in all red, an alarm sound at the time of RAM clear is output from the speaker 16, and an effect image such as "RAM is being cleared" is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36. Further, in step S029, the RAM clear command is transmitted and the customer waiting command is transmitted, but at this timing, the customer waiting standby effect is not executed, and the RAM clear notification is executed for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). After that, the customer waiting waiting effect is executed. For example, the alarm sound is faded out, and a customer waiting demo screen or the like is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36. In the present embodiment, the RAM clear notification effect (RAM clear notification) is executed with the highest priority.

When the transmission command table selection process (step S030) is completed, the area RAM clear process (step S031, SPg1 to SPg3) and the initial data setting process at power-on (step S032, SPg4) are completed in the same manner as the setting change process route described above. ~ SPg6) is executed. As a result, the RAM clear processing route is completed, and the processing state is shifted to the processing of step S033 (SYSTEM_850) at the merging point.

In the intra-regional RAM clearing process (step S031) according to the present embodiment, the set value storage area (W_SETTEI) of the intra-regional RAM is not initialized. Therefore, when the RAM clear processing route is executed, only other game data (data related to the normal data storage area) is cleared without changing the set value when the power is cut off. For example, the set value remains the same as when the power was turned off last time, but the game is started in the initialized state (normal state and initial state such as no hold data). It will be. As a result, for example, when only the set value is to be inherited from the business on the previous day, the clearing work can be completed by a simple operation of ON / OFF operation of the RAM clear switch 98 without having to perform the setting change operation with many work processes. There is an advantage.

Returning to the description of the RAM clear branch determination process (step S025) of FIG. 6B. When the RAM clear processing route transition condition is not satisfied in the RAM clear branch determination processing, that is, when the value of the 6th bit of the W register obtained by SPj1 in FIG. 31B is 0 (carry flag CF ≠ 1). ), The setting confirmation branch determination process in step S026, that is, the process of SPk1 in FIG. 31B is executed.

This setting confirmation branch determination process is a process of determining whether to shift the processing state to the'setting confirmation processing route (setting confirmation mode)'or the'backup restoration processing route (backup restoration mode)'. Specifically, whether or not the W register value is a combination of W (1, 1, 0), that is, the setting key switch signal (0th bit) and the door opening signal (5th bit) are in the ON state. Is determined (step S026). When the value of the W register is a combination of W (1, 1, 0) (step S026: YES), it is assumed that the setting confirmation mode transition condition is satisfied, and the "setting confirmation process" of step S027 is executed. If it is other than (step S026: NO), it is assumed that the setting confirmation mode transition condition is not satisfied and the backup recovery mode transition condition is satisfied, and the “backup recovery process” of step S028 described later is executed.

If the setting confirmation branch determination process is described according to the source code shown in FIG. 31B, the value of the W register of the first operand is compared with the 8-bit data '00100001B' specified by the second operand by the CP instruction. If the comparison result (subtraction result) is zero, that is, W (1, 1, 0), the zero flag ZF is set to 1, and if it is not zero, that is, W. If it is not (1, 1, 0), 0 is set in the zero flag ZF (SPk1). Then, if the zero flag ZF is 1 by the JR instruction of SPk2, assuming that the setting confirmation mode transition condition is satisfied, the prolagum of SYSTEM_650 (SPm1 to SPm20), that is, the setting confirmation process of step S027, is executed. To do. However, if the zero flag ZF is not 1 (zero flag ZF = 0), the setting confirmation mode transition condition is not satisfied, in other words, it is assumed that the backup return mode transition condition is satisfied, and the processing state is changed to the backup restoration process described later ( Move to step S028) (jump to SYSTEM_800).

(C. Setting confirmation processing route (setting confirmation mode): S026 → S027)
The setting confirmation process in step S027 will be described with reference to FIGS. 6B, 13 and 31A to 31B. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the details of the setting confirmation process. In the source code shown in FIGS. 31A and 31B, the execution order of the processing by the setting confirmation processing route is indicated by a thick arrow and a number related to the “at the time of setting confirmation” column. In the following, in order to avoid duplicate description, the setting confirmation process of step S027 will be mainly described among the setting confirmation processing routes.

In FIG. 13, the CPU 201 first sets the command data (E021H) for which the setting is being confirmed in the DE register pair (step S930, SPm1), and the acquired command data is subjected to the command transmission process (_CMDOUT) to the effect control unit 24. (Step S931, SPm2). When the effect control unit 24 receives the command during setting confirmation, the effect during setting confirmation is executed by using the effect means. For example, an effect image such as "setting is being confirmed" is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36.

(Ω: When notifying a door opening error)
By the way, when confirming the set value, as in the case of changing the setting, the front frame 2 is first opened and then the setting key switch 94 is turned on. However, the door opening error can be notified. If so, the door opening error notification will be generated prior to the setting confirmation effect. On the other hand, when the setting confirmation is finished, conversely, the front frame 2 is closed after the setting key switch 94 is turned off, but a door opening error occurs during this period (until the front frame 2 is closed). That is, in any case, a door opening error occurs from the start of confirmation of the set value to the end of the confirmation. When the door opening error is configured to be notified, the door opening error occurs from the start of confirmation of the set value to the end of the confirmation. Therefore, there is a problem of which of the door opening error notification and the setting confirmation effect is prioritized, but in order to clearly notify the processing state, it seems to be the same phenomenon as the setting change effect and the setting change completion effect already described. In addition, it is preferable to set the notification priority of the effect during setting confirmation higher than the door opening error notification. Specifically, when the setting confirmation is started (when the setting confirmation command is received), the door opening error notification is switched to the setting confirmation effect, and after the setting confirmation is completed (when the setting confirmation end command is received), the door is opened. It is configured to switch to open error notification. As a result, it is possible to clearly notify that the setting is being confirmed. For example, the liquid crystal display device 36 can simultaneously display displays such as "setting is being confirmed" and "door opening error is in progress". However, even in this case, it is preferable to highlight the display of "Setting confirmation in progress" rather than the display of "Door opening error in progress" in order to give priority notification that the setting is being confirmed.

Next, the set value data is acquired from the set value storage area (W_SETTEI) in the C register (step S932, SPm3).

Next, the first power supply abnormality check process (_ VDDCHK) of the subroutine is called and executed by the CALLV instruction (step S933, SPm4).

Next, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch signal (setting key switch 94) is in the ON state (steps S934 to S936, SPm5 to SPm7). Specifically, the data of the input port 1 (P_INPT1) is transferred to the A register (SPm5), and the 8-bit data of the input port 1 (P_INPT1) transferred to the A register and the logical product of the mask data "00000001B" ( AND) is taken and the bits other than the 0th bit corresponding to the setting key switch signal are masked (SPm6). As a result, the ON / OFF state of the current setting key switch signal is acquired in the A register.

When the setting key switch signal is in the ON state, the value of the A register obtained in the above-mentioned mask processing of SPm6 becomes "00000001B", and 0 is set in the zero flag ZF (ZF = 0). In this case, the JR instruction of SPm7 shifts to SPm8, and the 8-bit data '000000010B' specified by the second operand is set in the A register (SPm8). Next, the A register "00000010B" is output to the external terminal port 2 (P_GAIBU2) (SPm9). In the external terminal port 2 (P_GAIBU2), for example, the 0th bit is an information terminal for outputting a setting changing signal, and the 1st bit is an information terminal for outputting a security signal (for example, a setting checking signal). Therefore, the SPm9 outputs a security signal from the frame external terminal board 21 to the hall computer HC (see step S937).

Next, during the setting confirmation, the setting display data to be displayed on the setting display 97 is created (step S938), the data is output-controlled, and the current setting value Nc is displayed on the setting display 97 (step S939). ..

The processing of steps S938 to S939 will be described with reference to FIG. 32 (A) along with the source code. FIG. 32A shows a source code (SPm3, SPm10 to SPm14) corresponding to the processes of steps S923 and S938 to S939 picked up from the source code shown in FIG. 31B.

With reference to FIG. 32 (A), the CPU 201 first sets the start address of the setting display data table (D_7SEGDATA) shown in FIG. 32 (B) in the HL register pair (SPm10). In this setting display data table, as shown in FIG. 32 (B), display pattern data for 7 segments corresponding to settings 1 to 6 is defined.

Next, the set value data stored in the C register, that is, the set value data acquired in SPm3 (see step S932) is transferred to the A register (SPm11). Next, the content of the address specified by the value (HL + A) obtained by adding the value of the above-mentioned HL register pair (starting address of the setting display data table) and the value of the A register (setting value data) is set in the W register. (SPm12). That is, the start address (LED display pattern of 1) of the setting display data table is the reference address, and the setting value data of the A register (any value of 00H to 05H corresponding to settings 1 to 6) is offset with respect to the reference address. Acts as a value. For example, if the current set value is 3, the A register (offset value) is 02H, so the LED data "01001111B ('" is specified by the address obtained by adding 02H to the start address of the setting display data table. 3'LED display pattern) ”is set in the W register. Then, the bit data ‘00010000B (b4-b7: dynamic lighting common 0 to 3)’ for setting the dynamic lighting common C3 for displaying the setting display 97 to the ON state is set in the A register (SPm13).

Next, the LED display pattern data of the W register is output to the LED data port (P_LED) for the dynamic lighting data, and the dynamic lighting common data of the A register is output to the LED common port (P_LEDCMN) (step S939, SPm14). The operation of the mnemonic "OUTW (p), WA" shown in SPm14 is "(p + 1, p) ← WA" ('p' indicates the I / O port address).

With the above SPm10 to SPm14, the current set value Nc is displayed on the setting display 97. It is preferable that the setting confirmation LED (DP unit) does not light or blink in the setting display during the setting confirmation. This is because the setting display during setting confirmation displays the already confirmed setting value, and if the DP unit is turned on even during setting confirmation, is the setting value displayed when the setting value is confirmed by the setting change operation? This is because there is a risk of confusion on the display, whether it is a display during setting confirmation.

Then, when SPm14 is finished, it jumps to SYSTEM_700 (SPm15), and thereafter, until the OFF state of the setting key switch signal (setting key switch 94) is confirmed (until the determination in step S936 becomes NO), SPm4 to SPm15. (Processing of steps S933 to S939) is repeatedly executed. That is, the processes of steps S933 to S939 are repeatedly executed until the setting confirmation (setting confirmation period) is completed, and the current setting value is continuously displayed on the setting display 97 (setting confirmation display).

Returning to the explanation of step S936, when the setting key switch 94 is turned off (step S936: NO), the value of the A register obtained in the above-mentioned mask processing of SPm6 becomes "00000000000B", and the zero flag ZF is set. 1 is set (ZF = 1). In this case, assuming that the setting confirmation is completed, the process jumps to SYSTEM_750 (SPm7) and executes the setting confirmation end processing in steps S940 to S943.

Here, as the setting confirmation end process, first, the exclusive OR (XOR) between the WA register pairs is obtained, the value of the WA register pair is updated to 0000H, and then the updated value is used to use the LED common port (P_LEDCMN). ) And the external terminal port 2 (P_GAIBU2) are cleared to zero (SPm16 to SPm18). As a result, the setting confirmation display by the setting display 97 is terminated (turned off), and the security signal is stopped (steps S940 and S941). In the present embodiment, after confirming the setting (after confirming the OFF state of the setting key switch signal (setting key switch 94)), the display of the set value is immediately terminated, but in the case of setting confirmation, the setting is changed. As described above, the set value itself is not changed, and there is little need to notify the final set value (fixed set value) as after the setting is changed. Therefore, when the setting confirmation is completed (after confirming the OFF state of the setting key switch signal (setting key switch 94)), a process of displaying the set value for a predetermined time as after the setting change (step S918 in FIG. 10) is performed. The display of the set value is immediately terminated without performing the procedure (step S936: NO → S940). This can contribute to the reduction of the program capacity and the control load.

Then, the E register is incremented (SPm19). When this SPm19 is executed, the value "21H" of the lower byte of the setting checking command data (E021H) acquired in SPm1 (step S930) is set in the E register, so that the INC instruction of SPm19 is executed. As a result, the value of the E register is updated to "22H". As a result, "E022H" in which the value of the D register is "E0H (see SPm1)" and the value of the E register is "22H", that is, the'setting confirmation end command'data is acquired in the DE register pair ( Step S942, SPm1, SPm19). Then, this command data is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 by the command transmission process (_CMDOUT) (step S943, SPm20), whereby a series of setting confirmation periods are completed. When the effect control unit 24 receives the setting confirmation end command, the effect during setting confirmation is terminated. As a result, a series of setting confirmation periods have ended. When the effect control unit 24 receives the confirmation end command, the effect during the setting confirmation being executed may be simply terminated, but the "setting confirmation end effect" may be performed for a predetermined period (predetermined) by using the effect means. Time: For example, 5 seconds). For example, the decorative lamp 45 is turned on in all yellow, the speaker 16 outputs a sound (setting confirmation completed sound) such as "setting confirmation is completed ♪", and the liquid crystal display device 36 is output such as "setting confirmation is completed". It is possible to display the effect image (setting confirmation completion screen) of.

When the above setting confirmation process is completed, the process state shifts to the "backup restoration process" described below (step S028).

(D. Backup restoration processing route (backup restoration mode): Backup restoration processing (step S028) execution route)
Next, the processing contents of the backup restoration processing route will be described with reference to FIGS. 6B, 14 and 31A to 31B. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing a backup restoration process. In the source code shown in FIGS. 31A and 31B, the execution order of the processing by the backup restoration processing route is indicated by a thick arrow and a number related to the “at the time of backup” column. In the following, in order to avoid duplicate description, the backup restoration process of step S028 will be mainly described among the backup restoration processing routes.

As described above, the processing route in which the backup restoration process of step S028 is executed is as described above.
(I) The route through which the backup restoration process is executed after the setting confirmation process in step S027, (II) the setting change management process related to the setting change processing route (step S023), and the RAM in the area related to the RAM clear processing route. There is a processing route in which the backup restoration processing is executed independently without executing either the clear processing (step S031) and the setting confirmation processing (step S027) related to the setting confirmation processing route. The backup restoration processing route of is the processing route in which the backup restoration processing is executed independently in the latter case. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 30, in the backup restoration processing route, W (x, y, z) is W (1, 0, 0), W (0, 1, 0), W (0, 0, 0). ) Is executed in any case.

In FIG. 31B, the CPU 201 first calls and executes "backup return command processing (M_MKINFO)" for transmitting an effect control command related to backup return (SPn1). This backup return command process (M_MKINFO) is configured to include SPn1 to SPn4, and these programs realize the process of steps S951 to S957 in FIG.

With reference to FIG. 14, the “command processing at the time of backup restoration (M_MKINFO)” of SPn1 will be described. The backup return command process (M_MKINFO) is mainly composed of the processes of steps S951 to S956 shown in FIG.

In FIG. 14, the CPU 201 first acquires the address of the backup return command transmission address table (D_MKCADR1) shown in FIG. 33C (step S951), and then performs the transmission command table selection process (_MKCADR) of FIG. 11 already described. Execute (step S952). The processing of steps S951 to S952 and the processing content of steps S029 to S030 of FIG. 6B, which have already been described, are substantially the same except that the command transmission address table to be acquired is different.

(33C. Command transmission address table at backup recovery (D_MKCADR1): FIG. 33C)
FIG. 33C shows the above-mentioned backup return command transmission address table. The basic configuration of this backup return command transmission address table is the same as the command transmission address table at the time of setting change in FIG. 33A and the command transmission address table at the time of RAM clear in FIG. 33B, so the details thereof are omitted as appropriate. I will explain while.

When the command transmission address table at the time of backup restoration is referred to in the transmission command table selection process (_MKCADR), as shown in FIG. 33C (A),
“Power failure recovery display command creation table (D_BA03)” in FIG. 33C (B),
"Special Figure 1 Hold Number Designation Command Creation Table (D_B0C0M)" in FIG. 33C (C),
"Special Figure 2 Hold Number Designation Command Creation Table (D_B1C0M)" in FIG. 33C (D),
The three types of command creation tables are selected in this order (the number of loops is 3), and the command data defined in these command creation tables is sequentially transmitted to the effect control unit 24 in three loops. (Refer to the transmission command table selection process in FIG. 11). That is, in the backup restoration processing route, first, the effect control unit 24 has three types: a power failure restoration display command (BA03H), a special figure 1 hold number designation command (B0xxH), and a special figure 2 hold number designation command (B1xxH). Commands are sent in this order (see the description column of "Return to backup" in FIG. 36).

Here, as for the power failure recovery display command, as shown in FIG. 33C (B), since the added value data is 0, BA03H of the reference command data is transmitted as the command data. However, with respect to the special figure 1 hold number designation command and the special figure 2 hold number designation command, as shown in FIGS. 33C (C) and 33C (D), the added value data depends on the values of'W_T1GONUM'and'W_T2GONUM'. B001H and B101H of the reference command data change. This will be described in detail below.

'W_T1GONUM' in the special figure 1 hold number designation command creation table of FIG. 33C (C) is the special figure 1 hold number data storage area of the RAM in the area, and the special figure 2 hold number designation command creation of FIG. 33C (D). 'W_T2GONUM' in the table is a special figure 2 operation reserved ball number data storage area of the RAM in the area. Therefore, the values of ‘W_T1GONUM’ and ‘W_T2GONUM’ fluctuate according to the number of existing operation holding balls (0 to 4 (maximum number of holding storages)).

Therefore, when the special figure 1 operation hold ball designation command creation table is referred to, any one of 00H to 04H corresponding to the number of special figure 1 operation hold balls 0 to 4 at the time of power failure (at the time of backup). When the value is acquired as the added value data and the special figure 2 operation holding ball designation command creation table is referred to, in the same manner, any of 00H to 04H corresponding to the special figure 2 operation holding ball number 0 to 4. That value is acquired as added value data. Therefore, the special figure 1 hold number designation command is any of B001H to B005H, and the special figure 2 hold number designation command is any of B101H to B105H, and the command data after the addition is sent to the effect control unit 24. Will be sent. As a result, the effect control unit 24 is correctly notified of the number of operation hold balls at the time of power failure, and the effect control unit 24 is based on the special figure 1 operation hold ball designation command and the special figure 2 operation hold ball designation command. , The hold display units a1 to d1 of the hold display area 76 and the hold display units a2 to d2 of the hold display area 77 can be lit and displayed with the hold icon corresponding to the number of operation hold balls. ..

Further, when the effect control unit 24 receives the power failure recovery display command (BA03H), the effect means is used to display a "recovery completion effect" that notifies that the restoration is completed. For example, the liquid crystal display device 36 displays an effect image such as "Resume from power failure, please restart the game" for a predetermined time.

Then, when the transmission command table selection process in step S952 is completed, the second command data creation process is then executed (step S953).

(15. Second command data creation process: FIG. 15)
FIG. 15 shows a flowchart of the second command data creation process. In this second command data creation process, as shown in FIG. 15, first, the spec designation command data (F611H) is acquired (step S961), and the acquired command data is subjected to the command transmission process (_CMDOUT) to produce the effect control unit 24. (Step S962).

Next, the game state designation command data (FAxxH to FExxH) at the time of return is acquired (step S963), and the acquired command data is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 by the command transmission process (_CMDOUT) (step S964). The game state specification command at the time of return (FAxxH to FExxH) is, for example, a command for specifying the game state number YJ at the time of backup. "FB01H" in the case of (high probability / with electric support), "FC01H" in the case of time saving state (low probability / with electric support), "FD01H" in the case of latent state (high probability / without electric support) Will be sent. The effect control unit 20 grasps the game state based on the game state designation command data at the time of return, causes the liquid crystal display device 36 to display the background image of the effect mode corresponding to the game state, and about the decorative design. Displays a combination of decorative symbols for backup restoration (for example, "315": decorative symbol for restoration) (display mode when the second power is turned on). Since the game operation is normally started after the backup is restored, the effect control commands (for example, the customer waiting command, the hold addition command, and the fluctuation) sent from the main control unit 20 are sent according to the processing state after the backup is restored. The effect control process is executed according to the pattern specification command, the command related to the winning game, etc.). The above-mentioned display mode when the second power is turned on is the same as the display mode when the first power is turned on when the RAM is cleared, and the display mode is kept until the first symbol variation display game after the backup is restored is started. May be maintained. Then, if 180 seconds have passed without starting the game, the customer waiting standby effect may be executed.

Returning to the description of FIG. 14, when the second command data creation process of step S953 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the special symbol (both of special figures 1 and 2) is non-variable (step S954).

To determine whether or not it is non-variable, the status that acquires the special symbol operation status of the special symbol operation status storage area (W_TJOBST) of the RAM in the area and specifies that the acquired status value is non-variable. Determine if it is a value. This "special symbol operation status" is a status value indicating the behavior of the special symbol, and this status value is changed according to the processing status (processing status of the variable display operation of the special symbol), and the special symbol operation status storage area. It is stored in (W_TJOBST). For the special symbol operation status, specify "waiting (01H)" that specifies that the behavior of the special symbol is in the standby state for the next fluctuation, and that the behavior of the special symbol is fluctuating (variation display). "Fluctuating (02H)", "Confirming (03H)" to specify that the special symbol has stopped (confirmed) and is being displayed (during the special symbol confirmation time), and the special symbol is waiting. In addition, "waiting for customers (00H)" for designating that there is no hold memory is included (see the special symbol management process of FIG. 17 described later). When the special symbol is not changing, the special symbol operation status is 01H waiting for customers or 00H waiting for customers, but in this determination process, it is "00H" specified for waiting for customers. Judge whether or not.

Returning to the explanation of the determination process in step S954, when the special symbol is not changing, that is, when the special symbol operation status is "00H" specified for waiting for customers (step S954: YES), the command data for waiting for customers (step S954: YES) BA04H) is acquired (step S955), and the acquired command data is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 by the command transmission process (_CMDOUT) (step S956).

As described above, at the time of backup recovery, first, BA03H (power failure recovery display command), B0xxH (first special hold quantity designation command:'xx = 01H to 05H'), B1xxH (second) by the processing of steps S951 to S953. Special hold quantity specification command:'xx = 01H to 05H'), F611H (spec command), FAXxH to FexoH (return game state specification command) are transmitted in this order, and if the special symbol is not changing, BA04H (Customer waiting command) is additionally transmitted (see the description column of "Return to backup" in FIG. 36).

In addition, during the customer waiting standby production (including the menu screen and power saving mode), during the special symbol fluctuation, during the confirmation display (during the special symbol confirmation time), and the production operation when the backup is restored when a power failure occurs during hitting. Is as follows.

(A) When the power is cut off while waiting for a customer (command is sent while waiting for a customer)
"Recovered from power failure, please restart the game" is displayed for a predetermined time, and the background display / decorative design "315" corresponding to the effect mode at the time of power failure (effect mode related to the game status number YJ) Is displayed (display mode when the second power is turned on). If 180 seconds have passed without starting the game from this display state, the customer waiting standby effect is executed.
(B) When the power is cut off while the special symbol is changing (no command is sent while waiting for customers)
While displaying "Resume from power failure, please restart the game", after that, when the "Fluctuation stop command (BF01H)" sent at the end of the fluctuation of the special symbol is received, the power is cut off. The background display / decorative pattern "315" is displayed according to the game state (same for loss and hit).
(C) When the power is cut off while the special symbol is confirmed and displayed (no command is sent while waiting for customers)
If there is a hit after the confirmation display, "Recovered from power failure, please restart the game" is displayed, and then the hit according to the command (big hit start command, small hit start command, etc.) sent during the hit. Perform a medium production (opening production, etc.). In this case, the decorative symbol information at the time of hit is not displayed because it is not transmitted when the backup is restored.
If there is a lost ball after the confirmation display and there is an operation hold ball, "Recovered from power failure, please restart the game" is displayed, and during the game, the symbol change display related to the operation hold ball is turned off. The background display / decorative pattern "315" is displayed according to the game state of. In addition, in the case of loss after the confirmation display and there is no operation holding ball, it is the same as the case of (A) above.
(D) If a power failure occurs during the jackpot start interval (during the opening production period) (no command is sent while waiting for customers) "Recovered from power failure, please restart the game" is displayed and sent after the jackpot start interval. The effect corresponding to the incoming command (for example, the round start command transmitted at the start of the 1R round) is executed.
(E) When a power failure occurs during a round game (no command is sent while waiting for customers)
"Recovered from power failure, please restart the game" is displayed, and the effect is executed according to the round start command sent at the start of the next round.
(F) When a power failure occurs during the jackpot end interval (during the ending production period) (no command is sent while waiting for customers)
If there is an operation pending ball after the jackpot game ends, an effect based on the information included in the command sent at the start of the fluctuation (for example, the fluctuation pattern specification command (see the special symbol fluctuation start processing in FIG. 22 described later)) is executed. To do. If there is no operation holding ball after the jackpot game is completed, the same as in the case of (A) above.
(G) When a power failure occurs during a small hit game (no command is sent while waiting for customers)
During the small hit game, the message "Recovered from power failure, please restart the game" remains displayed. Further, during the small hit game, the game state remains the same as the game state at the time of winning, and the round game is not executed. Therefore, if there is an operation holding ball after the small hit end interval, the effect under the effect mode according to the game state is started, and if there is no operation hold ball, the same as in the case of (A) above. Become.

Returning to the description of FIG. 14, when the command transmission process of step S956 is completed, the RAM clear process at the time of backup restoration is subsequently executed (step S957, SYSTEM_800 (SPn2 to SPn4)). On the other hand, when the special symbol is not in a non-variable state, that is, when the special symbol operation status is not "00H" specified as waiting for a customer (step S954: NO), the special symbol is in a changing state or in a waiting state waiting for the next change start. If there is, the RAM clear process is executed when the backup is restored without transmitting the customer waiting command (step S957).

In the backup recovery RAM clear process, a specific area of the RAM in the area is cleared at the time of backup recovery. In the present embodiment, although not shown, the start address (0000H address) of the RAM in the area is the set value storage area (W_SETTEI), the 0001H address is the backup flag BF storage area (W_BACKFLG), and the address 0002H to specific. Address (for example, address 0021H) is a specific error-related data storage area that should be cleared when the backup is restored. For example, W_PWRCNT (power supply abnormality confirmation counter shown in FIG. 18 described later) to W_SWFTMR3 (winning opening error detection timer 3) are assigned to addresses 0002H to 0021H, and radio error, magnetic error, and vibration are assigned to this range. A storage area is defined that includes an error detection timer, an error notification timer, a discharge error flag related to a large winning opening discharge error, a discharge confirmation counter, and the like.

In the RAM clear process at the time of backup recovery, as shown in SPn2 to SPn4 of SYSTEM_800 in FIG. 31B, the address of W_BACKFLG (storage area of backup flag BF) is first set in the HL register pair (SPn2), and then it has already been described. As the number of processes in the "zero set process (_ZEROSET2)", set the address of'W_SWFTMR3 (winning opening error detection timer 3) -W_BACKFLG address + 1'to the B register (SPn3), and call the zero set process (_ZEROSET2). Execute (SPn4). As a result, the storage area of the backup flag BF to the specific storage area related to the error (here, W_SWFTMR3) are cleared to zero.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the backup is restored, only the work area related to a specific error is initialized so that the error information (radio wave error information, etc.) before the power failure is not carried over. As a result, a specific error can be resolved by simply turning the power on again, that is, by executing the backup restoration process. However, if there is an abnormality in the set value data or the backup flag BF, the RAM error determination process in steps S015 to S016 executes the power re-on wait process (steps S017 to S020) described later, and the power is re-turned. The error cannot be cleared unless the setting change operation is executed.

As described above, when the RAM clear processing at the time of backup restoration is completed, the processing state is shifted to the processing of step S033 at the merging point.

(E. Power supply re-on wait processing route (RAM error mode: steps S017 to S020)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 6A to 6B and FIGS. 31A to 31B, the processing contents of the power re-on wait processing route will be described. In the source code shown in FIGS. 31A and 31B, the execution order of the processing by the RAM error processing route is indicated by a thick arrow and a number related to the “RAM error” column. Hereinafter, in order to avoid duplicate description, the processing of steps S017 to S020 will be mainly described.

As described above, the case of shifting to the power re-on wait processing route is "when it is determined that the RAM is abnormal in the determination process of step S015, or the backup flag BF is a normal value in the determination process of step S016. This is the case when it is determined that the value is not (5AH).

In the power re-turning wait processing route, first, the power re-turning command data (BA07H) is acquired in the DE register (step S017, SPI1), and the acquired command data is sent to the effect control unit 24 by the command transmission process (_CMDOUT). Transmit (step S018, SPI2). When the effect control unit 24 receives the power re-on command, the liquid crystal display device 36 is notified of a RAM error (power re-on instruction effect) such as "Return the RAM error power and set the set value to 1." The effect image of the above is displayed, all the effect LEDs such as the decorative lamp 45 are turned off, and the speaker 46 is muted.

Next, the backup flag BF (W_BACKFLG) is cleared to zero (steps S019, SPI3), and the first power supply abnormality check process (_ VDDCHK) of FIG. 8 is called and executed (steps S020, SPI4).

However, after the first power supply abnormality check process of FIG. 8 is executed, the first power supply abnormality check process is repeated indefinitely under the power supply re-on wait state (see SPi5). That is, when an abnormality (RAM error) occurs in the stored contents of the RAM 203, the WDT clear process (step S701) and the power supply abnormality confirmation process (steps S702 to S703) are repeated indefinitely under the power re-on wait state. Be taken. Therefore, if a RAM error occurs when the power is turned on, the process related to the progress of the game does not proceed thereafter, and the setting change management process in step S023 is executed until the power is turned on again (in the case of the present embodiment). The game operation will be stopped (game stop processing). When a RAM error occurs, the WDT clear process is executed until a power supply abnormality signal is confirmed, and the WDT reset does not occur at the timing when the infinite loop process is repeated. Therefore, if the setting value data and backup data remain in a damaged state, even if the power is turned on again, the damaged data remains and the setting change processing route is not executed when the power is turned on. As long as, that is, when the power is turned on again, unless W (1, 1, 1) is set, the power turn-on wait process (steps S017 to S020) is executed again. Therefore, once a RAM error occurs, the RAM error is not resolved even if the power is simply turned on again, and unless the setting change management process of step S023 is executed and the work area including the setting value storage area is cleared, the RAM error occurs. Is not resolved. Therefore, the power re-turning command is transmitted in step S017, and the effect control unit 24 that receives the command causes the liquid crystal display device 36 to "re-turn the RAM error power supply" as a RAM error notification (power re-power-on instruction effect). Please set the set value to 1 ”and display an effect image to encourage the hall clerk to resolve the RAM error.

(∀: Prevention of fraudulent activity related to set values)
By the way, since the setting key switch 94 and the RAM clear switch 98 are provided inside the gaming machine, the front frame 2 (door) must always be opened when operating these switches. Therefore, when the setting change operation or the setting confirmation operation is a'regular operation', the door opening signal (door opening sensor 61) should always be in the ON state. In other words, the setting key switch signal (setting key switch 94) and the RAM clear signal (RAM clear switch 98) are ON even though the door open signal is OFF, that is, the front frame 2 (door) is closed. If it is in a state, it is considered to be an'illegal operation (goto act)'. In particular, since the high and low of the set value is a game factor that has a great influence on the profit of the pachinko hall and the profit of the player, it is necessary to strictly monitor the matters related to the set value. Therefore, in the present embodiment, at least in order to shift to the "setting change mode" related to the setting change, the "transition destination processing route" of FIG. 30 is subject to the condition that "the door is in the open state (door open signal ON)". See the'Change settings' column in the column).

In addition, the current set value is, in principle, kept secret from the player, and if the set value is known to the player, it may have a significant effect on the profit of the pachinko hall. Trouble such as a game table conflict between players may occur. For example, if a player realizes that the setting is low, such as setting 1, the possibility of playing a game on that gaming machine is extremely low, which has a significant impact on the reputation of the hall and the operating rate of the gaming machine. It ends up. Further, if the player realizes that the setting is as high as 6, the game table may be in conflict with each other, which may lead to a big trouble. Therefore, in the present embodiment, not only the transition to the "setting change mode" but also the transition to the "setting confirmation mode" is conditioned on "the door is in the open state (door open signal ON)" (Fig.). Refer to the "Setting confirmation" column in the "Migration destination processing route" column of 30). That is, if the door (front frame 2) is closed (door open signal OFF), neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is entered, and therefore the setting cannot be changed or the setting can be confirmed. There is. As a result, even clever goto acts such as secretly aiming to change settings or confirm settings by using fraudulent equipment with the door closed are disabled, and the effect of preventing fraudulent activities is enhanced.

On the other hand, RAM clearing and backup restoration are not related to setting changes, etc., and it is considered that the degree of influence on the interests of pachinko halls and players is small. Therefore, the ON / OFF state of the door open signal is not a condition for the transition to the RAM clear mode or the backup return mode. However, when RAM clear is executed, the game state returns to the initial state (normal state), the production mode is initialized accordingly, and other history and game settings related to the game are changed. , It can be said that it is an operation that can affect the progress of the game. In consideration of this point, "the door is open (door open signal ON)" may be a condition in the transition to the RAM clear mode. In this case, the transition condition to the RAM clear mode is only "setting key switch signal OFF, door open signal ON, and RAM clear ON (W (x, y, z) = W (0, 1, 1))". Only the transition to the backup return mode is an embodiment that does not require the ON / OFF state of the door opening signal.

Further, in the present embodiment, three signals of'setting key switch signal, door opening signal, and RAM clear signal', which are determination information related to the branch determination processing in steps S014, S025, and S026, are input to a specific input port (input port 1). (P_INPT1))) to collectively acquire the states (ON / OFF states) of these signals (see step S067 in FIG. 7 and SPa23 to SPa24 in FIG. 31A) and branch determination processing. (See steps S014 in FIG. 6A, SPb1 to SPb3 in FIG. 31A, steps S026 in FIG. 6B, and SPk1 to SPk2 in FIG. 31B) to determine (simultaneously determine) the states of these signals together (uniformly). It has been realized. As a result, the program capacity can be reduced, and the branch determination process can be simplified to reduce the control load.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the state of the door open signal is not set as the transition condition for the transition to the RAM clear processing route (the state of the door open signal is irrelevant), two signals, the setting key switch signal and the RAM clear signal, are used. However, in the setting change branch determination process in step S014, the state of the switch signal is other than W (1, 1, 1), that is, W (x, y, z). Since it is known in advance that the remaining 7 types of combinations are out of the 8 types of combinations (the determination result in step S014 is NO), at least the RAM clear signal ON / OFF state is determined as to whether or not the transition is possible. It is only necessary to determine (only the value of the 6th bit of the W register needs to be determined). Also, regarding the transition to the backup restoration processing route, the status of the door open signal is not a transition condition (regardless of the status of the door open signal), so the status of the two signals, the setting key switch signal and the RAM clear signal. However, in advance, the setting change branch determination process of step S014 and the RAM clear branch determination process of step S025 are executed, and at the stage of the setting change branch determination process of step S026, W (x, It is only necessary to determine whether or not y, z) is W (1, 1, 0). These points also simplify the determination process and reduce the control load.

In addition, using the RTC function, after the power is turned on, during business hours (for example, between 9:00 and 23:00), the power is turned on again, the setting is confirmed, the setting is changed, and the RAM is cleared. When at least one of the events is detected, a fraud detection means for detecting this as a fraudulent act can be provided. In this case, an output means for outputting the security signal related to the fraud detection to the outside of the gaming machine and / or a fraud notification means (for example, a notification means for issuing a predetermined alarm sound or alarm light for a predetermined time) can be provided. .. Thereby, the fraud prevention effect can be further improved. It should be noted that it is not necessary to configure all of the above-mentioned power-on operation, setting confirmation operation, setting change operation, and RAM clear operation to be detectable, and one or a plurality of these events can be detected. May be good.

<36. Summary of production control commands transmitted in each processing route: Fig. 36>
FIG. 36 shows the types of effect control commands transmitted in each of the processing routes of “setting change”, “RAM clear”, “setting confirmation”, “backup recovery”, and “waiting for power-on again (RAM error)” described above, and their transmission. It is explanatory drawing which showed the order.

In FIG. 36, the command type in which the inside of the frame is colored in gray is shown as an individual command type in each processing route, and the command type in which the inside of the frame is white is shown as a command type that can be transmitted in common. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 36, the setting change processing route "setting changing command (BA5AH) and setting completion command (BA09H)", the RAM clear processing route "RAM clear command (BA02H)", and the setting confirmation process The route "setting confirmation command (E022H) and setting confirmation end command (E022H)" and the power-on wait processing route "power restart wait command (BA07H)" are the command types sent independently by the processing route. ing.

In addition, the "power failure recovery display command (BA03H), hold number designation command (B0xxH, B1xxH), and recovery game state designation command (FAxxH to FxxxH)" are commonly transmitted in the setting confirmation processing route and the backup recovery processing route. The "spec specification command (F611H) and customer waiting command (BA04H)" are command types that are commonly transmitted by processing routes other than the power-on waiting processing route. .. However, the customer waiting command (BA04H) related to the setting confirmation processing route and the backup restoration processing route is transmitted only during non-variation.

As described above, after completing the processing according to the combination of the ON / OFF state of the setting key switch 94, the RAM clear switch 98, and the door opening sensor 61, the process proceeds to the process of step S033 which is the merging point.

With reference to FIG. 6B, when the process proceeds to step S033, the contents of all the registers are saved, the operation check timer setting process (FIG. 16) of the program outside the region is executed, and the contents of all the saved registers are restored. (Steps S033 to S035). The processes of steps S033 to S035 act as initial setting processes when the power is turned on for the performance indicator 99.

(16. Operation check timer setting process: Fig. 16)
The process of the operation confirmation timer setting process (step S034) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing details of the operation confirmation timer setting process.

In this operation confirmation timer setting process, necessary initial settings are made for executing the confirmation operation as to whether or not the performance indicator 99 is operating normally.

In the confirmation operation according to the present embodiment, the display modes of the four 7-segment displays 99a to 99d are periodically repeated for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) from all lighting and all extinguishing, "all blinking display (operation). Confirmation display) ”mode. This makes it possible to check for defects such as missing segments. The operation confirmation display process is performed by the performance display monitor process during the main control side timer interrupt process described later (see step S102 in FIG. 17 and step S833 in FIG. 25 described later).

In FIG. 16, the CPU 201 first saves the stack pointer (step S881), and then sets an initial value (for example, 5000 ms) in the operation confirmation timer that counts the operation confirmation time of the performance indicator 99 (step S882). The blinking timer that counts the blinking cycle of the performance indicator 99 is cleared to zero (blinking timer ← 0) (step S883). Then, the stack pointer is returned (step S884), and the operation confirmation timer setting process is exited. The work area of the data related to the display control of the performance indicator 99, such as the operation confirmation timer and the blinking timer, is defined in the out-of-area RAM.

By the way, in the present embodiment, after the merging point, the operation confirmation timer setting process by the out-of-area program is called and executed, but if it is before the merging point, for example, during the setting change processing route or the setting confirmation processing route. If it is executed, the processing related to the intra-regional timer and the processing related to the out-of-region timer are mixed and the processing becomes complicated. Further, when executing the program, it is necessary to jump between the intra-regional prolagum and the out-of-region prolagum, and there is a possibility that the JR instruction, which has a smaller amount of data than the CALL instruction, cannot be effectively used. Further, if the operation check timer setting process is executed after the timer interrupt process (FIG. 17) is started, the performance display monitor process (step S102) described later is executed, and the operation check display does not function well. There can also be. In consideration of such circumstances, it is preferable to execute the operation confirmation timer setting process at least after the merging point, and specifically, before the timer interrupt processing is started from the merging point (before step S036). ) Is preferably executed. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6B, the operation confirmation timer setting process is performed after each processing route such as the setting change processing route is completed and before the execution of step S036 regarding the activation of the timer interrupt processing. ..

After completing the process related to the operation check in steps S033 to S035, the CTC setting process for generating the timer interrupt periodically every 4 ms is then executed (step S036). After that, the interrupt request signal to the interrupt controller is periodically output, and the main control side timer interrupt process (4 ms interrupt process) shown in FIG. 17 is executed.

Next, assuming that the game startable state is ready, the launch control signal (launch permission signal ES) that permits the launch operation of the launch device 32 is set from the OFF state (launch prohibition state) to the ON state (launch permission state) (step). S037). As a result, the launch control signal is output to the payout control board 29. When the payout control board 29 receives the launch control signal, it determines that it is in the launch permission state, outputs the launch permission signal ES to the launch control board 28, and allows the launch operation by the launch device 32 (from the launch operation prohibited state). It shifts to the firing operation allowable state). After that, the game ball can be launched by the launch operation handle 15. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 6A and 6B, the launch control signal is controlled to the OFF state before the CTC setting process (step S036) is executed (see step S054 in FIG. 7). Therefore, the firing operation is prohibited at least until each processing of setting change, setting confirmation, in-area RAM clear, and backup restoration processing route is completed. As a result, it is possible to prevent an inadvertent firing operation from being executed while the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed.

In the present embodiment, the payout control board 29 receives the launch control signal from the main control unit 20 and allows the launch operation by the launch control board 28, in other words, the main control unit 20 passes through the payout control board 29. It is configured to indirectly control the launch control board 28. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the launch control signal may be directly output to the launch control board 28 to allow the launch operation.

Next, the game start command data (BA77H) is acquired, and the acquired command data is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 by the command transmission process (_CMDOUT) already described (steps S038, S039). When the effect control unit 24 receives the game start command, it executes an initial operation (initialization operation) related to the movable body accessory such as the clock-shaped accessory 80 and the flower-shaped accessory 90. However, during the initialization operation, the image display mode of the liquid crystal display device 36, the light emission mode of the decorative lamp 45, and the sound output from the speaker 46 do not change. The initialization operation plays the role of checking the operation of the movable body accessory when the power is turned on. If the initialization operation is executed in a state where the front frame 2 (door) may be opened / closed, the impact during the opening / closing operation of the door propagates to the movable body accessory, and the initialization operation is performed. May not be executed normally. Therefore, it is preferable that the door is closed (door open signal OFF state) as the execution condition of the initialization operation. However, if the door is simply closed, the initialization operation will be executed even if the door is temporarily opened and closed while the setting is being confirmed or the setting is being changed. The problem of improper operation remains unsolvable. Therefore, when the door is closed, the main control unit 20 can send the game start command and a command for notifying the door closure (a dedicated command or a door opening error release command). It is preferable to execute and control the initialization operation when the effect control unit 24 receives at least these two types of commands.

Then, when a series of power-on processing (steps S011 to S039: game start pre-processing) is completed, the infinite loop processing of the game processing steps S040 to S045 related to the normal game progress is executed. As a result, after that, the game is controlled to a state in which the progress of the game is possible (a state in which the game can be started).

(Game processing related to normal game progress: Loop processing of S040 to S045)
When the process of step S039 is completed, the loop process of steps S040 to S045 is started. Here, first, various random number update processes are executed (step S041) with the CPU set to the interrupt disabled state (step S040). In this various random number update process, various software random numbers (random numbers circulating in a predetermined numerical range by increment processing) used in the special symbol variation display game and the normal symbol variation display game are updated. For example, a special symbol judgment random number used for a symbol lottery, a random number related to an auxiliary hit lottery (auxiliary hit judgment random number used for a winning lottery per auxiliary, and a normal symbol judgment used for a symbol lottery per auxiliary). Random numbers used to change the initial value (start value) of random numbers (random numbers) (initial value random numbers for special symbol judgment, initial value random numbers for auxiliary hit judgment, etc.), random numbers for fluctuation patterns used for selecting fluctuation patterns, etc. Update.

After completing the various random number update processes (step S041), all the registers are then saved in the stack area (step S042), the performance display monitor aggregation division process of the program outside the area is executed (step S043), and then all the registers are moved. Return (step S044).

The performance display monitor aggregation division process in step S040 executes a base value calculation process for displaying on the performance display 99, and the CPU 201 is responsible for the program and storage area of the process related to the performance display, as described above. It is defined as an "out-of-area memory (second memory area)" that is different from the "in-area memory (first memory area)" that is accessed during normal game progress. Therefore, the CPU 201 first sets the contents of the stack pointer SP inside the area in the SP save buffer of the RAM outside the area, and sets the stack pointer SP of the RAM outside the area (set value = 01FFh).

Next, after executing the out-of-area RAM check process (see step S824 in FIG. 25 described later), the sensor (upper start) related to each winning opening obtained in the performance display monitor process (see step S102 in FIG. 17 described later). Based on the input data of the mouth sensor 34a, the lower start opening sensor 35a, the large winning opening sensor 52a, the general winning opening sensor 43a, and the OUT monitoring switch 49a), whether or not each winning opening is won, whether or not the game ball is discharged, etc. To check. Then, the count process (ball number addition process) required for the calculation is executed on the base value.

In the ball number addition process, the process differs depending on whether the current game state is the normal state or not. Specifically, when the current game state is the normal state and the winning is confirmed in one of the winning openings, the number of winning balls of the winning opening that has won is added to the number of payouts at the normal time ( (Normal state middle prize ball addition process), the number of outs in the normal state and the number of outs in all states are added by 1 (out ball number addition process), and the current count values are updated respectively. However, if the winning is not confirmed and the input to the OUT monitoring switch 49a is confirmed, 1 is added only to the number of outs in the normal state and the number of outs in all states, and these count values are updated (out ball in the normal state). Number addition processing). Details will be described later, but whether or not the current gaming state is in the normal state is determined by whether or not the'normal state determination flag (R_TUJFG)'of the out-of-area RAM is in the ON state (5AH) (FIG. 25. See steps S827 to S829 during the performance display monitor processing).

On the other hand, if the current gaming state is not the normal state (if it is in the probability change state, the time saving state, or the latent state), even if the winning is confirmed in any of the winning openings, the number of payouts in the normal time Without adding the number of prize balls, only the number of outs in all states is added by +1. Also, if the winning is not confirmed and the input to the OUT monitoring switch 49a is confirmed, only the number of outs in all states is added by 1. Out ball number addition processing in the abnormal state).

Then, the base value is calculated based on the updated normal payout number and normal out number, that is, the latest normal payout number and normal out number, and the value is stored in the measurement information storage area of the out-of-area RAM. Store.

Regarding the determination of whether or not the current gaming state is the normal state, the ON / OFF state of various flags related to the gaming state of the RAM in the area may be checked for determination. Specifically, the "condition device operation flag (W_JKFLG)" that specifies whether or not the condition device is activated, the "special symbol time reduction state flag (W_TJTFLG)" that specifies whether or not the special symbol is in the time saving state, and the high probability. Check ON (5AH) / OFF (00H) of the "special symbol probability change state flag (W_THIFLGDS)" that specifies whether or not it is a state (big hit high probability state), and according to the combination of these flag values, the current You may judge the game state of. For example, when the condition device operation flag is OFF, if both the special symbol time saving state flag and the special symbol probability change state flag are ON, the probability change state and the special symbol time reduction state flag are ON and the special symbol probability change state flag is set. If it is OFF, the time saving state, the special symbol time saving state flag is OFF, and if the special symbol probability change state flag is ON, the latent probability state, if both the special symbol time saving state flag and the special symbol probability change state flag are OFF, it is normal. When the state and the condition device operation flag are ON, it can be determined that a big hit is in progress. Further, the game state number YJ managed by the in-area RAM may be directly acquired, and the current game state may be determined from the value of YJ.

In addition, "during big hit game" is basically the same "low accuracy, no electric support" as in the normal state, but since it is a game state different from the normal state, it is a big prize in measuring the base value. The number of prize balls in the mouth 50 is excluded from the counting target (the detection information of the large winning mouth sensor 52a is not the measurement target). On the other hand, during the small hit game, it may be included in the counting target depending on the game state at the time of winning. This will be described in detail.

When the small hit is won, the internal transition control of the gaming state due to the winning is not executed, and the gaming state during the small hit game is continued as it is at the time of the winning. That is, if a small hit is won during the normal state, the normal state is continued even during the small hit game. In consideration of this point, in the present embodiment, when the gaming state during the small hit game is the normal state, the detection information of the large winning opening sensor 52a is not excluded from the measurement target, but is based on the number of prize balls. Count as the value to be counted. Whether the big hit game is in progress or the small hit game is in progress may be determined by the presence or absence of operation of the condition device. Specifically, the ON / OFF state of the condition device operation flag (W_JKFLG) is checked, and if the condition device operation flag is ON, it is determined that a big hit game is in progress and the detection information of the big winning opening sensor 52a. Should be excluded from the counting target of the base value.

In addition, from the time when the power is turned on for the first time or when the out-of-area RAM is all cleared, until the total number of out-of-areas reaches a predetermined number (for example, 299), only the number of out-of-areas is counted as a test section, and the base value, etc. Does not measure. This is in consideration of performing an operation test when the gaming machine is installed in the pachinko hall for the first time. For example, a game ball may be maintained at the starting port to check the operation or a trial hit may be made, and it is necessary to exclude the prize ball or the out ball from such an operation test from the measurement target. Therefore, the first measurement (first measurement) starts after the end of the test section.

If the total number of out-of-state data reaches a predetermined specified number (60,000 in this case) after the first (first) measurement is started, the base value (first base value) at this point is displayed as the performance of the RAM 203. It is stored in the storage area, and the current number of payouts during normal operation, the number of outs during normal operation, and the number of outs in all states are cleared to zero for the second measurement (measurement data initialization process). That is, every time the specified number of 60,000 is counted, the current base value is memorized, and for the next measurement of the base value, the normal payout number, the normal out number, and the total state out number during measurement are stored. Clear to zero.

The calculation of the base value is not completed by one loop processing (steps S040 to S045), but the base value is obtained by executing the loop a plurality of times. That is, if the base value calculation program is all executed in one loop process, the time required for one main loop becomes long, and the loop period is unnecessarily delayed. In the loop processing, the random number update processing (step S041) for updating various random number values is also executed, so it is important to avoid the delay of the cycle period as much as possible in order to prevent the goto action such as aiming. .. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the processing is divided into a plurality of times so that the processing related to the calculation and the display related to the base value calculation executed in one loop processing is reduced. For example, in the first loop processing, processing such as adding the number of balls and storing (updating) the result is performed, and in the second loop processing, the processing necessary for calculating and displaying the real-time base value is performed, and the third time. In the loop processing of, the processing necessary for displaying the history base value when the specified number of 60,000 is reached is performed. If the configuration does not execute the process related to the calculation and display of the base value in one loop process, what kind of process is divided and executed at what timing (how many times the loop process is executed, etc.) is determined. It can be determined as appropriate. In the case of division execution, for example, when the processing related to the base value is completed in a total of 3 loops such as the first loop processing → the second time → the final time, what kind of processing is performed in the next loop processing. It is necessary to memorize the parameter (counter) of whether to perform. The parameters for that purpose may be re-executed from the number of times when the power is turned on when the power is turned on, but may be initially set so that the parameters are always executed from the first (first) process when the power is turned on.

(Specific example of display mode of performance display 99)
A specific example of the display mode of the performance display 99 will be described. For example, when the total number of out states reaches 60,000, in the case where the base value this time is '35', when displaying the real-time base value, 4-digit character information (identification display unit (identification segment) + "BL.00" is displayed as the base display unit (ratio segment)) (the base value is 0 here because it is cleared to zero by the above-mentioned measurement data initialization process), and when displaying the history base value, " b6.35 ”will be lit and displayed.

(During the test section)
In the above test section, when displaying the real-time base value in order to notify that the current measurement is the test section, "bL." Is blinked on the identification display unit and "bL." Is displayed on the base display unit. --- "is lit and displayed. When displaying the history base value, "b6." Is blinked on the identification display unit and "---" is lit on the base display unit.

(At the time of initial measurement: N = 1)
At the time of the first measurement, the history base value is not saved, so when displaying the real-time base value, "bL. **"('**' is the base value currently being measured) is displayed. When displaying the history base value, "b6 .--" is displayed. However, the identification display unit "b6." Is blinking to notify that it is the first measurement.

(When measuring from the next time onward: N ≧ 2)
In addition, for the measurement after the next time (N ≧ 2), the real-time base value varies from the time when the zero is cleared until the number of all state outs reaches a predetermined number (for example, 6000) for the next measurement. When displaying the real-time base value, "bL." Is blinked on the identification display unit, and the real-time base value is lit and displayed on the base display unit as it is. When displaying the history base value, "b6. **"('**' is the previous base value) is displayed. However, in the case of the first time (N = 1), since the history base value is not saved, when displaying the history base value, "b6 .--" is displayed, but "b6." In the identification display unit is displayed. Is designed to blink.

Then, after finishing the performance display monitor aggregation division processing and restoring all the registers (step S044), the interrupt enabled state is set (step S045), and the process returns to the process of step S040, and thereafter, steps S040 to S045. Repeat the process of (main loop process). The CPU 201 repeatedly executes various random number update processes and performance display monitor aggregation / division processes, except during the timer interrupt process that is intermittently executed.

<17. Main control side timer interrupt process: Fig. 17>
Next, the timer interrupt process on the main control side will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process on the main control side. This main control side timer interrupt process is started by an interrupt from the CTC at regular time intervals (about 4 ms), and is interrupted and executed during the execution of the main control side main process.

In FIG. 17, when a timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 201 immediately executes the second power supply abnormality check process without saving the contents of the register (step S081). In this power supply abnormality check process, as shown in FIG. 18, the power supply level supplied from the power supply board is monitored, and backup processing is performed when a power supply abnormality such as a power failure occurs. Therefore, the second power supply abnormality check process functions as a backup means for retaining the stored contents of the RAM (here, the RAM in the area) even after the power supply is cut off. The details of the second power supply abnormality check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the timer management process is executed (step S082). The timer values of various timers used for controlling the game operation of the game machine 1 (for example, the error notification timer described above, the special symbol accessory operation timer described later, and the like) are updated here.

Next, the input management process is executed (step S083). For detection information of various sensors and switches provided in the game machine 1 and input information of a state signal from the payout control board 29 (information about an ON / OFF signal, information about a rising state (ON edge, OFF edge), etc.) Based on this, input data is created and the winning counter is updated.

Next, the setting abnormality check process is executed (step S084). In the setting abnormality check process, it is determined whether or not the set value data (W_SETTEI) is normal, and error processing related to the set value is executed based on the determination result. The details of the setting abnormality check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the random number management process in the timer interrupt is executed (step S085). In the random number management process in the timer interrupt, the random number related to each variable display game is updated periodically. Specifically, in order to make the count value of the random number counter random, the random number is updated (+1 is added for each interrupt) for the special symbol judgment random number and the auxiliary hit judgment random number, and the random number counter goes around. Each time, the process of changing the start value of the random number counter is executed. Since the internal lottery random number (big hit determination random number) is generated by the above random number generation circuit, it is not updated here.

Next, the error management process is executed (step S089). In this error management process, based on the detection information related to various switches and sensors, the status signal from the payout control board 29, etc., it is monitored whether or not an error (abnormality) has occurred in the game operation, and an error has occurred. In this case, an error command (a command including error type information) or an error cancellation command (sent when the error is cleared) according to the error type may be sent to the effect control unit 24, or if necessary, the error command may be sent. Executes forced stop processing of game operations.

Next, the prize ball management process is executed (step S090). In this prize ball management process, the winning counter is confirmed, and if there is a winning, a payout control command for specifying the number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 29. When the payout control board 29 receives the payout control command, the payout control board 29 controls the game ball payout device 19 based on the prize ball number information included in the payout control command to execute the payout operation for the designated number of prize balls.

Next, the normal symbol management process is executed (step S091). In this normal symbol management process, necessary processing is executed for the normal symbol variation display game (normal symbol variation display operation). Here, whether or not a game ball is detected by the normal symbol start port sensor 37a is monitored, and if the game ball is detected, predetermined game information (random number for determining auxiliary hit, etc.) required for the auxiliary hit lottery is input. Acquire (Public figure random number acquisition process), and hold and store the game information as hold data (Public figure operation hold ball) up to the maximum number of hold storage numbers (4 in this case) (Public figure hold storage process). Then, when a predetermined variation display start condition is satisfied, an auxiliary hit lottery based on the normal symbol operation holding ball is performed, a variation pattern of the normal symbol is selected based on the auxiliary hit lottery result, and a stop display mode of the normal symbol (normal stop). Design) is decided. Further, here, in order to operate the normal symbol in a fluctuating display operation, the LED display data for the fluctuating display is created if it is fluctuating, and the LED display data for the stop display is created if it is not fluctuating (normally). Design display data update processing).

Next, the normal electric accessory management process is executed (step S092). In this ordinary electric accessory management process, the process necessary for executing the Fuden open game is executed. Here, when the lottery result of the auxiliary hit lottery is a win, the solenoid control data setting process for the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 41c is executed. Based on the solenoid control data set here, an excitation signal is output to the normal electric accessory solenoid 41c in the solenoid management process of step S100 described later, whereby the opening / closing operation pattern of the movable wing piece 47 is changed. Be controlled.

Next, the special symbol management process is executed (step S093). In this special symbol management process, necessary processing is mainly executed for the special symbol variation display game (variation display operation of the special symbol). Details of this special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the special electric accessory management process is executed (step S095). In this special electric accessory management process, the process necessary for executing and controlling the winning game is executed. Details of this special symbol management process will be described later in FIG. 24.

Next, the right-handed notification information management process is executed (step S097). In this right-handed notification information management process, the right-handed display device 39b is turned on when the game is in a "right-handed advantageous" gaming state (in the case of this embodiment, a hit game, a time saving state, and a probability change state). LED data is created, and when the game is in a "left-handed advantageous" gaming state (normal state), LED data for turning off the right-handed display device 39b is created.

Next, the LED management process is executed (step S098). In this LED management process, output control of control signals (dynamic lighting data) for LED display devices such as a normal symbol display device 39a, a special symbol display device 38a, 38b, a composite display device 38c, and a right-handed display device 39b is executed. The control signal based on the LED display data created by the above-mentioned normal symbol management process (step S091), special symbol management process (step S093), right-handed notification information management process (step S097), etc. is the LED management process. It is output.

Next, the external terminal management process is executed (step S099). In this external terminal management process, various outer end signals are created through the frame external terminal board 21 and output control is executed for an external device such as a data counter DT or a hall computer HC.

Next, the solenoid management process is executed (step S100). In this solenoid management process, the solenoid control data set in the ordinary electric accessory management process (step S092) and the special electric accessory management process (step S094) is applied to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 41c and the large winning opening solenoid 52c. On the other hand, the output control of the excitation signal is executed. As a result, the movable wing piece 47 and the large winning opening 50 can be opened and closed.

Next, in order to execute the performance display monitor process of the program outside the region, all the registers are saved, the performance display monitor process is executed, and then all the registers are restored (steps S101 to 103). In the performance display monitor processing, necessary processing is executed regarding the display control of the performance display 99. The details of the performance display monitor processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the count value of the WDT is cleared (step S104). As a result, the WDT is reset and the count value is returned to the initial value.

After completing the processes of steps S081 to S104 above, the interrupt enabled state is set (step S104). As a result, the timer interrupt process is terminated, the process returns to the main control side main process before the interrupt, and the main control side main process is executed until the next timer interrupt occurs.

<18. Second power supply abnormality check process: Fig. 18>
Next, with reference to FIG. 18, the second power supply abnormality check process (step S081) in FIG. 17 will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing a second power supply abnormality check process.

In FIG. 18, the CPU 201 first acquires the input information of the power supply abnormality signal indicating a power failure from the external signal input register (PINSTS) (step S711). Then, it is determined whether or not the levels of the power supply abnormality signals match twice in succession (step S712), and the processes of steps S711 to S712 are repeated until they match. When the levels of the power supply abnormality signals match (step S712: YES), it is determined whether or not the power supply abnormality signal has an abnormality level (step S713).

When the power supply abnormality signal is not at an abnormal level (step S713: NO), the backup flag BF is cleared (step S723), the value of the power supply abnormality confirmation counter is cleared (step S724), and the second power supply abnormality check process is exited.

On the other hand, when the power supply abnormality signal is at an abnormal level (step S713: YES), when 1 is added to the value of the power supply abnormality confirmation counter (step S714), has the value of the power supply abnormality confirmation counter after the addition reached the upper limit value Y? It is determined whether or not (step S715). This takes into consideration that the data acquired from the external signal input register (PINSTS) may be garbled due to the influence of noise or the like, and the acquired data continuously maintains an abnormal level. When the upper limit value Y (for example, Y = 2) is reached, it is determined that the AC power supply is actually cut off.

When the value of the power supply abnormality confirmation counter reaches the upper limit value Y (step S715: YES), it is assumed that a power supply abnormality has occurred, and the backup process is executed. Specifically, the power supply abnormality confirmation counter is cleared (step S716), the firing control signal is set to the OFF state (step S717), and the backup flag BF is set to the ON state (5AH) (step S718). The backup flag BF may be set to the ON state, a checksum operation for calculating the checksum value may be executed, and the operation result may be stored in a predetermined area (SUM storage area) of the RAM 203. Here, the checksum operation is an 8-bit addition operation for the work area of the RAM 203. The checksum value stored in the SUM storage area at the time of electrical interruption is maintained by the backup power supply together with other data of the RAM 203. When the checksum is stored at the time of this backup, the checksum determination process is performed as a part of the RAM error determination process (see steps S015 to S016 in FIG. 6A) or in place of steps S015 to S016. "Can be provided. In this case, in the checksum determination process, the checksum at the time of power restoration is calculated, and the calculated checksum value is compared with the checksum value stored in the recorded SUM storage area at the time of power failure, and the comparison results do not match. In this case, the power supply re-on wait process (RAM error process) in steps S017 to S020 may be executed, and if the comparison results match, the process may proceed.

If a power failure occurs during the setting change management described above (step S023 in FIG. 6A), the timer interrupt process on the main control side is before the activation (before the execution of step S036 in FIG. 6B). 2 The power supply error check process is not executed and the backup process cannot be performed. In this case, if a power failure occurs after the backup flag BF is cleared to zero in step S901 during setting change management, it is determined that a RAM error has occurred at the next power restoration (determination in step S016 of FIG. 6A). The result is NO (BF ≠ 5AH)), the process shifts to the power supply re-on wait processing route (steps S017 to S020 in FIG. 6A), and the control is performed under the power re-on wait state.

Returning to the description of FIG. 18, when the process of step S718 is completed, the power off command data (BA33H) is then acquired, and the acquired command data is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 by the command transmission process (_CMDOUT) (. Step S719). The power off command (BA33H) is an effect control command that specifies that a power failure has occurred. This power cut command is composed of a power cut A command and a power cut B command each having a length of 16 bits, and is continuously transmitted every 8 bits in this order. The reason for adopting such a configuration is to prevent the power failure status from being erroneously notified to other control units due to the influence of noise or the like.

Next, 01H is set in the RAM protect register (RAMPT), and data writing to the RAM is prohibited in the subsequent processing as'RAM access prohibited area invalid, RAM protect enabled'(step S720). Then, the output data of all the output ports is cleared (step S721). As a result, it is prevented that the RAM is abnormally rewritten due to the reading of the invalid address of the RAM due to the voltage drop, and the same type of power supply abnormality check process is started later than the main control unit 20. Unreasonable data transmission to the substrate 29 can be prevented.

Then, the generation of the interrupt signal is prohibited by the setting process for the CTC, the CPU is set to the interrupt disabled (step S722), the power supply voltage drops while repeating the infinite loop process, and the CPU becomes inactive. wait.

<19. Setting error check process: Fig. 19>
Next, with reference to FIG. 19, the setting abnormality check process (step S084) in FIG. 17 will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing a setting abnormality check process.

In FIG. 19, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the setting error flag is in the ON state (= 5AH), that is, a RAM error (setting error error) (step S731). When the setting error flag is in the ON state (step S731: = 5AH), the setting abnormality check process is exited without doing anything. On the other hand, when the setting error flag is not in the ON state (step S732: ≠ 5AH), the set value Nc is acquired from the set value storage area (W_SETTEI) of the RAM in the area, and the value corresponds to a normal value (corresponding to the set values 1 to 6). It is determined whether or not it is (a value of any of 00H to 05H) (step S732). This determination process is the same as the content of the determination process in steps S903 and S913 during the setting change management process of FIG.

When the acquired set value Nc is neither a value of 00H to 05H (step S732: NO), it is assumed that an abnormality has occurred in the set value data, and the setting error flag is set to the ON state (5AH) (step S733). Then, the set value abnormality command data (0E33H) is acquired (step S734), and the acquired command data is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S735) by the command transmission process (_CMDOUT) to exit the setting abnormality check process. .. When the effect control unit 24 receives the set value abnormality command, the effect means is used to execute the setting error error notification (RAM error notification). For example, the decorative lamp 45 is turned on in all red, and the liquid crystal display device 36 is displayed with a message such as "RAM is abnormal. Please call a staff member."

<20. Special symbol management process: Fig. 20>
Next, the special symbol management process (step S093) in FIG. 17 will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol management process.

In FIG. 20, the CPU 201 first performs the “special figure 1 start port check process” regarding the special symbol 1 side (upper start port 34 side) (step S301), and then the special symbol 2 side (lower start port 35 side). "Special figure 2 start port check process" is executed (step S302). The details of the special figure 1 start port check process and the special figure 2 start port check process will be described later in FIG.

When the start port check processing in steps S301 to S302 is completed, the state of the small hit medium flag is determined (step S303). This "small hit medium flag" is a flag for designating whether or not the small hit game is in progress, and when the flag is in the ON state (= 5AH), it indicates that the small hit game is in progress. , When the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that the small hit game is not in progress.

When the small hit middle flag is in the OFF state (= 00H) (step S303: ≠ 5AH), then the state of the condition device operation flag is determined (step S304). This "condition device operation flag" is a flag for designating whether or not the jackpot game is in progress, and when the flag is in the ON state (= 5AH), it indicates that the jackpot game is in progress. When the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that the jackpot game is not in progress.

When the condition device operation flag is in the OFF state (= 00H) (step S304: ≠ 5AH), that is, when neither the small hit game nor the big hit game is performed (step S303: ≠ 5AH and step S304: ≠ 5AH), special The process related to the variable display operation of the special symbol is executed according to the symbol operation status (00H to 03H) (step S305: special symbol operation status branching process). On the other hand, during the small hit game (step S303: = 5AH) or during the big hit game (step S304: = 5AH), the process related to the variation display operation of the special symbol in steps S306 to S308 is not performed as it is. The process proceeds to the special symbol display data update process in step S309. Therefore, when either the small hit game or the big hit game is in progress, the variable display operation of the special symbol is not performed. That is, during the hit game, the stop display mode of the special symbol is held as being fixedly displayed as the small hit symbol or the large hit symbol.

In the special symbol operation status branch processing in step S305, it depends on which of the status values "waiting (00H, 01H)", "changing (02H)", and "confirming (03H)" the special symbol operation status is. Then, the processes of steps S306 to S308 corresponding to each are executed. By these processes, the fluctuation display operation that sets the fluctuation start and fluctuation stop of the special symbol is realized. Details of the special symbol variation start processing (step S306) and the special symbol confirmation time processing (step S308), which are closely related to the present invention, will be described later in FIGS. 22 and 23A to 23B, respectively.

When any of the processes of steps S306 to S308 is completed, the special symbol display data update process of step S309 described later is performed. In this special symbol display data update process, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is fluctuating, and if it is fluctuating, the data of the special symbol that repeats blinking at predetermined time intervals (data for 7-segment blinking display during fluctuation). ), And if the special symbol is not changing, the data for stop display (data for 7-segment blinking display during stop display) is created. The display data of the special symbol created here is output by the LED management process (step S098) of FIG. 17, and the variation display and the stop display of the special symbol on the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b are realized. When the special symbol display data update process is completed, the special symbol management process is exited, and the special electric accessory management process of step S095 of FIG. 17 is executed.

(21. Special figure 1 start port check process: FIG. 21)
A special figure 1 start port check process (step S301 in FIG. 20) will be described with reference to FIG. 21. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing details of the special drawing 1 start port check process. This special figure 1 start port check process serves as a winning process executed based on the establishment of a predetermined starting condition, and is mainly a process related to hold memory when a game ball wins a prize in the upper starting port 34. And, it is mainly composed of processing related to pre-reading notice effect (hold addition command). It should be noted that the special figure 1 start port check process and the special figure 2 start port check process differ only in whether the processing content is related to the special figure 1 side or the special figure 2 side. The processing contents are substantially the same. Therefore, here, in order to avoid duplicate description, the special figure 1 starting port check process will be mainly described.

In FIG. 21, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not a winning (winning ball) is detected at the upper starting port 34 (step S311).

When the winning of the upper starting port 34 (special drawing 1 starting opening) is detected (step S311: YES), it is determined whether or not the number of balls held in special drawing 1 is 4 or more (step S312). That is, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls for operation in FIG. 1 is less than the maximum number of reserved balls (4 in this case). If the winning of the upper starting port 34 is not detected (step S311: NO), the special drawing 1 starting port check process is exited without doing anything.

Special figure 1 When the number of pending balls is 4 or more, that is, when an over-winning exceeding the maximum number of reserved balls occurs (step S312: YES), an over-winning command for designating the over-winning (in the case of special figure 1). B006H, B106H in the case of special drawing 2) is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S324). On the other hand, when the number of balls held in special figure 1 is not 4 or more, that is, less than 4 (step S312: NO), 1 is added (+1) to the number of balls held in special figure 1 (step S313), and step S314 is performed. Proceed to the process of.

Proceeding to the process of step S314, various random numbers used in the special symbol variation display game 1 related to the special figure 1 operation holding ball generated this time are acquired (step S314). Specifically, the current values of the jackpot determination random number, the special symbol determination random number, and the fluctuation pattern random number are acquired from various random number counters, and the acquired random number values are stored in the reserved storage area of the RAM in the area. This hold storage area is an area for storing predetermined game information related to the symbol variation display game as an operation hold ball (hold data), and in this hold storage area, the above-mentioned various random values as hold data are special symbols. Until the variable display operation of 1 is performed (until the special symbol variable display game 1 is executed), the start conditions are held and stored in the order of establishment (winning order). The reserved storage area includes a reserved storage area corresponding to the special symbol 1 side and the special symbol 2 side (special symbol 1 reserved storage area (first reserved storage area) corresponding to the special symbol 1) and special symbol 2 A special figure 2 hold storage area (second hold storage area) corresponding to the above is provided. These hold storage areas are provided with hold 1 storage area to hold n storage area (n is the maximum number of operation hold balls: n = 4 in the present embodiment), and hold data for the maximum number of operation hold balls. (The hold storage order is such that hold 1 storage area, hold 2 storage area, ..., Hold n-1 storage area, hold n storage area are stored in this order).

Of the above-mentioned various random numbers, the special symbol determination random number and the fluctuation pattern random number are extracted from the random number counters that generate random numbers by software corresponding to each. Since the random number values of these random number counters are updated randomly in the count value storage area corresponding to each of the RAMs in the area in the interrupt processing that occurs intermittently and the main processing that is executed between the interrupt processing. The value is acquired as it is. On the other hand, the jackpot determination random number value is extracted from a random number generation circuit that generates random numbers in hardware (a jackpot determination random number counter for counting the jackpot determination random number value: not shown). When the detection signal of the game ball is input from the upper start port sensor 34a or the lower start port sensor 35a, the random number generation circuit latches the count value at this timing so that the count value is input to the microcomputer. It has become. This count value is stored as a random number value for jackpot determination in a storage area for a random number value for jackpot determination (random number latch buffer for determining operation of a special electric accessory) of a RAM in an area provided separately from the hold storage area. The CPU 201 reads and uses the big hit determination random number value stored in the special electric accessory operation determination random number latch buffer at a necessary timing.

Next, as the winning command data (data corresponding to the lower byte side (EVENT) of the hold addition command) for creating the hold addition command (details will be described later), the look-ahead prohibition data (EVENT: "9FH") that prohibits the look-ahead determination is prohibited. ”) Is acquired (step S315), and it is determined whether or not the“ special figure 1 look-ahead prohibition condition ”is satisfied (step S316). The above-mentioned "special figure 1 look-ahead prohibition condition" is a condition for prohibiting the look-ahead determination (prohibiting the look-ahead notice) for the special figure 1 operation holding ball. In the present embodiment, the case of "under the state with electric support (for example, the time saving state or the probability change state)" in which the special figure 2 operation holding ball can occur with a higher probability than the special figure 1 operation holding ball is described as "special figure 1 look-ahead". "Prohibited", and conversely, "Under the state without electric support (for example, normal state or latent state)" where the special figure 1 operation hold ball can occur with a higher probability than the special figure 2 operation hold ball. Special figure 2 Pre-reading is prohibited. In the determination process of step S316, when the current gaming state is a gaming state accompanied by an electric support state, the special figure 1 look-ahead prohibition condition is satisfied, and the determination result is “YES”.

When the above-mentioned special figure 1 pre-reading prohibition condition is satisfied (step S316: YES), the process related to the pre-reading determination (steps S317 to S321) is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of step S322 described later. In this case, the look-ahead determination for the operation hold ball of this special figure 1 is not executed, and the hold addition command having the look-ahead prohibition data (EVENT: "9FH") is created (see step S322 described later). ). As a result, the execution of the look-ahead notice effect is prohibited (the look-ahead notice effect for the current operation hold ball is not executed).

Special Figure 1 When the pre-reading prohibition condition is not satisfied (step S316: NO), then it is determined whether or not the setting error flag is in the ON state (5AH) (step S317). When the setting error flag is in the ON state (step S317: = 5AH), that is, when a RAM error (setting error error) has occurred, the process related to the look-ahead determination (steps S317 to S321) is skipped, and the step described later is performed. Proceed to the process of S322. In this case as well, the look-ahead determination for the special figure 1 operation hold ball is not executed, the hold addition command having the look-ahead prohibition data (EVENT: "9FH") is created, and the look-ahead notice effect is not executed either. In other words, the read-ahead prohibition data (9FH) can be said to be data that specifies that the processes related to the look-ahead determination (steps S318 to S321) are not executed.

When the setting error flag is not in the ON state (step S317: ≠ 5AH), the set value command is transmitted and the random number determination process (winning jackpot random number determination process) is executed (step S318). The above-mentioned "setting value command" includes information that can specify the current setting value, and when the effect control unit 24 side displays and controls a notice effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect described later) based on the set value. Used for. Further, the above random number determination process is performed as a part of the'look-ahead determination'process. A'look-ahead winning / failing determination'is performed to determine in advance "see step S410 in FIG. 22 described later).

In the above random number determination process, first, a hit random number determination table (not shown) is acquired, and a large hit determination random number value of the special electric accessory operation determination random number latch buffer is acquired. Then, based on the acquired random number value for jackpot determination and the winning random number determination table, the winning lottery (pre-reading winning determination) for the operation pending ball this time is executed, and the lottery result (pre-reading winning result) is acquired.

The hit random number determination table includes the "Random number determination table for special figure 1 (not shown)" related to the special figure 1 operation hold ball (special symbol variation display game 1) and the special figure 2 operation hold ball (special symbol). The "Random number judgment table for special figure 2 (not shown)" related to the variable display game 2) is included, and the "Random number judgment table for special figure 1" is special during the special figure 1 start port check process. FIG. 2 “Random number determination table for special figure 2” is referred to during the start port check process. This hit random number determination table is also used when performing a winning lottery in the "random number determination process for determining the operation of a special electric accessory (step S410 in FIG. 22)" described later.

In these hit random number judgment tables, the winning type (big hit, small hit, or loss) is determined for each big hit lottery probability state (high probability state (high probability) and low probability state (low probability)). The judgment area (judgment value) for this purpose and the random number value for big hit judgment (size of random number for big hit judgment: 65536) are defined in association with each other. Specifically, the random number value for big hit judgment is any judgment value. The winning type is determined depending on whether or not it belongs to. Therefore, even if the acquired random numbers for jackpot determination belong to the same determination value, depending on whether the current jackpot lottery probability (operational probability of the conditional device) is high or low, on the other hand, " The winning type may be different, such as "big hit" and "missing" on the other hand.

In the case of the present embodiment, the hit random number judgment table is provided with a hit judgment table corresponding to each set value (settings 1 to 6) (a table in which at least the lottery probabilities of big hits are different depending on the settings 1 to 6). Has been done. Further, in the case of the present embodiment, the ratio of the jackpot lottery probability at the time of high probability to the jackpot lottery probability at the time of low probability (probability fluctuation ratio: high probability / low probability) is the same at each set value, and the ratio is 10. It is set to a value that does not exceed. For example, setting 6 "1/320 at low probability, 1/32 at high probability", setting 5 "1/330 at low probability, 1/33 at high probability", ..., Setting 2 "1/32 at low probability". With 390, high probability 1/39 "and setting 1" low probability 1/410, high probability 1/41 ", the jackpot is won.

In addition, the said probability fluctuation ratio may be a different ratio in each set value, or may be a different ratio in a part. Further, instead of providing a hit determination table corresponding to each set value (settings 1 to 6), a common hit determination table may be provided for a part of each set value. For example, the common "low setting hit random number judgment table" for settings 1 and 2, setting 3 is "setting 3 hit random number judgment table", setting 4 is "setting 4 hit random number judgment table", and settings 5 to 6 A common "random number determination table for high setting" can be provided. In this case, a common hit random number judgment table is referred to for some setting values (setting 1 and setting 2 and setting 5 and setting 6 in this example), and the profit degree (ball output rate) is the same between the settings. Can be. In this case, the actual setting can be set to "three stages". Even when a common hit random number determination table is referred to, the original 6-step setting can be achieved by setting the symbol selection rate of each hit type to a different probability for each set value. In this way, by also using the hit random number determination table with some of the set values, even in a model with a 6-step setting as in the present embodiment, the actual setting can be reduced to less than the 6-step setting. ..

After completing the random number determination process in step S318 described above, the special stop symbol data creation process is then executed (step S319). This special stop symbol data creation process is performed as a part of the'look-ahead determination'process, and here, the "symbol at the start of fluctuation" executed when the operation holding ball is subjected to the fluctuation display operation. A'look-ahead symbol determination'for determining the lottery (see step S411 in FIG. 22 to be described later) in advance is performed.

In the above-mentioned special stop symbol data creation process, the "symbol table (not shown) according to the pre-reading winning result obtained in step S318 and the special symbol type (special figure 1 and special figure 2) to be processed this time. ) ”Is selected. Then, the special symbol determination random value obtained in step S314 is acquired, and based on the selected symbol table and the acquired special symbol determination random value, the symbol lottery (look-ahead) for the current operation pending ball is performed. Execute the symbol determination) and acquire the lottery result (look-ahead symbol result).

The above "design table" includes a "big hit symbol table", a "small hit symbol table", and a "missing symbol table" for determining a jackpot type, a small hit type, and a loss type, and each symbol table is a special symbol. It is provided according to the type. These symbol tables are also used when performing a symbol lottery at the start of fluctuation in the special stop symbol creation process (step S411 in FIG. 22) described later.

In the symbol table, a determination area (judgment value) for determining a hit type (symbol type) and a random value for special symbol determination (size of random value for special symbol determination: 200) are defined in association with each other. Specifically, the winning type is determined according to a predetermined symbol selection rate depending on which determination value the special symbol determination random value belongs to. In the present embodiment, the special symbol determination data and the special stop symbol number are acquired as the data indicating the lottery result.

The "special symbol determination data" is data that identifies the winning type (winning type: big hit type, small hit type, and loss type). Specifically, the big hits 1 to 11 and the small hit shown in FIG. 1. It is data for identifying which of the losses A to C (not shown) was won. This special symbol determination data is a process that requires winning type information (for example, a game state transition preparation process in step S412 of FIG. 22 described later, a special symbol variation pattern creation process in step S413, and a process related to execution control of a jackpot game. It is data used in (special electric accessory management process of FIG. 24), and the above-mentioned "special stop symbol number" is data for designating a special stop symbol mode to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device. , It is used when the main control unit 20 side specifies the stop symbol type of the special symbol.

If there is only one winning type to be drawn, the symbol table may not be provided. For example, if the type of loss is one type of loss A, and if the winning result is a loss without providing a loss symbol table (without performing a symbol lottery), the loss A may be determined as the winning type. .. In the case of this embodiment, since "small hit" is excluded from the big hit lottery target on the special figure 2 side (no small hit win), the small hit symbol table for special figure 2 is not provided. A small hit symbol table may be provided in which the symbol selection rate is 0%.

Further, as shown in FIG. 4, the special figure 2 side has a higher selection rate of the jackpot type that gives a relatively high profit than the special figure 1 side, and the symbol lottery is advantageous for the player. As a result, it is considered that it is more advantageous for the player to receive the lottery of the special symbol variation display game 2 than the special symbol variation display game 1. In particular, in the state with electric support, the winning probability on the lower starting port 35 side is dramatically improved, and the chances of executing the special symbol variation display game 2 are increased. Therefore, in the state with electric support, the game is in a high base game state. Not only that, it is considered to be an advantageous gaming state for the player from the viewpoint of the symbol lottery.

A common symbol table may be defined for all settings, but a symbol table may be defined according to the settings. In this case, it can be configured as follows.
(A) The symbol selection rate of one or more winning types is different in a part or all of each setting. For example, regarding the symbol lottery rate of jackpots 1 to 4 shown in FIG. 4, in the case of setting 1, "7%, 4%, 35%, 13%" is set, and in the case of setting 6, "15%, 5%, It can be "30%, 12%".
(B) The probability variation inrush rate (the jackpot symbol selection rate that triggers the transition to probability variation and / or latency) is different in all or part of each setting. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, the probability variation inrush rate is 65% (the rate of latent probability and probability variation jackpot is 65%, and the rate of time saving jackpot is 35%). For example, in the case of setting 1. Can set the probability variation inrush rate to 60%, and in the case of setting 6, the probability variation inrush rate can be set to 65%. The same applies to the time reduction rush rate (the jackpot symbol selection rate that triggers the transition to time reduction).
In any case, the higher the setting, the more advantageous the ball ejection performance may be for the player.

After completing the special stop symbol data creation process in step S319 described above, the start opening winning random number determination process is then executed (step S320). This start port winning random number determination process is also performed as part of the'look-ahead determination'process, and here, the "variation at the start of fluctuation" that is executed when the operation hold ball is subjected to the variation display operation. A'look-ahead variation pattern determination'for determining "pattern lottery (see step S413 in FIG. 22 to be described later)" is performed in advance.

When the start opening winning random number determination process is entered, the winning lottery result obtained in the random number determination process in step S318, the look-ahead symbol determination result obtained in the special stop symbol data creation process in step S319, and the look-ahead symbol determination result in step S314 are entered. Using the'random number for fluctuation pattern'acquired in the process, the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation related to the current operation hold ball, that is, the "variation display operation" executed when the current operation hold ball is subjected to the fluctuation display operation. The result of the special symbol variation pattern creation process (see S413 in FIG. 22 described later) ”is pre-read and determined. Then, based on the read-ahead determination result, the winning command data 1 (second byte (EVENT): lower byte) used for creating the hold addition command is created. As a result, for the winning command data 1, the look-ahead prohibition data "9FH" set in step S315 specifies the content of the look-ahead fluctuation pattern (excluding the number of reserved balls information) by the random number determination process at the start opening winning. It will be updated to the value. The specified contents of the look-ahead fluctuation pattern according to the present embodiment include normal fluctuation type, N reach loss, weak SP reach loss, medium SP reach loss, strong SP reach loss, N reach jackpot, weak SP reach jackpot, medium SP reach jackpot, and strong SP reach. There are big hits, 2R latent probability, small hit designation, etc., and the winning expectation related to the look-ahead fluctuation pattern increases in this order, and the higher the winning expectation, the higher the winning probability by the look-ahead notice lottery. It is getting higher. In the case of the present embodiment, as described above, the content specified by the look-ahead variation pattern is not, for example, the reach type itself of "N reach 1", but the gist of the "N reach type (N reach 1 or N)". It is designed to specify that it is "reach 2)".

In the present embodiment, the look-ahead winning determination data obtained in the random number determination process in step S318 is immediately used in the special stop symbol data creation process in the subsequent step S319, and this data is not required thereafter. , The look-ahead symbol determination data obtained in the special stop symbol data creation process is immediately used in the random number determination process at the time of winning the start opening in the subsequent step S320, and this data is not required thereafter, and the start opening is not required. The look-ahead fluctuation pattern information (data of the winning command 1) obtained by the random number determination process at the time of winning is only used for creating the hold addition command, and this data is not required thereafter. Therefore, in the present embodiment, various data obtained by the series of look-ahead determination processes of steps S318 to S0323 are kept in the register and are not stored in the RAM one by one. As a result, the memory capacity of the ROM or RAM can be reduced, and the control load can be reduced.

After completing a series of look-ahead determination processes in steps S318 to S321 above, the winning command data 1 on the lower byte (EVENT) side that specifies the look-ahead fluctuation pattern, the current number of pending balls, and the special symbol type are subsequently used. A "hold addition command" is created based on the winning command data 2 (MODE) on the upper byte side (step S322), and is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 without being stored in the RAM 203 (step S323). , Special figure 1 Exit the start port check process.

Regarding the award command data 2 (MODE), when the special figure 1 start port check process is executed, any value of "B6H to B9H" is obtained according to the special figure 1 operation holding balls 1 to 4. Is set, and when the special figure 2 start port check process is executed, any value of "BBH to BEH" is set according to one to four special figure 2 operation holding balls. Therefore, this hold addition command includes the look-ahead determination result information obtained in a series of processes related to the look-ahead determination (steps S318 to S320), specifically, information capable of specifying the look-ahead variation pattern.

However, if the read-ahead prohibition condition is met or an abnormality occurs in the set value data, the look-ahead prohibition data (9FH) acquired in step S315 is maintained as it is, and the hold addition command "** 9FH (* 9FH) having the look-ahead prohibition data is maintained. "**" is a value of any of B6H to B9H and BBH to BEH) "is created and transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (the determination result in step S315 is NO, and the determination result in S316 is NO". See the processing route of).

When the hold addition command is transmitted from the main control unit 20, the effect control unit 24 that receives the command determines whether or not the look-ahead advance notice effect can be executed unless the information included in the hold addition command is specified as pre-reading prohibition. When a lottery (pre-reading notice lottery) is performed and it is determined that the lottery is feasible (when the pre-reading notice lottery is won), the pre-reading notice (hold change notice) production scenario (hereinafter referred to as "hold notice scenario"). Is created, and based on the scenario, a look-ahead notice effect targeting the current operation hold ball is displayed. In the hold notice scenario, a plurality of types of production scenarios for realizing various hold change notices are prepared, and as a typical example thereof, here, a new operation hold ball is set as the fourth operation hold ball, and the operation hold ball is used. An example of an effect scenario selected when the icon is displayed as the hold icon of the hold display unit d1 will be described, and the description of the case of 1 to 3 operation hold balls will be omitted in order to avoid duplicate description.

Here, as a hold notice scenario, not only the hold change (change in hold color) at the time of winning, but also the look-ahead notice that the hold display changes with the shift display, for example, the current operation hold ball is the third operation hold ball. When the hold icon at the time of winning is displayed in "white (normal hold color)", the hold display mode is "white hold (at the time of winning) → blue hold (first shift display) every time the shift display is performed. ) → Red hold (second shift display) ”, an example of adopting a hold change notice (scenarios 1 to 8) will be described.

(1) "White->white->white->white" of scenario 1 (hold display unit d1 (at the time of winning)-> hold display unit c1-> hold display unit b1-> hold display mode when displayed on hold display unit a1) The production scenario continues to be displayed as a normal color white hold without a hold change, and if the look-ahead notice lottery is not won or the look-ahead fluctuation pattern with a low expectation of winning is selected with a high probability. ..
(2) The production scenarios of scenario 2 "white->white->blue->blue" and scenario 3 "white->white->green->red" are displayed in a hold display mode in which the winning expectation is relatively low at the time of winning. , It is a "step-up type hold notice" in which the hold change notice can be developed step by step with the shift display as an opportunity, and finally, the hold display mode in which the winning expectation is relatively higher than the hold display mode at the time of winning. Is displayed. Such a step-up type hold notice is directed in that even if the hold at the time of winning is "white", the player is expected to see what kind of display mode the hold display mode of the final change destination will be. It can be said that it is a highly effective pending change notice.
(3) “Blue → blue → yellow → SP (blue)” in scenario 4 and “blue → blue → yellow → SP (red)” in scenario 5 are the same as the above-mentioned “steps” in scenarios 2 and 3 above. Although it belongs to the "up-type hold notice", the major difference from the above-mentioned production scenarios of scenarios 2 and 3 is not only the change in the hold color but also the special hold such as "SP (blue)" and "SP (red)". The point is that the icon is changed to an icon (for example, a special hold display mode in which character information is attached to a hold icon colored in a predetermined hold color). In the case of this embodiment, the hold display mode of "SP (blue)" or "SP (red)" is selected only when the look-ahead variation pattern type is "SP reach type", and the operation hold ball related to SP reach is selected. It is a "SP reach confirmation hold" that definitely notifies that. That is, this "SP reach confirmation hold" is a hold display mode that announces the occurrence of SP reach, which has a relatively high expectation of winning among the reach types. Further, the relationship of the winning expectation is the same as the relationship of the winning expectation of the reserved color, that is, “SP (blue) <SP (red)”. That is, in the case of the look-ahead fluctuation pattern that specifies one of the weak, medium, and strong SP reach, the selection rate of scenario 4 in which SP (blue) appears is in the relationship of "weak>medium>strong", and SP ( The selection rate of scenario 5 in which red) appears has a relationship of "weak <medium <strong".
(4) In the production scenario of "SP->SP->SP->SP" in scenario 6, the hold icon at the time of winning is one aspect of SP reach confirmation hold, but in this scenario 6, the hold icon has a special pattern. A special SP reach confirmation hold (special SP reach confirmation hold) accompanied by the character information of "SP" is displayed. This special SP reach confirmation hold is positioned as an SP reach confirmation hold with a relatively higher expectation of winning than the above-mentioned "SP (blue)" and "SP (red)".
(5) The production scenario of "SP->SP->SP->rainbow" in scenario 7 is similar to the production scenario in scenario 6, but the difference between scenario 6 and the production scenario in scenario 7 is that the operation pending ball In the stage before it is digested, it is changed to "rainbow color hold" that notifies the big hit winning confirmation (winning). Therefore, scenario 7 is selected only for the look-ahead fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit.
(6) In scenario 8, "blue->blue->yellow->'setting + hold color green'" suggests the winning expectation by the hold color, and is set internally by the hold icon (item image or character) of "setting". It is a special hold change notice (setting-related look-ahead notice effect) that also has a setting-related effect described later in addition to the original character of the hold change notice such as suggesting a value.

Which scenario is selected is selected with a predetermined selection rate according to the content of the look-ahead fluctuation pattern. Although details will be described later, in all or part of scenarios 1 to 8, the appearance rate can be made different for each of settings 1 to 6.

Further, if the information included in the hold addition command is designated as pre-reading prohibition, the effect control unit 24 determines that the pre-reading notice cannot be executed without executing the pre-reading notice lottery or by forcibly losing the pre-reading notice lottery. .. As a result, the occurrence of the look-ahead notice effect is prohibited. In the present embodiment, the hold addition command is transmitted regardless of whether or not a setting error has occurred, while the hold addition command for which read-ahead prohibition is specified is transmitted in the case of a setting error. The reason is as follows.

In the case of the present embodiment, even if a setting abnormality error occurs, the game operation is not forcibly stopped and controlled (for example, the game is not controlled so that the game cannot be continued, such as prohibiting the symbol variation display operation or stopping the firing operation). The first reason is that the resolution of the setting abnormality error is resolved by performing the setting change operation as described above (see the setting change management process in step S023), but the setting change operation during business hours. Is likely to fall under the prohibition as a matter that inspires gambling from the viewpoint of legal request. Secondly, if the game operation process is forcibly stopped immediately when a setting abnormality error occurs, the player feels distrust of the game machine. For example, when the symbol variation display game in process is executed during normal operation, or when a big hit game is in progress, a setting error error occurs by chance and the game is controlled so that the game cannot be played immediately. Then, the profit that the player should originally obtain disappears, which causes distrust of the player. In consideration of such circumstances, in the present embodiment, when a setting abnormality error occurs, the game progress itself such as a symbol variation display game or a winning game is conditional, in addition to notifying the error. It is designed to proceed as it is. The expression "conditionally" here means that, in the present embodiment, when a setting abnormality error occurs, pre-reading notice is prohibited, or the result of the symbol variation display game is forcibly controlled to be lost. (See step S317 during the start port check process of FIG. 21 and step S409 during the special symbol variation start process of FIG. 22 described later). The reason why the game proceeds as it is "conditionally" in this way is that when a setting abnormality error occurs, if you do not stop at the error notification and take no other measures, due to the defect, the production control process This is because there is a risk that it will affect the game and the jackpot lottery will not be executed correctly.

<22. Special symbol change start processing: Fig. 22>
Next, the special symbol variation start processing (step S306) in FIG. 20 will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol variation start processing.

In FIG. 22, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the number of balls on hold in FIG. 2 is zero (step S401), and if the number of balls on hold in FIG. 2 is not zero (step S401: NO), FIG. 2 The processing (steps S403 to S416) at the start of the fluctuation targeting the number of pending balls is executed. On the other hand, when the number of balls on hold in special figure 2 is zero (step S401: YES), it is subsequently determined whether or not the number of balls on hold in action 1 is zero (step S402), and the balls on hold in action 1 If the number is not zero (step S402: NO), the processing at the start of fluctuation (steps S403 to S416) for the number of balls on hold in FIG. 1 is executed. By the processing of steps S401 and S402, "priority" of which of the special figure 1 operation holding ball and the special figure 2 operation holding ball is preferentially subjected to the variable display operation (which operation holding ball is digested). "Fluctuation order" is decided. In the present embodiment, when the operation holding ball is present in both the special figure 1 operation holding ball and the special figure 2 operation holding ball, the special figure 2 operation holding ball is preferentially digested.

When the number of operation-holding balls in both the special figure 2 operation-holding ball number and the special figure 1 operation-holding ball number is zero (step S401: YES and step S402: YES), the state of "no operation-holding ball". It becomes. This "no operation hold ball" state is a case where a special symbol is waiting and there is no hold memory, and the effect control unit 24 is notified that this state has been entered and the liquid crystal display is displayed. The device 36 is controlled to switch to the demo screen display for waiting for customers. Therefore, when it becomes "no operation hold ball", the process proceeds to step S417, and it is determined whether or not the special symbol operation status is "waiting (00H)" indicating the state of the above "no operation hold ball". (Step S417).

When the determination process of step S417 is passed, that is, when the above-mentioned "no operation holding ball" state is reached, and the special symbol operation status at this time is "waiting (01H)" (step S417: NO: Refer to step S472 during the special symbol confirmation time processing in FIG. 23A, which will be described later), and switch the special symbol operation status to "waiting (00H)" (store 00H in the special symbol operation status: step S418). Then, as an effect control command, a customer waiting command (BA04) is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S419), and the special symbol change start process is exited. As described above, the effect control unit 24 displays the customer waiting effect when 180 seconds have passed without starting the game after receiving the customer waiting command.

If the number of balls on hold in FIG. 1 or the number of balls on hold in FIG. 2 is not zero (steps S401: NO or S402: NO), steps S403 to S416 are sequentially executed. Regarding the processes of steps S403 to S416 described below, if the determination in step S401 is'NO', the process for the special figure 2 operation holding ball is performed, and in the determination in step S402 above,' If it is NO', the processing is performed for the special figure 1 operation holding ball, but the processing method is the same. Therefore, in order to avoid duplicate description, unless there is a particular need, the process will be described without distinguishing which operation holding ball is the target.

Proceeding to step S403, the number of operation-holding balls on the special drawing side to be used for the current fluctuation display operation is subtracted by 1 (step S403), and a "holding subtraction command" including information on the number of operation-holding balls after the subtraction is issued by the effect control unit 24 (Step S404).

Next, the special symbol operation confirmation data is stored (step S405). This special symbol operation confirmation data is information for designating the special symbol type of the fluctuation start side this time, and is "00H" if the special figure 1 is the fluctuation start side, and if the special figure 2 is the fluctuation start side. For example, "01H" is stored in the special symbol operation confirmation data.

Next, the hold data stored in the hold storage area of the RAM 203 is shifted (step S406), and the hold 4 storage area is cleared to zero (step S407). In the processing of steps S406 to S407, the hold data (big hit determination random number, special symbol determination random number, and fluctuation pattern) stored in the hold storage area (hold 1 storage area) corresponding to the hold storage number n = 1 are used. Random data) is read and stored in the determination random number storage area of the RAM in the area, and the hold data stored in the hold storage area corresponding to the hold n storage area (n = 2, 3, 4) is stored in the hold storage area, respectively. It is stored in the hold storage area corresponding to -1'(step S406), the hold 4 storage area is cleared, and a free area is provided (step S407). As a result, the start order of the special symbol variation display game matches the order of the number of operation-holding balls n (n = 1, 2, 3, 4), and the operation-holding balls acquired at the time of winning the starting opening are stored in any of the holdings. While it is specified whether it corresponds to the area, it becomes possible to hold and store a new operation holding ball.

Next, the game state information transmission process is executed (step S408). In the game state information transmission process, a state command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. This state command includes at least game state information capable of specifying the current game state, and in the present embodiment, also includes special symbol time reduction counter information (remaining time reduction information). The information included in the state command is used by the effect control unit 24 for the effect mode transition control, the residual time reduction display effect for displaying the remaining time reduction number of the time reduction state, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the setting error flag is in the ON state (5AH) (step S409). When the setting error flag is not in the ON state (step S409: ≠ 5AH), the setting value command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, and then the random number determination process for determining the operation of the special electric accessory is executed (step S410). In this special electric accessory operation determination random number determination process, the jackpot determination random number value is used to execute a'winning lottery at the start of variation'for the operation holding ball used for the current variation display operation. Since the processing procedure of the random number determination process for determining the operation of the special electric accessory is substantially the same as the random number determination process of step S318 already described, the description will be omitted as appropriate to avoid duplicate description.

Here, first, based on the special symbol operation confirmation data, the hit random number determination table on the processing target side this time (for example, if the special figure 1 side is the processing target, the hit random number table for the special figure 1) is acquired. Next, the jackpot determination random number value stored in the determination random number storage area is acquired, and the winning lottery based on the jackpot determination random number value and the winning random number determination table is executed. Then, if the lottery result is "big hit", the big hit judgment flag is set to "5AH", and if the lottery result is "small hit", the small hit judgment flag is set to "5AH", and "big hit" and "small hit" are set. If none of the "hits" is won, the winning judgment result this time is "missing", and "00H" is set for both the big hit judgment flag and the small hit judgment flag.

In the special stop symbol creation process of step S411, the winning lottery result of the random number determination process for determining the operation of the special electric object and the random number value for special symbol determination in step S410 are used, and the "symbol lottery" related to this special symbol variation display game is used. Is executed. Since the basic processing procedure of the special stop symbol creation process is substantially the same as the special stop symbol data creation process of step S319 described above, the description will be omitted as appropriate to avoid duplicate description.

Here, first, a symbol table (either a big hit symbol table, a small hit symbol table, or a lost symbol table) is selected according to the special symbol operation confirmation data and the winning lottery result of the random number determination process for determining the operation of the special electric accessory. To do. For example, when the special symbol operation confirmation data is 00H and the jackpot judgment flag is 5AH, that is, when the fluctuation start side of this time is'special figure 1 side'and the winning lottery result is'big hit', the special figure The jackpot symbol table for 1 is selected. Then, the special symbol determination random number value stored in the determination random number storage area is acquired, and based on the above-selected symbol table and the special symbol determination random number value, the "symbol lottery" related to this special symbol variation display game. Is executed, and the special symbol determination data and the special stop symbol number, which are the lottery results, are stored in the corresponding areas of the RAM in the area.

When the special stop symbol creation process in step S411 is completed, the game state transition preparation process is executed (step S412). In this game state transition preparation process, when a big hit is won, it is necessary to specify the game state (see FIG. 4) after the big hit game based on the current game state and the special symbol determination data (big hit type). Various data are stored in the corresponding area (transition state buffer) of the RAM in the area. The data set here is used in the jackpot end process (step S509 in FIG. 24), which will be described later.

After completing the game state transition preparation process in step S412, the special symbol variation pattern creation process is then executed (step S413). In the special symbol variation pattern creation process, a variation pattern distribution table (not shown) according to the current game state and the symbol lottery result (special symbol determination data) of the special stop symbol creation process is acquired. In the variation pattern distribution table, one or more types of variation patterns are set value Nc, the number of operation hold balls (excluding the operation hold ball used for the variation display operation this time, the existing number of operation hold balls), and the symbol lottery. It is determined in association with the result and the random number value for the fluctuation pattern (magnitude of the random number value: 10000), and the fluctuation pattern at the start of the fluctuation is determined by executing a lottery using the random number for the fluctuation pattern. In the present embodiment, the fluctuation pattern distribution table corresponding to the settings 1 to 6 is defined. Therefore, even if the selection conditions of the fluctuation pattern (number of pending balls, symbol lottery result, random number value for fluctuation pattern, etc.) are the same, the fluctuation pattern selected may differ depending on the set value. Further, even if the fluctuation pattern is the same, the selection rate may differ depending on the set value. For example, the selection rate of the strong reach in the case of the number of pending balls 3 and the loss C is "290/10000" in the case of setting 1, but "580/10000" in the case of setting 6. Further, in the present embodiment, a'special fluctuation pattern'that can be selected only in the high setting range (settings 5 to 6) is provided. When a notice effect (special effect) corresponding to this special fluctuation pattern appears, it is definitively notified that the current set value is in the high setting range (one aspect of the setting suggestion effect described later).

The information on the fluctuation pattern determined in this way mainly includes different winning / losing lottery results (in the case of this embodiment, detailed symbol lottery result information is included in the decorative symbol designation command). Current game status, fluctuation time, execution designation information of a specific advance notice effect (presence / absence of reach effect, reach effect type (N reach type or SP reach type), presence / absence of pseudo-ream, designation information such as number of pseudo-reams), setting Can contain values. The main control unit 20 creates a "variation pattern designation command" that makes it possible to specify the content, and transmits this to the effect control unit 24. The information included in the variation pattern specification command is used when determining various advance notice effects during the current symbol variation display game. Further, the fluctuation time of the special symbol corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is set in the "special symbol accessory operation timer" which is the timer management area of the RAM in the area.

Next, the changing flag corresponding to the current fluctuation start side is set to the ON state (5AH) (step S414). The above-mentioned "changing flag" is a flag indicating which of the special symbols 1 and 2 is changing, and when the flag is in the ON state (= 5AH), it indicates that the special symbol is changing. When the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that the special symbol is stopped. In this embodiment, the "special symbol 1 changing flag" corresponding to the special figure 1 and the "special symbol 2 changing flag" corresponding to the special figure 2 are dealt with. Here, since the special figure 1 side is described as the processing target (variation start side), the special symbol 1 changing flag is turned ON.

Next, a decorative symbol designation command corresponding to the symbol lottery result obtained in the special stop symbol creation process in step S411 is acquired and transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S415). The decorative symbol specification command is composed of two bytes, a high-order byte (MODE) that specifies the special symbol type on the variable side and a low-order byte (EVENT) that specifies the winning type. Therefore, the decorative symbol designation command includes information on the special symbol type on the variable side and the winning type (symbol lottery result). The decorative symbol designation command is mainly a combination of decorative symbols when forming a reach state (a symbol type whose component is a reach symbol), a combination of decorative symbols (decorative stop symbols) that are finally stopped and displayed, and symbols. It is used when determining the advance notice effect corresponding to the winning type in the variable display game. When the effect control unit 24 receives the variation pattern designation command and the decorative symbol designation command, the effect control unit 24 controls the appearance of the effect of the current symbol variation display game based on the information included in these commands.

Then, as the setting process at the start of fluctuation, the special symbol operation status is switched to "changing (02H)" (02H is stored in the special symbol operation status), and 00H is stored in the random number storage area for determination (zero clear) (step S416). ).

As described above, when the special symbol variation start processing is exited, the special symbol display data update process (step S309) of FIG. 20 is performed, and thus the variation display of the special symbol is started. As a result, the process goes through the special symbol management process (step S093) and proceeds to the special electric accessory management process (step S095) of FIG.

(About the production mode related to the set value)
The effect control unit 24 is configured to grasp the current set value from the set value command and manage it. In the present embodiment, based on the information included in the set value command and the information included in the hold addition command, the variation pattern designation command, the decorative symbol designation command, etc., the advance notice effect in the symbol variation display game and the operation hold ball It is configured so that effects (setting-related effects) related to the current set value (internal set value) can be displayed at various timings such as pre-reading notice at the time of occurrence and hit effect during a hit game. .. As a result, it is possible to give the player a guessing element for guessing the internal set value from the viewpoint of production. In particular, the set value is one of the important factors that greatly affect the profit of the player, and can be said to be one of the matters that the player is of great interest in playing the game. Therefore, giving the player an inferring element of the set value is an important element in enhancing the interest of the game, and by realizing the effect related to the setting, the variation of the effect can be diversified. Can be done.

The above-mentioned "setting-related effect" can include the following effect modes (a) to (d).
(A) It is possible to configure a setting suggestion effect that can suggest or deterministically notify an internal set value so that it can appear. As such a setting suggestion effect, for example, the following production modes (a) to (mi) can be used.
(A) "Low setting suggestion effect" that suggests a low setting range (settings 1 to 3),
(S) "High setting suggestion effect" that suggests high setting range (settings 4 to 6),
(G) "Even-numbered setting suggestion effect" that suggests even-numbered settings (settings 2, 4, and 6),
(Y) "Odd number setting suggestion effect" that suggests odd number settings (settings 1, 3, 5),
(M) "Set value confirmation effect" that deterministically notifies a specific set value. For example, "setting 6 final production" that deterministically notifies the maximum setting value "setting 6",
(M) "Specific range suggestion effect" that suggests the set value of a specific range. For example, setting 3 to 5 (α ≤ set value ≤ β), setting 4 or more (α ≤ set value), and the like. Examples of these effect modes include displaying a specific item image or character image, displaying a specific sound effect (for example, an explosion sound), or displaying a specific light effect (for example, a flash effect). Such setting suggestion effects are mainly reach effects, pseudo-reams, player participation type effects, look-ahead advance notice effects, and hit effects during a specific hit game (for example, opening effects, round effects, and inter-round intervals). It can appear along with various advance notice effects such as (effects, ending effects, etc.) and background effects during a specific gaming state. The appearance rates of the various setting suggestion effects described in (a) to (mi) above can be appropriately determined according to the content of the setting suggestion. For example, the probability is set to be high in the order of settings 1 to 6, settings 1 to 3 have different appearance rates for settings 4 to 5, and settings 1 to 6 have the same appearance rate, and settings 4 to 6 have the same appearance rate, respectively. It can have different appearance rates. That is, when a setting suggestion effect appears, the degree of expectation of the content can be appropriately determined. Specifically, even with setting 6, a low setting suggestion effect can appear, but if a high setting suggestion effect appears at a higher rate than the low setting suggestion effect, the internal setting value is in the high setting range. Expectations will increase. This point is the same as the event in which the winning expectation is indicated by the advance notice effect (the same applies to (b), (c), and (d) described below).
However, in the case of a set value fixed effect that deterministically notifies the setting, since the setting is known when the effect appears, the degree of expectation for the setting is 100% ((b) (c) described below). The same applies to (d)).

(B) Further, in the present embodiment, a fluctuation pattern distribution table according to the set value is provided, and it is possible to select the fluctuation pattern according to the set value. As a result, it is possible to make the selection rate of a specific fluctuation pattern different in all settings or some settings, or to determine a fluctuation pattern that can be selected only in some settings. Therefore, the appearance rates of one or more specific notice effects can be different probabilities (for example, the appearance rate of strong SP reach differs between the first setting and the second setting), and the same notice Even when a production appears, a setting guessing factor is created due to the difference in the appearance rate. Further, if the "special effect" already described appears, it is possible to definitively notify that the setting is in a specific range (high setting range). By using an existing effect, such a setting-related effect can be said to be an effect mode that not only notifies the degree of expectation of winning but also has the function of the setting suggestion effect of the above (a).

(C) In addition, it is possible to make a setting-related effect using a decorative pattern appear. For example, in all or some settings, the appearance rates of specific decoration stop symbol modes (for example, "2", "2", "4", etc.) can be set to different probabilities. For example, the appearance rate of "2", "2", and "4" at the time of loss can be set to 1% at setting 1 and 5% at setting 6. The specific decorative stop symbol mode may be a decorative stop symbol mode corresponding to hitting, or a decorative stop symbol mode corresponding to loss. In the mode using this decorative pattern, as in the above (b), a setting estimation element can be given by using an existing effect. In particular, when the decorative stop symbol mode corresponding to the loss is adopted, it is possible to give the fun of observing the decorative stop symbol and guessing the setting even if the decorative stop symbol is lost.

(D) In addition, a setting-related effect using the look-ahead notice effect (in the present embodiment, the hold change notice) can be displayed. For example, as in the "setting-related look-ahead notice effect" described above, the hold display (hold icon) is changed to the hold display for setting suggestion, and the same function as the setting suggestion effect in (a) above is exhibited. Can be done. Further, not limited to this, in all settings or some settings, the appearance rate of one or a plurality of types of specific pending change notices can be set to different probabilities. For example, if the embodiment in which the scenarios 1 to 8 of the pending change notice already described are adopted is typically described, the appearance rate of at least one of the scenarios 1 to 8 is set in all settings or some settings. Can be different. For example, the selection rate of scenario 2 in the case of the look-ahead fluctuation pattern with "N reach loss" as the specified content may be different for all settings, or may be different for some settings. In addition, in the case of a look-ahead fluctuation pattern with the above "special fluctuation pattern" as the specified content, by executing a special scenario such as "white → white → white → elevated", a specific range setting (high setting range) can be set. It is also possible to definitively notify that there is. As in the above (b) and (c), the mode using this look-ahead notice effect can also give a setting estimation element by using the existing effect.

In the above (b), (c), and (d), what kind of appearance rate is set and what kind of setting guessing element (for example, the setting suggestion effect (low setting suggestion effect-specific range suggestion effect) described in the above (a)). It can be appropriately determined whether or not the same setting inference element as at least one of the above is given. Further, in the setting-related effects of (a) to (d) above, after the power is turned on or after the big hit game is finished (may be after the big hit by a specific big hit is finished), the symbol variation display game is played a predetermined number of times (for example,). It can be made to appear when it reaches 128 games), or its appearance rate can be made high probability within a specific number of games range (for example, between 128 games and 150 games).

(About the case where a setting error occurs: Processing route from S409 to S411)
Returning to the description of the determination process in step S409, the processing content when it is determined in step S409 that the setting error flag is in the ON state (5AH), that is, when it is determined that a setting error error has occurred will be described. To do.

In the present embodiment, when it is determined in the determination process of step S409 that the setting error flag is in the ON state, the random number determination process for determining the operation of the special electric accessory (winning lottery) is not executed, and step S411 is performed. It is designed to proceed to the special stop symbol creation process. That is, when a setting abnormality error occurs, the winning lottery at the start of fluctuation is not executed. In this case, the winning lottery result will always be "missing". This means that if a big hit or a small hit is won in the previous symbol variation display game, the big hit determination flag and the small hit determination flag indicating the winning will be cleared (00H) at the end of the symbol variation display game. (See steps S475 and S477 in FIG. 23A described later). Therefore, in the current symbol variation display game, if the winning lottery process of step S410 is not executed, the winning lottery result is always "missing".

Therefore, in the special stop symbol creation process in step S411, the symbol lottery is executed based on the winning lottery result being "missing". Here, even in the case of a setting abnormality error, the loss type (in the case of this embodiment, any of the losses A to C) may be determined using the loss symbol table as usual, but the error-specific loss D may be provided, and this loss D may be determined in the event of a setting abnormality error (a'loss D'that is not normally selected is provided). In this case, when a setting abnormality error occurs, the special symbol determination data corresponding to the loss D and the special stop symbol number are determined as the symbol lottery result, and are displayed on the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b during normal operation. A special stop symbol that is not displayed is displayed as a stop. It should be noted that the error-dedicated loss D is not used in both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, but the error-dedicated loss corresponding to each (for example, the loss D1 corresponding to the special figure 1 and the loss D2 corresponding to the special figure 2). May be provided. Further, when the error-dedicated loss is not provided, only a specific loss (for example, loss A) may be selected from the losses A to C normally selected.

(About selection of fluctuation pattern at the time of setting error)
Next, the special symbol variation pattern creation process is executed (step S411). During the setting error, "loss" is always determined as described above. In other words, it is a case where the loss is substantially forced (forced loss). In this case, in consideration of forced loss, a "variation pattern distribution table for setting error (variation pattern distribution table for setting error)" that is selected only when a setting error occurs may be provided, for example, special. A variable pattern distribution table (for special figure 1 and special figure 2) for setting errors according to the symbol type can be provided. Here, since the setting error is forced to be lost during the setting error, the table configuration is such that the fluctuation pattern that specifies the notice effect with a low degree of fanning is selected with high probability in the fluctuation pattern distribution table for the setting error. That is, it is preferable not to select a variation pattern that specifies a notice effect having a high degree of fanning (high expectation notice effect, etc.). In consideration of this point, for example, the variation patterns shown in the following (W) to (S) can be selected as a table configuration. In the following (W) to (S), when the term "normal fluctuation pattern" is used, it refers to a fluctuation pattern that does not specify reach or pseudo-ream, but simply specifies normal fluctuation (here, lost normal fluctuation pattern).

Configuration (W): At least no reach variation pattern is selected.
Configuration (f): At least the reach fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation pattern with pseudo-ream are not selected. In other words, usually only the variation pattern is selected.
Configuration (Yo): Do not select a reach variation pattern that specifies at least a specific reach. Specific reach includes, for example, SP reach with a relatively high expectation of winning, and'strong SP reach'with a relatively high expectation of winning among SP reach (SP reach other than weak SP reach (medium SP reach). And strong SP reach) may be). If "at least the reach fluctuation pattern of SP reach designation is not selected", N reach designation, pseudo-ream designation, normal fluctuation fluctuation pattern, and the like can be selected.
Configuration (ta): Select one from a plurality of types of normal fluctuation patterns.
In the case of this configuration (ta), for example, one of a plurality of types of normal fluctuation patterns (normal fluctuation 2s, normal fluctuation 8s, and normal fluctuation 12s in the case of the present embodiment) that can be selected during normal operation can be selected. Can be configured in. It should be noted that even if a plurality of types of normal fluctuation patterns dedicated to setting abnormality errors (hereinafter abbreviated as "normal fluctuation patterns for errors") that are selected only when a setting abnormality error occurs are provided and one of these is selected. Good.
Configuration (S): Select only a specific normal fluctuation pattern.
In this configuration (S), there is no particular limitation on the specific normal fluctuation pattern. For example, a normal fluctuation pattern having the longest fluctuation time (for example, normal fluctuation 12s) may be selected, a normal fluctuation pattern having the shortest fluctuation time (for example, normal fluctuation 2s) may be selected, or other normal fluctuation patterns may be selected. A normal variation pattern (eg, normal variation 8s) may be selected. It should be noted that it is preferable to delay the digestion time of the operation-holding ball in consideration of the fact that the player is forced to lose the ball during the setting abnormality error and suffers a disadvantage. That is, it is preferable to select only the normal fluctuation pattern (normal fluctuation 12s) having the longest fluctuation time. Further, a normal fluctuation pattern for error (for example, normal fluctuation 5s) may be provided, and this fluctuation pattern may be selected when a setting abnormality error occurs.

In the case of the above configuration (ta), one of a plurality of types of normal fluctuation patterns may be selected according to the number of balls on hold. Further, in the case of the configuration (S), since only a specific normal fluctuation pattern is selected, only a specific normal fluctuation pattern is selected regardless of the number of pending balls. Further, in the present embodiment, a plurality of types of loss A to C are provided, but the normal fluctuation pattern described in the configuration (ta) (so) may be selected for at least one loss. Preferably, the normal fluctuation pattern described in the configurations (ta) and (so) is selected for any loss. In addition, when a loss D (or loss D1 or loss D2) dedicated to an error that is selected only when the above-mentioned setting abnormality error is provided, when the loss is selected, the setting abnormality variation pattern distribution table is referred to. It can be configured.

(Regarding the effect of changing the decorative design, etc., and the effect of the notice during the change of the design)
Further, it is preferable that the fluctuation pattern specification command selected during the setting abnormality error includes information (setting abnormality error information) that can be identified as a'setting abnormality error'. By receiving the variation pattern specification command including the setting abnormality error information, the effect control unit 24 grasps that the variation pattern specification command sent this time is the variation pattern selected during the setting abnormality error, and this Therefore, it is possible to execute the effect control related to the decorative symbol variation display game dedicated to the setting abnormality error. The effect control unit 24 can grasp that a setting abnormality error has occurred by receiving the "setting value abnormality command (see step S734 during the setting abnormality check processing in FIG. 19)". Since the command is exclusively used to notify the setting error error, in order to execute the decorative symbol variation display game dedicated during the setting error error, a variation pattern specification command including the setting error error information is separately transmitted. It is preferable to have a configuration.

As a decorative symbol variation display game dedicated to the above setting abnormality error, for example, the following (c) to (ya) can be configured as an effect control system. In either case, when the special symbol variation display game (variation time of the special symbol) ends, the decorative symbol variation display game also ends.
Direction (c): The notice effect itself is not displayed during the setting error. For example, as the image display effect, only the background image display (normal background image corresponding to the effect mode or the background image for error) and the variable display of the decorative pattern are performed regardless of the winning expectation.
Direction (ヰ): The decorative pattern is not displayed in a variable manner. In this case, the variable display operation of the special symbol is executed, but the decorative symbol remains stopped.
Effect (No): Performs a dedicated fluctuation display (variation display during RAM error) during a setting error error. For example, "sway fluctuation (temporary stop state)" is performed in which the decorative pattern is swung up and down without starting the normal fluctuation display. In this case, the shaking may be changed with a specific combination of symbols (for example, a decorative symbol corresponding to loss such as "2", "4", "0").
Direction (e): Normal variable display is performed, but when stop display is performed, stop display is performed with a specific combination of symbols (for example, a decorative symbol corresponding to loss such as "2", "4", "0"), or , After performing the normal fluctuation display, the shaking fluctuation (temporary stop state) is performed for a predetermined time with a specific combination of symbols, and then the stop display is performed.
Direction (H): Change from a normal decorative design to a special decorative design during a setting error. For example, a normal decorative symbol is a symbol displaying numbers 1 to 9, but a decorative symbol dedicated to a setting error error is, for example, a left / middle / right symbol such as "d", "la", "-", etc. Change to a special pattern that displays the characters. In this case, it is preferable that the decorative stop symbol has a special meaning. In the above-mentioned effects (c) to (c), if the modes "d", "la", and "-" are displayed when the decorative design is stopped or temporarily stopped, the player, the surrounding clerk, etc. It is possible to promptly notify that a RAM error has occurred.
Production (Ya): At least the sound production is set to the mute state or the lowest volume in the game setting. In this case, it is effective in giving a sense of discomfort to the player and promptly notifying that the setting error has occurred. Further, the amount of light related to the image display effect may be the minimum amount of light in the game setting.
In addition, in the above-mentioned effects (c) to (ya), at least an example in which the fluctuation pattern specification command includes the setting abnormality error information has been described, but the decorative symbol specification command may also include the setting abnormality error information. Good.

(Modification example when a setting error occurs)
In the above embodiment, when a setting abnormality error occurs, the winning lottery (step S410) is skipped, but the step including not only the winning lottery but also the symbol lottery (step S411) and the variable pattern lottery (step S413). S411 to S413 may be skipped and the process may be exited without doing anything. In other words, the special symbol management process is exited without starting the symbol variation display game. In this case, since the variation pattern designation command and the decorative symbol designation command are not created for the effect control unit 24, it is preferable to control the game so that the game cannot be executed even if a RAM error occurs. For example, when a RAM error occurs, data to be transmitted to at least the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b in order to explicitly notify that the game progress has stopped (the special symbol variation display game is not executed). Clear (output port). Further, during this RAM error, it is preferable not to execute at least the "normal symbol management process (step S091) to special electric accessory management process (step S095)" as the process related to the symbol variation display game, but it is a big hit. If it is during the game, it is considered that it occurred during normal operation, so that the special electric accessory management process may be configured to be feasible even during a setting error. Even if the processing of steps S411 to S413 is skipped, a normal pattern (for example, a normal fluctuation pattern dedicated to a setting abnormality error) is forcibly applied as a forced loss without controlling the game to be in an unexecutable state. You may select it and send a variation pattern specification command or a decorative pattern specification command based on this to proceed with the game process. Further, since the performance display monitor process (step S102) is a process belonging to the out-of-area memory side, the process may be either executable or non-executable even if a setting error error occurs.

<A. Processing during special symbol change ＞
Next, the process during special symbol change (step S307) will be described.

In the special symbol changing process, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the fluctuation time T of the special symbol set in the special symbol accessory operation timer has elapsed. If the fluctuation time T has not elapsed (variation time T ≠ 0), the special symbol is changing, so the process during the change of the special symbol is exited without doing anything. When the variation time T of the special symbol has elapsed (fluctuation time T = 0), a "fluctuation stop command (BF01H)" indicating that the variation of the special symbol has ended is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 as an effect control command. .. When the effect control unit 24 receives the fluctuation stop command, it grasps that the special symbol variation display game has ended after the variation time of the special symbol has elapsed, and stops the decorative symbol being displayed in the variation display (confirmed display). As a result, the decorative symbol variation display game ends at the same time as the special symbol variation display game ends.

Next, as a setting process when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, the special symbol confirmation signal output time (for example, 100 ms) and the confirmation display time (for example, 500 ms) are stored in the corresponding area of the RAM in the area, and the special symbol operation status is set. Switch to "Confirming (03H)" (03H is stored in the special symbol operation status), and the OFF state is stored in the special symbol changing flag. Then, when the setting process at the time of stopping the change of the special symbol is completed, the process during the change of the special symbol is exited. The above-mentioned "special symbol confirmation signal output time" is a margin time for securing the output time of the special symbol confirmation signal for notifying the hall computer HC from the frame external terminal board 21 that the special symbol has been confirmed and displayed. Is. Further, the "fixed display time" is a time (stop display time) for holding the stop display when the variable display of the special symbol is completed and the special symbol is stopped and displayed.

When the above special symbol changing process is exited, the special symbol display data update process (step S309) of FIG. 20 is performed, the special symbol management process is exited, and the process proceeds to the special electric accessory management process of step S095 of FIG.

<23. Special symbol confirmation time processing (processing when fluctuation stops): Fig. 23A and Fig. 23B>
Next, the processing during the special symbol confirmation time (step S308) will be described. 23A and 23B are flowcharts showing the details of the special symbol confirmation time processing (step S308) of FIG.

In FIGS. 23A and 23B, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero (step S471). A “fixed display time” is set in the special symbol accessory operation timer here (see step S307 of the above-mentioned special symbol changing process). Until the special symbol accessory operation timer becomes zero (step S471: NO), the process is exited during the special symbol confirmation time without doing anything.

When the special symbol operation timer becomes zero (step S471: YES), it is assumed that the special symbol variation display game has ended, and the special symbol operation status is switched to "waiting (01H)" (special symbol operation). 01H is stored in the status) (step S472), and the game state number YJ (value of any of 00H to 03H) corresponding to the current game state is stored in the game state determination area (W_YJTPTN) (step S473).

Next, the jackpot determination flag is acquired, and the state of the jackpot determination flag is determined (step S474).

(When the jackpot judgment flag is ON)
In the determination in step S474, when the jackpot determination flag is in the ON state (= 5AH) (step S474: = 5AH), various setting processes are performed when the jackpot symbol is stopped (step S475). Here, as shown in the figure, 00H (OFF state) is stored in the jackpot judgment flag, the condition device operation flag is turned ON (5AH is stored) assuming that the jackpot is won, and other, low probability during the jackpot game, electric support. Set to the state without state.

(When the jackpot judgment flag is OFF)
In the determination of step S474, when the big hit determination flag is in the OFF state (= 00H) (step S474: ≠ 5AH), then the small hit determination flag is acquired and the state of the small hit determination flag is determined (step S476). .. When the small hit determination flag is in the OFF state (= 00H) (step S476: ≠ 5AH), that is, in the case of "loss" which is neither a big hit nor a small hit, the process proceeds to step S478.

On the other hand, when the small hit determination flag is in the ON state (= 5AH) (step S476: = 5AH), various setting processes are performed when the small hit symbol is stopped (step S477). Here, 00H (OFF state) is stored in the small hit determination flag, and 5AH (ON state) is stored in the small hit medium flag as various setting processes (process before starting the small hit game) when the small hit symbol is stopped. When the various setting processes at the time of stopping the small hit symbol are completed, the process proceeds to step S478.

Proceeding to the process of step S478, it is determined whether or not the special symbol time reduction counter (remaining time reduction counter) is zero (step S478). If the special symbol time reduction counter is zero (step S478: YES), the process proceeds to step S483.

On the other hand, when the special symbol time reduction counter is not zero (step S478: NO), the special symbol time reduction counter is subtracted by 1 (step S479) as the digestion of the fluctuation number this time, and the special symbol time reduction counter after the subtraction is set. It is determined whether or not it is zero (step S480).

If the special symbol time reduction counter after subtraction is not zero (step S480: NO), the number of end times of the special symbol time reduction state has not been reached, so the process proceeds to step S483 without doing anything. On the other hand, when the special symbol time reduction counter after subtraction is zero (step S480: YES), it is assumed that the end number of the special symbol time reduction state has been reached, and the setting process at the end of the time reduction is performed (step S481). Here, as the setting process at the end of the time saving, the electric chew support function is set to the OFF state, and the transition to the state without electric support, that is, the transition setting process from the time saving state to the normal state is executed. As a result, in the next special symbol variation display game, the variation pattern of the special symbol based on the "normal state" is selected. This step S481 process works as a variation pattern selection condition switching means for switching and controlling the variation pattern selection condition (variation pattern selection mode) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (the same applies to steps S486 and S491 described later). ..

After completing the setting process at the end of the time reduction in step S481, the game state information transmission process is then executed (step S482). Here, the state command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. The information included in the status command here includes information indicating that the time saving state has ended. By this state command, the effect control unit 24 grasps that the time saving state has ended in this game, and grasps that the normal state is shifted from the next game. As a result, when the next game (decorative symbol variation display game) is started, the effect control unit 24 switches and controls the background image (background effect) for the "normal effect mode", and also serves as a firing position in the normal state. , Executes the effect control process for displaying the "launch position guidance effect (left-handed notification effect)" instructing to aim at the left flow path 3b, and executes the effect control process under the normal effect mode from the next game. To do. Since the effect control unit 24 can grasp that the time saving state has ended in this game, it may switch to the "normal effect mode" at the end of this game and control it. For example, in this game, the background image (background effect) for the normal effect mode may be switched (the same applies to step S487 described later).

Next, it is determined whether or not the special symbol probability variation counter (remaining ST count) is zero (step S483). If the special symbol probability variation counter is zero (step S483: YES), the process proceeds to step S488. On the other hand, when the special symbol probability variation counter is not zero (step S483: NO), the special symbol probability variation counter is subtracted by 1 (step S484) as the number of fluctuations of the special symbol this time, and the special symbol probability variation after the subtraction is performed. It is determined whether or not the number of times counter is zero (step S485).

If the special symbol probability variation counter after subtraction is not zero (step S485: NO), the ST specified number of times has not been reached, so the process proceeds to step S488 without doing anything.

When the special symbol probability variation counter after subtraction is zero (step S485: YES), it is assumed that the number of fluctuations of the special symbol has reached the ST specified number (65535 in this embodiment), and the setting process at the end of probability variation is executed. (Step S486). Here, as a setting process at the end of the probability change, as shown in the figure, the function related to the probability change state is set to the OFF state. As a result, in the next special symbol variation display game, the variation pattern of the special symbol based on the "normal state" is selected. In the case of the latent state as well, the ST specified number of times is monitored in steps S483 to S485, and the end timing of the latent state is managed in the setting process at the end of the probability change.

After completing the setting process at the end of the probability change in step S486, the game state information transmission process is then executed (step S487). Here, as in step S482, the state command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, but the information included in the state command here includes information indicating that the probabilistic state has ended, and the effect control is performed by this state command. The unit 24 grasps that the probabilistic state has ended in this game, and grasps that the normal state will be entered from the next game. As a result, when the next game is started, the effect control unit 24 switches and controls the background image (background effect) for the "normal effect mode", and executes the effect control process under the normal effect mode from the next game. .. Since the effect control unit 24 can grasp that the probability change state has ended in the current game, the effect control unit 24 may switch to the "normal effect mode" at the end of the current game.

When the game status information transmission process of step S487 is completed. Next, it is determined whether or not the special symbol change number counter is zero, that is, whether or not the game state transition specified number of times (in the present embodiment, the remaining CZ number of times) is zero (step S488). In the present embodiment, the main control unit 20 has a CZ management means for managing the control of transition to the CZ mode, and here, the remaining number of CZs is monitored. Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the "normal state" of the internal gaming state is "CZ" and "normal state", and the "latent state" of the internal gaming state is "latent". It deals with "state" and "CZ"'. That is, the latent state and the normal state have a common "CZ". Therefore, during the "CZ" period, the same variable pattern distribution table (variable pattern distribution table for CZ) can be selected regardless of the internal gaming state, even though they are in different internal gaming states. Whether or not to select the fluctuation pattern distribution table for CZ is managed by a predetermined identifier (variation pattern distribution designation number (Tcode)). In both "CZ (normal)" and "CZ (latent probability)" according to the present embodiment, the same fluctuation pattern is selected so that the same effect can be generated. As a result, during the "CZ" period, the jackpot lottery probability is kept secret in the production.

When the special symbol change count counter is zero (step S488: YES), the process is exited during the special symbol confirmation time without doing anything. On the other hand, when the special symbol variation counter is not zero (step S488: NO), the special symbol variation counter is subtracted by 1 (step S489) as the digestion of the current variation, and the special symbol variation counter after the subtraction is subtracted. Is zero (step S490).

If the special symbol change count counter after subtraction is not zero (step S490: NO), it is assumed that the CZ mode has not ended, and the process is exited during this special symbol confirmation time without doing anything.

When the special symbol change count counter after subtraction is zero (step S489: YES), it is assumed that the CZ mode has ended, and the game state transition setting process is executed (step S491). Here, the transition setting process of the game state after the remaining number of CZs is completed is executed. In the present embodiment, the main control unit 20 has a CZ management means for managing the CZ mode, and specifies the game state of the transition destination according to whether the jackpot lottery probability state at the end of CZ is low probability or high probability. Specifically, if it is the current CZ (normal), it shifts to the normal state, and if it is CZ (latent probability), it shifts to the latent state. As a result, in the next special symbol variation display game, a variation pattern of the special symbol based on the "normal state" or the "latent state" is selected.

Next, the game state information transmission process is executed (step S492). Here, as in step S482, the state command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, but the information included in the state command here includes information indicating that CZ has ended, and the effect control unit is subjected to this state command. 24 grasps that it will be in the "normal state" or the "latent state" from the next game. As a result, when the next symbol variation display game is started, the effect control unit 24 switches and controls the background image (background effect) for the "normal effect mode" or the background image for the "latent effect mode". Execute the effect control process in the effect mode. Since the effect control unit 24 can grasp that the CZ mode has ended in this game, the effect mode may be switched at the end of this game. However, since the CZ mode is a game mode that conceals the game state (latent, normal) and fuels the latent expectation, it is not possible to switch the background image immediately in this game in order to maintain that expectation. It is preferable to switch to the next game without doing so.

As described above, when the special symbol change start process is exited, the special symbol display data update process (step S309) of FIG. 20 is performed, the special symbol management process (step S093) is exited, and the special electric accessory management process of FIG. 17 is performed. (Step S095).

<24. Special electric accessory management process: Fig. 24>
Next, the special electric accessory management process (step S095) in FIG. 17 will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the details of the special electric accessory management process in step S095.

In FIG. 24, the CPU 201 first determines the state of the small hit medium flag (step S501). When the small hit middle flag is in the ON state (step S501: = 5AH), the small hit process is performed (step S504), and the special electric accessory management process is exited. In this small hit process, a small hit game control process for controlling a series of operations of the special variable winning device 52 (open / close control of the large winning opening 50) related to the small hit game, and a small hit start at the start of the small hit game. Command transmission processing including transmission of a command and transmission of a small hit end command at the end of a small hit game, transition processing to CZ mode after the end of a small hit game, and the like are performed.

When the small hit medium flag is in the OFF state (step S501: ≠ 5AH), then the state of the condition device operation flag is determined (step S502). When the condition device operation flag is in the OFF state (step S502: ≠ 5AH), in this case, the small hit game is not in progress (step S501: ≠ 5AH), and the big hit game is not in progress. Exit the management process.

When the condition device operation flag is ON (step S502: = 5AH), processing is performed according to the special electric accessory operation status (00H to 04H) (step S503: special electric accessory status branch processing). The "special electric accessory operation status" is a status value indicating the behavior of the special variable winning device 52, and this status value is changed according to the processing state, and the special electric accessory operation status storage area of the RAM in the area is stored. Stored in. The special electric accessory operation status includes "start processing (00H)" that specifies that the state is in the standby state before the start of the big hit game, and "during operation start processing (00H)" that specifies that the state is in the standby state before the start of the round game. 01H) ”,“ Operating (02H) ”which specifies that the round game is being executed, and“ Continuing judgment (03H) ”which specifies that it is being determined whether or not to continue the next round game. , "Big hit end processing (04H)" for designating that the end processing at the end of the big hit game is in progress is included.

In the special electric accessory operation status branching process in step S503, the special electric accessory operation status values are "start processing (00H)", "operation start processing (01H)", "operating (02H)", and "continuation determination (continuation determination). The processing of steps S505 to S509 corresponding to each of the status values of "03H)" and "Big hit end processing (04H)" is executed. By these processes, a hit game corresponding to various hits is realized.

<Big hit game control process (steps S505 to S509)>
(9-1. Big hit start processing)
The jackpot start process (step S505) will be described. At the start of the jackpot game, the special electric accessory operation status is set to the initial value of "start processing (00H)". Therefore, in the case of a big hit, first of all, this big hit start process is performed.

Here, first, as a setting process at the start of the big hit game required when starting the big hit game, 5 AH (ON state) is stored in the accessory continuous operation device operation flag of the RAM in the area, thereby special electric accessory. Control continuous operation (round game) to an acceptable state. Then, the operation status of the special electric accessory is switched to "operation start processing (01H)" (01H is stored in the operation status of the special electric accessory), and the 1st R is set to the continuous number counter for managing the number of continuous executions of the round game. Stores the specified 01H. Next, referring to the jackpot start setting table (not shown), the "maximum number of rounds (specified number of rounds)" corresponding to this jackpot is applied to the corresponding area of the RAM in the area according to the special symbol determination data (big hit type). , "Round display LED number (display data for round number display device 39c)" is stored, and "start interval time" is stored in the special symbol accessory operation timer. The "start interval time" is an interval section from the time when the confirmation display time of the special symbol has elapsed and the big hit is confirmed (see step S471 in FIG. 23A) until the special variation winning device 52 is activated, and is an opening effect. Refers to the time width that defines the section.

Next, a "big hit start command" is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, and the big hit start process is exited. In addition to the role of instructing the start of the opening effect, the "big hit start command" includes information that can identify the type of the big hit this time and the game state at the time of winning the big hit. It is also used when deciding a series of hit effects (opening effect, middle round effect, round end effect, ending effect, etc. corresponding to each big hit type) to be developed inside. Thus, the jackpot game is started.

(9-2. Special electric accessory operation start processing)
Next, the operation start processing of the special electric accessory (step S506) will be described.

Here, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero. In the special symbol accessory operation timer here, the interval time before the start of the round is set. As this interval time, in the first round (1st round), the "start interval time" set in the jackpot start processing (step S505) is monitored, but the main processing (step S506) is passed after the 2nd round. When doing so, the "interval time before opening (interval time until the next round game is started)" is monitored. Until this special symbol accessory operation timer reaches zero, this round game has not ended, so the special electric accessory operation start process is exited without doing anything.

On the other hand, if the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero, that is, when the pre-opening interval time (in the case of the 1st round, the start interval time) has elapsed, the special symbol judgment data (big hit type) and the current number of rounds are matched. The opening / closing operation pattern of the large winning opening 50 is set (large winning opening opening / closing operation setting process). Here, the large winning opening opening / closing operation time (maximum opening time) is stored in the special symbol accessory operation timer, and the solenoid control data for controlling the large winning opening solenoid 52c (large executed according to the number of rounds). Set the winning opening opening / closing operation pattern data). Further, along with the operation of starting the opening of the large winning opening, a command for opening the large winning opening is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. This "large winning opening opening command" includes information on the start of a round game and information on the current number of rounds, and is used when the effect control unit 24 displays an effect during a round corresponding to the number of rounds. Then, the operation status of the special electric accessory is switched to "operating (02H)" (02H is stored in the operation status of the special electric accessory), and the special electric accessory management process is exited. As a result, the large winning opening 50 is opened up to the opening / closing operation time of the large winning opening, and this round game is started.

(9-3. Processing during operation of special electric accessory)
Next, the process during operation of the special electric accessory (step S507) will be described.

Here, first, it is monitored whether or not the number of winning balls to the large winning opening 50 has reached the maximum winning number, and when the maximum winning number is reached, the special symbol accessory operation timer is cleared. As a result, the timer value set in the special electric accessory operation start process (step S506) is forcibly set to zero, and when the maximum number of winnings is reached, the opening large winning opening 50 is closed. In addition, do nothing until the special symbol accessory operation timer reaches zero, that is, until the large winning opening opening operation time (maximum opening time) elapses or the maximum winning number is reached. As it is, exit the processing during operation of the special electric accessory.

When the special symbol accessory operation timer reaches zero, it is assumed that this round game has ended, and the special electric accessory operation status is switched to "Continuing judgment (03H)" (03H is set to the special electric accessory operation status). Storage), the remaining ball discharge time (1980 ms) is stored in the special symbol accessory operation timer. The above-mentioned "remaining ball discharge time" refers to a margin time for discharging the remaining balls inside the large winning opening after the large winning opening is closed. In addition, when the big winning opening is closed (round game is completed), an interval command between rounds is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, and the special electric accessory operating process is exited. This "inter-round interval command" includes information on the end of the round game and information on the current number of rounds, and is used when the effect control unit 24 displays the interval effect between rounds (inter-round interval effect) until the next round. Will be done. Exit the processing during operation of the special electric accessory.

(9-4. Special electric accessory operation continuation judgment processing)
Next, the special electric accessory operation continuation determination process (step S508) will be described.

Here, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero. Since the remaining ball discharge time (1980 ms) after the big winning opening is closed is set in the special symbol accessory operation timer here (see step S507), it is determined whether or not the remaining ball discharge time has elapsed. Will be done. Until the special symbol accessory operation timer reaches zero, the special electric accessory operation continuation determination process is exited without doing anything.

On the other hand, when the special symbol accessory operation timer reaches zero (the remaining ball discharge time has elapsed), the continuous number counter is acquired to check whether the current number of rounds has reached the specified number of rounds (maximum number of rounds). judge. If the maximum number of rounds has not been reached, 1 is added (+1) to the continuous number counter as processing when the round game is continued, and the "interval time before opening" is stored in the special symbol accessory operation timer, and the special electric combination is performed. The object operation status is switched to "operation start processing (01H)" (01H is stored in the special electric accessory operation status). On the other hand, when the current number of rounds reaches the maximum number of rounds, the "end interval time" is stored in the special symbol accessory operation timer as various setting processes at the end of the specified number of rounds, and the special electric accessory operation status. Is switched to "End processing (04H)" (04H is stored in the special electric accessory operation status). The above "end interval time" is an interval section from the end of the round game of the final round to the end of the jackpot game after the remaining ball discharge time has elapsed, and is the time for which the ending effect section is determined. Refers to the width.

Then, a "big hit end command" instructing the start of the ending effect is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, and the special electric accessory operation continuation determination process is exited. This "big hit end command" includes information on the current big hit type and the game state at the time of winning, that is, information that can identify the game state after the big hit game ends, and the effect control unit 24 performs the big hit game It is also used when determining the production mode of. As a result, the round game of the specified number of rounds is completed.

(9-5. Big hit end processing)
Next, the jackpot end processing (S509) will be described.

Here, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero. Since the end interval time is set in the special symbol accessory operation timer here, it is determined here whether or not the end interval time has elapsed. Until the special symbol accessory operation timer reaches zero, the jackpot end process is exited without doing anything.

On the other hand, when the special symbol accessory operation timer reaches zero (the end interval time has elapsed), a transition setting process for designating the game state after the big hit game is executed as various setting processes at the end of the big hit. Here, each value of the transition state buffer set in the game state transition preparation process (step S412 in FIG. 22) already described is set in the flag area and the counter corresponding to various functions for specifying the game state. .. As a result, the flags related to various functions for designating the game state are set to ON or OFF, and the game state after the big hit game is specified. For example, when shifting to the probability change state after the big hit game, the general electric accessory open extension state flag is ON, the normal symbol time reduction state flag is ON, the normal symbol probability change state flag is ON, the special symbol time reduction state flag is ON, and the special symbol probability change state is ON. The flag is turned on, and 65536 is set in the special symbol probability variation counter.

Next, various setting processes at the end of the big hit are performed. Here, various data (various flags and counters used in steps S505 to S509) used during the jackpot game control process are cleared, and the game status notification LED data (status notification data by the composite display device 38c) is updated. , The special electric accessory operation status is switched to "start processing (00H)" (00H is stored in the special electric accessory operation status).

When the above jackpot end process is completed, a series of control processes related to the jackpot game is completed, and the current jackpot game is terminated.

<25. Performance display monitor processing: Fig. 25>
Next, the performance display monitor process (step S102) in FIG. 17 will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the details of the performance display monitor processing.

In the present embodiment, the operation program and the storage area of the processing related to the performance display are defined in the out-of-area memory (second memory area). Therefore, the CPU 201 first sets the contents of the stack pointer SP inside the area in the SP save buffer of the RAM outside the area (step S821), and sets the stack pointer SP of the RAM outside the area (step S822).

Next, the test firing test signal terminal management process relating to the output processing of the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is executed (step S823). The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is an appropriate gaming machine by a third-party testing institution (designated testing institution based on the provisions of Article 20, Paragraph 5 of the Act on Regulation of Customs Business, etc. and Optimization of Business). Corresponding to the type test for determining whether or not, a "type test signal" capable of specifying the control state of the gaming machine can be output from the external terminal board 21 for the frame. This type test signal is a signal that cannot be used as a signal for the data counter DT or the hall computer HC, and is different from the outer end signal.

In this test firing test signal terminal management process, the game information (test information) required for the type test is stored in a 1-byte length external output buffer (corresponding to the test firing test device information terminal ports 1 to 5) provided in the out-of-area RAM. It is acquired and the information (for example, flag ON / OFF information) is supplied to the 8-bit output port (test firing test device information terminal ports 1 to 5), and various test information is output externally as a type test signal. It has become like. In the present embodiment, flags, counter values, etc. generated during the progress of the game process can be acquired from the RAM 203, and these information can be output from the test firing test device information terminals (test firing test device information terminal ports 1 to 10). It has become.

Next, an out-of-area RAM check process for checking whether or not the stored data related to the performance display of the out-of-area RAM is damaged is executed (step S824). Details of this out-of-area RAM check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the area-external LED management process is executed (step S825). In the out-of-area LED management process, the output control of the control signal (dynamic lighting data) is executed for the performance display 99 based on the display data created in step S831 described later. Here, the data set in the identification display unit output buffer and the base display unit output buffer set in step S831 at the time of the previous interrupt is output to each of the 7-segment displays 99a to 99d of the performance display 99 for identification. Controls the display of the display unit and the data display unit. The output buffer for the identification display unit is for storing the display pattern data of the identification display unit and the output buffer for the base display unit is provided in the out-of-area RAM. The LED management process for external use of the region may be executed after the display update process (step S831) described later. Further, for the output of the control signal to the performance display 99, the LED management process (step S098 in FIG. 17) of the timer interrupt process may be used.

(Processing related to operation confirmation display: Processing route of steps S826 → S833)
Next, it is determined whether or not the operation confirmation timer is zero, that is, whether or not 5000 ms of the operation confirmation time set at the time of turning on the power has elapsed (step S826). When the operation confirmation timer is not zero (step S826: ≠ 0), the "operation confirmation process" for displaying the operation confirmation display (all blinking) at the time of turning on the power is executed (step S833). Since the operation confirmation timer is set in the operation confirmation timer setting process (step S034 in FIG. 6B), which is a part of the process at the time of turning on the power, if the power is cut off during the operation check, when the power is restored after that. , The operation confirmation display (blinking all) is not restarted from the state at the time of power failure, but the operation confirmation timer is initially set (5000 ms reset) when the power is restored, and the operation check is performed again until the operation check time 5000 ms elapses. The display will be made. Details of this operation confirmation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 27.

(Processing related to normal display: Processing route of steps S826 → S827)
On the other hand, when the operation confirmation timer is zero (step S826: = 0), it is assumed that the operation confirmation display is completed, and the normal display process (steps S828 to S831) for displaying the performance information on the performance indicator 99 is performed. I will go.

First, 00H is set in the normal state determination flag (step S827). This normal state determination flag is a flag for designating whether or not it is a "measurement target section" for measuring performance information (base value in the case of this embodiment). In the case of the present embodiment, when the flag is in the ON state (= 5AH), it indicates that the measurement target section (in the normal state), and when the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), the measurement is not performed. Indicates that the target section (game state other than the normal state).

Next, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the normal state (step S828), and if it is the normal state (step S828: YES), the normal state determination flag ((R_TUJFG)) is set to the ON state (5AH). (Step S829), thereby designating the measurement target section. However, if it is not in the normal state (step S828: NO), nothing is done, that is, the normal state determination flag is set to the OFF state (step S829). The process proceeds to step S830 as it is (00H). Therefore, in this case, the normal state determination flag is maintained in the OFF state, and it is specified that the current gaming state is the measurement non-target section.

By the way, a storage area for managing the same data as the current game state information (for example, game state number YJ) managed by the in-area RAM is provided in the out-of-area RAM, and the current game state information is also provided in the out-of-area RAM. (Game state number YJ) can be managed, and in step S828 described above, the game state information (game state number YJ) of the RAM outside the area is acquired, and whether or not the current game state is the normal state. It can also be configured to determine. However, with such a configuration, even though the game state information is managed by the in-area RAM, the same duplicated data is managed by the out-of-area RAM, which unnecessarily presses the out-of-area memory. As a result, the control load increases, and as a result, the memory area of the entire RAM 203 is compressed. In particular, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, access to the in-area RAM is not prohibited when executing the processing related to the out-of-area memory (processing related to performance display, processing related to test firing test), and the law Since the capacity of RAM and the like are severely limited by the request, it is preferable to reduce the amount of RAM used as much as possible. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the game state number YJ on the RAM side in the area is directly acquired without providing a storage area for managing the current game state information (game state number YJ) in the out-of-area RAM. The process of determining whether or not it is in the normal state is performed.

Next, the switch input data setting process is executed (step S830). In the switch input data setting process, based on the switch input data acquired in step S083, input data regarding the presence or absence of winning for each winning opening related to the performance display is created and set (step S830). The data created here is the normal payout number, normal out number, base value, and all states in the performance display monitor aggregation division process (step S043 in FIG. 6B) during the main control side main process, which has already been described. It is used to count the number of outs.

Next, in order to create and set the display data for the LED to be displayed on the performance display 99 based on the base value obtained in the performance display monitor aggregation division processing (step S043) on the main processing side (in the infinite loop processing). "Display data update process" is executed (step S831). The data created here is output-processed in the area-external LED management process (step S825) at the time of the next interrupt. The details of the display data update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 28. Then, the contents of the saved stack pointer SP are restored, and the performance display monitor processing is exited (step S832). As a result, the performance information of the performance display 99 is displayed, specifically, the current base value (real-time base value) and the previous history information (history base value) are displayed in real time.

The performance display monitor process of FIG. 25 described above functions as an information display control means that controls the information display means (performance display 99) based on the information display control program.
In the game machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a game information storage area (W_YJTPTN) capable of storing game state data (game state number YJ) capable of specifying the current game state is provided in the RAM in the area of the RAM 203. On the other hand, the out-of-area RAM of the RAM 203 is provided with a specific information storage area (R_TUJFG) capable of storing specific data indicating that it is in a specific gaming state (for example, a normal state) (step S829). The information display control means sets the current game state to a specific game state (normal state) based on the game state data (game state number YJ) stored in the game information storage area (W_YJTPTN) of the RAM in the area. The determination means (step S828) for determining the presence or absence, and the specific information storage means for storing the specific data in the specific information storage area (R_TUJFG) when the determination means determines that the game is in a specific gaming state. (Step S829), a calculation means (S043, S830 in FIG. 6B) for calculating specific information (base value) regarding the game performance based on the specific data, and information regarding the specific information calculated by the calculation means (step S829). A display control means (S043 in FIG. 6B, S825, S831 in FIG. 25) for controlling the display of the information display means (performance display 99) is included.

<26. Out-of-area RAM check processing: FIG. 26>
Next, the out-of-area RAM check process (step S824) in FIG. 25 will be described. FIG. 26 (A) is a flowchart showing the details of the out-of-area RAM check process according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 26 (B) is a flowchart showing a modified example of the out-of-area RAM check process. This out-of-area RAM check process is a process (common process) that is executed not only during the performance display monitor process of FIG. 25 but also during the performance display monitor aggregation division process (step S043) of FIG. 6B.

In this out-of-area RAM check process, a check is made to see if the process related to the performance display is correctly executed (step S841), and a check is made to see if the data in the RAM area related to the performance display is abnormal (data corruption, etc.). (Step S842), and if there is an abnormality, a data initialization process for clearing the measurement data is executed (step S843).

In FIG. 26, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the check data is a normal value (AA55H) of the initial value (step S841). This check data is data monitored in a process of comparing and determining the total number of outs R and the normal out number S (out ball number confirmation process: not shown), and is, for example, from the total number of outs R. In the normal case, when the number of outs S is large (R <S), it is assumed that a counting abnormality has occurred, and "00H" indicating that fact is set in the check data. If the check data is not a normal value (AA55H) (step S841: NO), the process proceeds to step S843, and the data initialization process described later is executed.

On the other hand, when the check data is a normal value (step S841: YES), it is subsequently determined whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the count data (step S842). An abnormality occurs in the count data, for example, when the switch input data shows an abnormal value, or when the arithmetic processing related to the performance information is not executed correctly. As a case where the arithmetic processing is not correctly executed, for example, there is a case where the arithmetic processing (ball number addition processing) for the sensor related to the calculation of the performance information is not correctly executed. The sensors to be counted in the present embodiment are five types of sensors: an upper start opening sensor 34a, a lower start opening sensor 35a, a general winning opening sensor 43a, a large winning opening sensor 52a, and an OUT monitoring switch 49a. Therefore, was the "ball number addition process" for all of these sensors, specifically, the prize ball number addition process (not shown) and the out ball number addition process (not shown) correctly executed? Whether or not it is determined.

As described above, the ball number addition process is executed in the performance display monitor aggregation division process (step S043) during the main process shown in FIG. 6B. In this ball number addition process, first, the presence or absence of a prize is checked in order for four sensors of the upper start opening sensor 34a, the lower start opening sensor 35a, the general winning opening sensor 43a, and the large winning opening sensor 52a. , When the winning is confirmed, the "prize ball number addition process" is performed to add the number of prize balls, and each time the process is completed, 1 is added to the "sensor detection count counter" that counts the number of processes. Go (sensor detection count counter + 1). Specifically, first, the presence or absence of a prize in the upper starting port sensor 34a of the first counting target sensor is checked, and if the winning is confirmed, the number of prize balls in the upper starting port is added (the number of first prize balls). Addition process), when the addition process this time is completed, 1 is added to the sensor detection count counter, and the counter value is updated to "01H". Subsequently, the presence or absence of a prize in the lower start port sensor 35a of the second counting target sensor is checked, and if the prize is confirmed, the number of prize balls in the lower start port is added (second prize ball number addition process). When this addition process is completed, 1 is added to the sensor detection count counter, and the counter value is updated to "02H". In the same manner below, the winning ball number addition processing (third and fourth prize ball number addition processing) for the general winning opening sensor 43a and the large winning opening sensor 52a, which are the third and fourth counting target sensors, is performed. The process is performed in order, and each time the addition process is completed, 1 is added to the sensor detection count counter and the counter value is updated. Therefore, the sensor detection number counter is updated to "04H" after the fourth prize ball number addition process for the fourth prize opening sensor 52a is completed. Finally, the out-ball number addition process for the OUT monitoring switch 49a is performed, and when the out-ball number addition process is completed, the sensor detection number counter is cleared to zero (00H). In this way, the first to fourth prize ball number addition processes and the out ball number addition process are set as one cycle, and this is executed for each interrupt.

Therefore, the range of values that the sensor detection count counter can take is "00H" to "04H", and when the ball number addition process (final out ball number addition process) is completed correctly, the sensor detection count counter is set to "00H". Should be set. However, if this value becomes a value other than "00H" to "04H" due to some trouble, or when starting the prize ball number addition process for the upper start port sensor 34a of the first counting target sensor, "00H". In cases other than "", it can be determined that the arithmetic processing is not executed correctly, that is, the count data is not valid due to an abnormality. Therefore, in the process of step S842, if the count data is valid (step S842: within the range), it is considered that the operation is normal, the data initialization process of step S843 is skipped, and the out-of-area RAM check process is exited. ..

On the other hand, if the count data is not valid (step S842: out of range), it is assumed that an abnormality has occurred and the data initialization process is executed (step S843). In the data initialization process, the initial value (normal value) "AA55H" is set in the check data, the RAM area outside the area related to the performance display (performance display storage area, measurement information storage area, etc.) is cleared, and the current display is performed. Clear the display data inside. However, of the RAM area related to the performance display, only the measurement information storage area may be cleared. The reason is that the data saved in the performance display storage area usually stores the previous base value data (when this time is the first measurement, the specific value for the test section is saved (data). (The value that specifies none is saved), because it is considered that the result of the previous correct processing is saved. Also, the operation check timer may be cleared. Even if the data initialization process is executed, a new base value is calculated by simply displaying an error on the performance display 99 without executing special error processing such as stopping the game or not measuring a new base value. Subsequent processing for this (steps S824 to S829 in FIG. 25) is advanced.

When the data initialization process of step S843 is executed, the error notification (base value count error notification) may be executed for a predetermined period (for example, 10 minutes). In this case, the performance indicator 99 can be displayed in an error-only display mode. Further, even during the error display, it is possible to measure a new base value (count the number of payouts during normal operation, the number of outs during normal operation, the number of outs in all states, and the calculation of the base value). The error display period may be a predetermined time, and a predetermined game period, for example, the number of payouts during normal operation, the number of outs during normal operation, or the number of outs in all states is a predetermined number (error cancellation number: for example, 100). It may be the period until the time is reached or the period until a new normal state arrives (the period until a new measurement target section arrives). Of course, a new measurement may not be started during the error display period, and a new measurement may be started after the error display is completed. Further, the above-mentioned condition for canceling the base value count error notification may be the power-on again.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the RAM area related to the performance display is checked in the performance display monitor aggregation / division process (step S043 in FIG. 6B) and the performance display monitor process (step S102 in FIG. 17), and there is a problem. At least, after initializing the out-of-area RAM area (measurement information storage area) that stores the measurement data necessary for calculating the performance information, the measurement is started from the initial state. Further, the out-of-area RAM area related to the performance display is not the target of the RAM check at the time of turning on the power, that is, the target of the RAM initialization processing of step S023 in FIG. 6A and step S031 in FIG. 6B. Therefore, even if a problem occurs in the contents of the RAM in the area, the data related to the performance display will not be initialized (cleared) together, and only the data related to the normal game progress will be initialized independently. .. Therefore, as long as the backup function operates normally and the gaming machine operates normally as long as there is no problem with the stored contents of the RAM area related to the performance display, it will be permanent for several days or years. The data can be retained, and performance information can be retained and displayed for a long period of time.

(Modification example of out-of-area RAM check processing: FIG. 26 (B))
The out-of-area RAM check process of FIG. 26B can have the following configuration.

26 (B) shows the configuration of the out-of-area RAM check process of FIG. 26 (A), the data initialization process of step S843, the process of clearing the operation confirmation timer to zero, and the operation confirmation timer of step S844 of 5000 ms. This is the addition of the processing to be performed. Other processing contents are the same as those in FIG. 26 (A).

In the configuration of FIG. 26B, as shown in the figure, when the determination result in step S841 is determined to be NO and the determination result in step S842 is determined to be out of range due to a defect in data or the like, a check is performed as the data initialization process in step S843. The RAM area (performance display storage area, measurement information storage area, etc.) related to data and performance display is cleared, the display data currently being displayed is cleared, and the operation confirmation timer is cleared. Then, 5000 ms is reset to the operation confirmation timer (step S844). If the operation confirmation timer is cleared by the data initialization process, a different timer value (for example, 10000 ms) may be reset in step S844 instead of the usual 5000 ms. Therefore, in this modification, if an abnormality occurs in the contents of the out-of-area RAM, the operation confirmation display is executed again for a predetermined time after the RAM is initialized. This point is different from the configuration of FIG. 26 (A) in which the operation confirmation display is executed only when the power is restored. If the operation confirmation timer is not reset in this modification, the display will be forcibly terminated when the operation confirmation display is being executed when the data initialization process is executed. After that, the performance display 99 displays the real-time base value and the history base value as usual.

<27. Operation check processing: Fig. 27>
Next, the operation confirmation process (step S833) in FIG. 25 will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the details of the operation confirmation process.

In FIG. 27, the CPU 201 first subtracts 1 from the operation confirmation timer and adds 1 to the lighting timer (steps S851 and S852).

Next, it is determined whether or not the blinking switching timing has arrived (step S853). In the present embodiment, during the operation confirmation display, the extinguishing period and the lighting period are repeated at a predetermined cycle of, for example, 300 ms. This blinking switching timing is managed by the lighting timer. In the present embodiment, the lighting timer is incremented by 1 for each interrupt of 4 ms. If the switching timing has a cycle of 300 ms, it can be determined that the blinking switching timing has arrived depending on whether or not the value of the lighting timer is "75". If the blinking switching timing has not arrived (step S853: NO), the operation confirmation process is exited without doing anything, that is, while maintaining the current lighting or extinguishing state.

On the other hand, when the blinking switching timing arrives (step S853: YES), the lighting timer is cleared (step S854), and the update cycle counter is updated (step S855). The update cycle counter is used as a counter for determining whether the counter is lit or blinking. For example, when the update cycle counter is an 8-bit counter that circulates in the range of 0 to 255 by increment processing, if the least significant bit of the value of the update cycle counter is '0', lighting control is performed, and at '1' In some cases, blinking control such as turning off control can be performed. Not limited to this, a well-known control method may be used for the lighting / blinking control.

Next, with reference to the update cycle counter, it is determined whether the value is "0" or "1" (step S856). In the case of the present embodiment, at the start of the operation confirmation display, the update cycle counter is controlled to zero, and the performance indicator 99 is controlled to be fully lit. Therefore, when this process is first passed, the value of the update cycle counter is updated to "1" in the process of step S856, so the process proceeds to step S857 (step S856: = 1), and the identification display is performed. The extinguished data, that is, "0000H" is set in the output buffer for the unit and the output buffer for the base display, respectively (steps S857 and S858). These extinguished data are written directly to each output buffer without referring to the data table or the like. As a result, the lighting period ends and the extinguishing period occurs.

On the other hand, when the next blinking switching timing arrives (step S853: YES) and the update cycle counter is "0" (step S856: = 0), the process proceeds to step S859, and the output buffer for the identification display unit is used. Lighting data, that is, "FFFFH" is set in the output buffer for the base display unit, respectively (steps S859 and S860). These lighting data are also written directly to each output buffer without referring to the data table or the like. As a result, the lighting period ends and the extinguishing period occurs. As a result, the extinguishing period ends and the lighting period occurs. In the present embodiment, when the operation check display is performed, for example, a predetermined data value is simply set in each output buffer without referring to the LED data table as shown in FIG. 34 used for the display control in the normal state. Therefore, it is possible to realize an operation confirmation display (all blinking) by a simple process.

By the above operation check process, the performance indicator 99 is repeatedly turned on and off repeatedly (operation check display) for a predetermined time (for 5000 ms), and the operation of the performance indicator 99 can be visually checked. .. If the performance display 99 does not display a normal operation confirmation display, for example, if a part of the 7-segment display remains off due to disconnection or the like, appropriate measures such as parts replacement may be taken.

Even during the operation check process, the performance display monitor total division process (S043 in FIG. 6B) is executed, and at least the count process (ball number addition process, etc.) necessary for calculating the base value is performed. As a result, it is possible to accurately reflect the winning ball and the out ball during the operation confirmation in the base value displayed after the operation confirmation display. However, since the base value is not displayed during the operation check display, at least the count process may be performed in the performance display monitor total division process (step S043) during the operation check display, but the base value is calculated during the 5000 ms period during the operation check display. May be configured to do so. Further, during the operation confirmation process, a determination process for determining whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the performance display 99 is provided, and if an abnormality occurs, a dedicated error command (operation confirmation display error command) is issued to the effect control unit. A process of transmitting to 24 may be provided. When the effect control unit 24 receives the operation confirmation display error command, it is possible to notify the performance display 99 that an abnormality has occurred by using the effect means. For example, along with the alarm sound, an effect image such as "an abnormality has occurred in the performance display 99" is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36. As a result, for example, there is no risk of overlooking defects such as the decimal point DP, which is difficult to visually confirm.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the operation check of the performance display 99 is executed in the processing after the merging point (step S033), the setting display (setting confirmation or setting change) by the setting display 97 is performed during the operation check. Setting display) is not executed (see FIG. 6B). That is, the operation confirmation display is not executed and the base display is not executed while the setting is being confirmed or the setting is being changed. As a result, the overlapping display period of the performance display 99 and the setting display 97 does not occur, and it is possible to prevent the confirmation operation from becoming complicated due to the overlapping display.

<28. Display data update process: Fig. 28>
Next, the display data update process (step S831) in FIG. 25 will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the details of the display data update process.

In FIG. 28, the CPU 201 first determines whether the display period of the base value is the test section, the first measurement section (N = 1), or the subsequent measurement section (N ≧ 2), based on real time. Identification display section display pattern data from the "identification display section LED data table" shown in FIG. 34 (a) according to any of a plurality of display sections, such as whether it is a value display section or a history-based value display section. (Step S871) and set in the output buffer for the identification display unit (step S872). In the present embodiment, two types of base value output periods, a'first base value output period'that displays a real-time base value and a'second base value output period' that displays a history base value, are provided, and these are set every 5000 ms. It is designed to switch to. Further, in the identification display unit LED data table, as shown in FIG. 34 (a), display pattern data corresponding to the identification display of "bL." Showing the real-time base value (upper "01111100B" ('b' display) Display pattern data (upper "01111100B" ('b) corresponding to the display of the identification display unit of "b6." Indicating the history base value of "10111000B" (for 7-segment display) and lower "10111000B" (for 7-segment display) 'For 7-segment display) and lower level "11111101B" (for 7-segment display '6.')) Are stored.

Further, according to the base value at that time (base value during real-time measurement), the display pattern data for the base display unit is acquired from the decimal value LED data table (step S873) and set in the output buffer for the base display unit. (Step S874). As shown in FIG. 34 (b), the decimal value LED data table stores display pattern data having a length of 1 byte each corresponding to 10 types of numerical values 0 to 9. For example, in the first base value output period for displaying the real-time base value, if the first base value at that time is "35", the display data of the tens place from the decimal value LED data table is "3". '01001111B' corresponding to "" is acquired, and "01101101B" corresponding to "5" is acquired as the display data of the ones digit, and is set in the output buffer for the base display unit.

By the above display update process, the performance display 99 after all blinking (operation check) is displayed by switching between the real-time base value and the previous history base value periodically (for example, every 5000 ms). The display mode can be realized.

(Specific example of the display mode of the performance indicator 99 after the power is turned on: FIG. 35)
FIG. 35 shows the performance during various periods at the time of RAM initialization (RAM clear), setting change, RAM abnormality (setting value data abnormality, backup flag abnormality), setting confirmation, and backup restoration. It shows the display mode of the display 99. However, in FIG. 35, one of the four 7-segment displays 99a to 99d of the performance display 99 (for example, the 7-segment display 99a (7-segment for both setting / performance display)) is used as the setting display 97. An example of the display mode when the configuration is set to function as.

In the present embodiment, except when a RAM error occurs (when the determination results in steps S015 and S016 of FIG. 6A are NO), the "setting change processing route", "RAM clear processing route", and "setting confirmation processing route" already described have been described. After the "backup recovery processing route" is completed, the timer interrupt processing (Fig. 17) on the main control unit side is activated, the operation confirmation period is started, and the performance indicator 99 flashes all for 5 seconds (confirmation display). After the interrupt, the base value is displayed (steps S033 to S036, S043 in FIG. 6B, steps S825, S831, S833, etc. in FIG. 25). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 35, during the RAM clear notification effect such as "RAM is being cleared" when the RAM is cleared, and during the setting change effect such as "setting change is being performed" when the setting is changed (during the setting change operation period). ), When a RAM error occurs, such as "RAM error, please turn on the power again and change the set value", etc., during the power turn-on instruction production (during the power turn-on waiting period), it is before the start of the operation check period. Therefore, the display of the performance indicator 99 is completely turned off or hidden. However, during the setting confirmation effect (during the setting confirmation period) and during the setting change effect (during the setting change operation period), one of the four 7-segment LEDs of the performance indicator 99 functions as the setting indicator 97. Therefore, the setting value information is displayed (see the notation column of "setting value display" in the figure). In the case of a RAM error, the game is placed in a state of waiting for the power to be turned on again (steps S017 to S20 in FIG. 6A), and the game operation is stopped until the power is turned on again (interrupt processing does not start and the performance is displayed). The monitor total division process (step S043) is also not executed), and all the lights are turned off (hidden) on the performance indicator 99 (see the power cycle display column shown in the figure).

In addition, when the RAM is cleared, when the setting is changed, when the setting is confirmed, or when the backup is restored, the entire 5 seconds related to the operation confirmation display during the customer waiting standby effect (during the customer waiting display) after each process. When the blinking stops, the display of the base value is started after that. Also, when the setting is changed, all blinking starts for 5 seconds when the setting change operation is completed. Therefore, if the setting change completion effect such as "setting has been changed" continues for 5 seconds or more, the setting change. During the completion effect, all blinking for 5 seconds ends, and the display of the base value is started. Therefore, in this case, there will be an overlapping display period between the setting change completion effect and the base value display. Similarly, if other effects such as a restoration completion effect (not shown) that displays "Recovered from power failure, please restart the game" when the backup is restored are continued for 5 seconds or more, the restoration is performed. During the completion effect, all blinking for 5 seconds ends, and the display of the base value is started.

However, the RAM error notification related to the RAM clear is executed with the highest priority over other notification effects, and even if the effect control command is transmitted from the main control unit 20 during the execution of the RAM error notification, the RAM error notification is performed. Is not executed (after 30 seconds of the RAM clear notification timer), no other effect is executed. Further, if the configuration is such that the processing does not proceed any further unless the RAM clear notification timer (see step S030 in FIG. 6B) has elapsed, all the lights are turned off (hidden) during the RAM error notification. However, if the RAM clear notification timer is configured to proceed with subsequent processing simply by counting the RAM error notification time, it will blink all for 5 seconds from the start of the RAM error notification, and then the base value display will start. become.

[Second embodiment: FIG. 37, FIG. 38]
Next, a modified example (second embodiment) of the setting confirmation process (step S027 in FIG. 6B) according to the first embodiment described above will be described. FIG. 37 shows a flowchart showing details of the setting confirmation process according to the second embodiment. Further, FIG. 38 shows the source code of the setting confirmation process according to the first embodiment (Example 1) as a comparative example in addition to the source code of the setting confirmation process according to the second embodiment (variation example). Further, in FIG. 38, in order to facilitate the understanding of the present embodiment, the word length (number of bytes) corresponding to the mnemonic and the step number of FIG. 13 are attached.

In short, this second embodiment is a form in which a setting confirmation command capable of specifying the current setting value is created and transmitted in the setting confirmation process. In this respect, it is different from the first embodiment in which the setting confirmation command that does not include the current setting value information is transmitted. Hereinafter, this second embodiment will be described in detail. In FIGS. 37 and 38, the description of the same components (with the same reference numerals) as those in the first embodiment is omitted in order to avoid duplicate description unless otherwise required, and is different from the first embodiment. The explanation will focus on the points.

With reference to FIGS. 37 and 38, the CPU 201 first sets the set value data of the set value storage area (W_SETTEI) of the in-area RAM in the W register (Sk1). As a result, the current set value Nc is acquired (step S932).

Next, during the setting confirmation, the setting display data to be displayed on the setting display 97 is created (step S938), the data is output-controlled, and the current setting value Nc is displayed on the setting display 97 (step S939). .. Here, in the present embodiment, the performance display 99 (7-segment display 99a to 99d) is driven and controlled by the dynamic lighting method as in the first embodiment, but the setting display 97 is driven by the static lighting method. The drive control is adopted.

If the processing of steps S938 to S939 is described according to the program shown in FIG. 38 (B), first, the start address of the “setting display data table (D_7SEGDATA)” in FIG. (Sk2). Next, the content of the address specified by the value (HL + W) obtained by adding the value of the W register to the value of the HL register is set in the A register (Sk3). For example, if the current setting value is 3, the W register value (offset value) is '02H', so the address obtained by adding 02H to the start address of the setting display data table is specified. 01001111B ('3' LED display pattern) ”(see FIG. 32 (B)) is set in the A register. These Sk2 to Sk3 correspond to the process of step S938. The setting display data creation method (Sk2 to Sk3) according to the present embodiment is basically the same as the setting display data creation method (SPm10 to SPm13) in the first embodiment.

Then, the value of the A register acquired in Sk3 is output to the LED data port 3 (P_LED3) for the setting display 97 (Sk4, step S939). As a result, the current set value is displayed on the setting display 97.

Returning to the description of FIG. 37, after finishing the process of step S939, a setting checking command corresponding to the current set value is created (step S930A). Here, first, the reference command data "E020H" is set in the DE register pair (Sk5), and the 8-bit addition operation of the E register value (20H) and the W register value (current setting data) is performed to obtain the E register. The value is updated, and thus the command data corresponding to the current set value is obtained (Sk6). Then, the value of the DE register pair after the calculation is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 by the command transmission process (_CMDOUT) (Sk7, step S931). To put this Sk5 to Sk7 in a nutshell, the command data under setting confirmation corresponding to the current set value Nc (set value data) is acquired (steps S930A, Sk5 to Sk6), and the acquired command data is used as the effect control unit 24. (Step S931, Sk7).

As described above, the set value data has values of '00H to 05H' as data for specifying the set values 1 to 6, and the command data' E020H (setting 1) corresponds to these set value data. ) ~ E025H (setting 6)'is defined. Therefore, if the current setting value data is added to the reference command data, that is, the setting checking command data "E020H" corresponding to the setting 1, the "setting value data" corresponding to the current setting value Nc (setting value data) is added. "Checking command data" can be obtained. As a result, the setting checking command according to the present embodiment includes information (setting value information) capable of specifying the current setting value, and by transmitting this command to the effect control unit 24, the effect control unit 24 Can grasp the current set value and display the effect during setting confirmation related to the set value. For example, during the setting confirmation period, the current setting value can be notified by using the effect means. In this respect, it is significantly different from the first embodiment in which the setting checking command that does not include the current setting value information is transmitted.

Next, the A register "00000010B" is output to the external terminal port 2 (P_GAIBU2) (step S937, Sk8). As a result, the setting confirmation signal is output from the frame external terminal board 21 to the hall computer HC.

Next, the first power supply abnormality check process (_ VDDCHK) of FIG. 8 is called and executed by the CALLV instruction (steps S933 and Sk9).

Next, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch signal (setting key switch 94) is in the ON state (steps S934 to S936, Sk10 to Sk11). Specifically, the 8-bit data (see FIG. 6A) of the input port 1 (P_INPT1) is read into the A register (Sk10), the logical product (AND) of the mask data "00000001B" is taken, and it corresponds to the setting key switch signal. It masks bits other than the 0th bit (Sk11). The Sk10 to Sk11 have the same contents as the SPm5 to SPm7 according to the first embodiment described above, and when the setting key switch signal is in the ON state, the value of the A register becomes '00000001B' and the setting key switch. When the signal is in the OFF state, the value of the A register becomes '00000000B'.

Here, the ‘JRS’ instruction of the Sk12 special jump instruction will be described. In this embodiment, a 1-byte length JR instruction is defined as a type of JR instruction. This'JRS'instruction has a 5-bit relative jump function in the range of -16 to +15 according to the jump status flag JF. This JR instruction is a jump instruction capable of 5-bit relative jump in the range of -16 to +15, while the JR instruction is a jump instruction capable of 8-bit relative jump in the range of -128 to +127. Regarding the byte length, the JRS instruction is'instruction 3 bits, 5 bits relative jump total 1 byte', while the JR instruction is instruction '1 byte, 8-bit relative jump total 2 bytes'. .. Therefore, when the relative address jumps within the range of -16 to +15, the program capacity can be reduced by 1 byte by using the JRS instruction. The jump status flag JF takes a value related to the carry flag CF and the zero flag ZF. Specifically, in the case of an LD instruction, an IN instruction, an OUT instruction, an AND instruction, an OR instruction, an XOR instruction, or the like. Has the same value as the zero flag ZF, and in the case of an ADD instruction, CP instruction, etc., has the same value as the carry flag CF.

In the case of Sk12, the processing branches according to the logical operation result by the AND instruction, so the operation of the mnemonic "JRS F, Label" (here, Label = SYSTEM_700) is "PC when ZF = JF = 0". ← Label ”.

Therefore, if the value of the A register is '00000001B (setting key switch signal is ON state)' by the operation (logical product) by Sk11, 0 is set in the zero flag ZF and 0 is set in the jump status flag JF (ZF = JF). = 0: FAULT), jump to SYSTEM_700 by the JRS command of Sk12. That is, when the setting key switch signal is in the ON state (step S936: YES), the process jumps to the first power supply abnormality check process (_ VDDCHK) in step S933, and steps S933 to S936 until the setting key switch signal is in the OFF state. Repeat the process of.

On the other hand, if the value of the A register is '0000000000B (setting key switch signal is OFF state)' by the operation (logical product) by Sk11, 1 is set in the zero flag ZF and 1 is set in the jump status flag JF (ZF = JF). ≠ 0: TRUE), the JRS instruction of Sk12 does not jump to SYSTEM_700, the next Sk13 is executed, and the value of the A register (A = '0000000000B') is set in the LED data port 3 (P_LED3). , Set to the external terminal port 2 (P_GAIBU2) and clear each to zero (Sk13, Sk14). That is, when the setting key switch signal is turned off (step S936: NO), the setting confirmation display by the setting display 97 ends (turns off), and the setting confirmation signal is stopped (step S940, S941).

Next, "27H" is set in the E register (Sk15). As a result, the value of the DE register pair is updated to "E027H", and the setting confirmation end command data is obtained (see Step S942 and Sk5 for the value of the D register). In the case of this embodiment, the setting confirmation end command is not "E022H" but "E027H", but this is because the setting confirmation command takes E020H (setting 1) to E025H (setting 6) for convenience. , "E027H". And this "E027H (setting confirmation end command data)
Is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 by the command transmission process (_CMDOUT) (Sk16, step S943). When the effect control unit 24 receives the setting confirmation end command, the effect during setting confirmation is terminated. As a result, a series of setting confirmation periods have ended.

In the second embodiment described above, different setting checking commands (E020H (setting 1) to E025H (setting 6)) are created and transmitted corresponding to the settings 1 to 6. This is useful in that it can notify the effect control unit 24 of the current set value. Specifically, the effect control unit 24 can be used when displaying an effect according to the current set value.

Further, if the second embodiment is the same as the first embodiment in that a command during setting confirmation common to all settings is created and transmitted, Sk6 "ADDE," according to the second embodiment is used. This can be achieved by deleting the "W" command and changing the Sk15 "LDE, 022H" command to the SPm19 "INCE" command according to the first embodiment. In this case, it is possible to reduce the program capacity for 3 bytes of "2 bytes reduction by deleting Sk6 + 1 byte reduction by changing from Sk15 (3 bytes) to SPm19 (2 bytes)".

(Modification 1 of the second embodiment)
In the second embodiment, the configuration of transmitting the command under setting confirmation that can specify the current setting value has been described, but one or a plurality of other commands (“power-on command” related to a RAM error, power-on command” Similarly, the "waiting for customers command" that is used even after the start of the game) may be transmitted as a command that can specify the current setting value (hereinafter abbreviated as "setting information command"). As a matter of course, the command data is defined so that the command data in which one command data and the other command data do not overlap is created except in the case where a problem does not occur.

The case where another command functions as a setting information command will be described. Here, in order to avoid duplicate description, a command during setting change (BA5AH) will be described as an example. Here, for the sake of simplicity, it is assumed that the reference command data (command data corresponding to setting 1) of the command is defined as "BA5AH", and BA5AH to BA5FH are defined as command data corresponding to settings 1 to 6. explain.

In the case of the setting changing command, the processing content corresponding to the processing of steps S021 to S022 in FIG. 6A may be changed to the processing corresponding to steps S932 and S930A to S931. In particular,
(1) Acquire the current set value (see Sk1, step S932).
(2) Next, the reference command data (BA5AH) corresponding to setting 1 is acquired (see Sk5).
(3) The current set value (any value of 00H to 05H) is added to the reference command data (BA5AH), and the setting changing command data (BA5AH (setting 1) to BA5FH) according to the set value is added. (Any of setting 6)) is obtained (see Sk6).
(4) The command data is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 by the command transmission process (_CMDOUT) (see Sk7). When the effect control unit 24 receives the setting changing command including the setting value information, it can grasp that the setting is being changed and the setting value before the setting change. Therefore, as the setting changing effect, for example, Character information such as "The previous setting value is setting 3" can be simultaneously displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 together with the character information of "setting is being changed".

(Modification 2 of the second embodiment)
Further, during the setting change management process (step S023 in FIG. 6A), each time the setting change operation is performed, a command (hereinafter, a provisional setting value before the setting is confirmed) corresponding to the setting value after the change operation is performed. It can be configured to be able to send (referred to as a "change operation command"). Such a command can also be said to be an aspect of the setting information command in that it includes the setting value information.

Such a change operation command may be sent after the setting change switch 95 is operated. Therefore, as a preferred embodiment, an abnormality check of the setting data is performed after the setting change operation is confirmed (step S911: YES). (After the process of step S914 in FIG. 10) to the completion of the setting change operation (before the process of step S916), the command at the time of the change operation is created and transmitted. The processing content for creating the change operation command is basically the same as the processing content of the setting confirmation command according to the second embodiment and the above-described modification 1. Specifically, for example, the processing content is as follows. Here, for the sake of simplicity, the reference command data (command data corresponding to setting 1) of the command at the time of change operation is defined as "BC20H", and BC20H to BC25H are defined as command data corresponding to settings 1 to 6. It is explained as.

(1) After finishing the process of step S914, the set value is acquired (see Sk1). That is, the provisional setting value after the setting change operation (setting value before the setting is confirmed) is acquired.
(2) Next, the reference command data (BC20H) corresponding to setting 1 is acquired (see Sk5).
(3) The current set value (any value of 00H to 05H) is added to the reference command data (BC20H), and the command data (BC20H (setting 1) to BC25H (setting 6) according to the set value is added. )) (See Sk6).
(4) The command data is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 by the command transmission process (_CMDOUT) (see Sk7). After that, based on the current set value, the setting display data to be displayed on the setting display 97 is created and output (step S915). As a result, the command at the time of the change operation is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, and the setting display 97 displays the provisional setting value during the setting change.

In this modification, every time a setting change operation is performed, a command (command at the time of change operation) that can specify a provisional setting value (setting value before setting confirmation) after the change operation can be transmitted. The effect control unit 24 can grasp the provisional set value (provisional set value management means) by the information included in the command at the time of the change operation, and display the effect related to the provisional set value. Will be. For example, during the setting change, the liquid crystal display device 36 is notified that the setting change period such as "setting is being changed" and provisional setting value information such as "the current setting value is setting 3". Can be displayed in duplicate (simultaneously).

(Modification 3 of the second embodiment)
Also, for the setting completion command (BA09H), command data corresponding to the set value (set value after confirmation) after the change operation is completed is created (for example, BA30H (setting 1) to BA35H (setting 6)) and set. It may have a function as an information command (modification example 3). In this case, the effect control unit 24 can display the effect related to the set value after the determination. For example, after the setting change operation is completed, character information such as "the set value has been confirmed to the setting 3" can be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36.

The effect control unit 24 can grasp the provisional set value each time it receives the change operation command, but does not receive a new change operation command after that, and the setting completion command (BA09H). ) Is received, it may be configured so that it can be determined that the setting has been confirmed. In this case, it is not necessary to transmit the setting completion command (see the above-described modification 3) including the setting information after confirmation, and the configuration may be such that the same setting completion command (BA09H) as in the first embodiment is transmitted (see the above-described modification 3). See steps S920-S922 in FIG. 10).

Further, in the second embodiment described above (excluding the modification 2), the setting information is included in one or a plurality of types of existing commands as commands (setting value commands) used for effects related to the setting values. , The configuration for transmitting this to the effect control unit 24 has been described. Here, the "existing command" includes various commands transmitted in the process of turning on the power shown in FIG. 36, a variation pattern specification command, a decorative symbol specification command, and a command transmitted during the winning game. (Big hit start command, big winning opening open command, inter-round interval command, big hit end command, small hit start command, small hit end command) and the like are included. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and individual setting information commands (specifically, corresponding to the "setting value command" already described) may be provided so that they can be transmitted at an appropriate timing. For example, individual setting information commands can be transmitted before and after the transmission timing of the existing command described above (for example, steps S021-S022 in FIG. 6A, steps S921-S922 in FIG. 10, and steps S930-S931 in FIG. , See steps S942-943 and the like in FIG. 13).

[Third Embodiment: FIG. 39, FIG. 40]
Next, a third embodiment according to the present invention will be described. With reference to FIG. 36, in the first embodiment described above, in the “setting change processing route”, the setting changing command (BA5AH), the setting completion command (BA09H), the spec specification command (F611H), and the customer waiting command (BA04H) is transmitted, and in the "RAM clear processing route", the RAM clear command (BA02H), the spec designation command (F611H), and the customer waiting command (BA04H) are sequentially transmitted.

Here, the setting change processing route executes the in-area RAM clear processing (step S031) common to the RAM clear processing route, but the RAM clear command (BA02H) is not transmitted. Therefore, in the setting change processing route, the RAM clear notification effect based on the RAM clear command does not appear independently, and even if it appears, for example, a form accompanying the setting change completion effect based on the setting completion command. Appears in.

Therefore, paying attention to the fact that the setting change processing route executes the RAM clear processing in the common area with the RAM clear processing route, the RAM clear command is also transmitted in the setting change processing route (see the broken line box in FIG. 36). As a result, the setting change processing route and the RAM clear processing route can be configured to transmit the "RAM clear command, the spec specification command, and the customer waiting command" in common (third embodiment). This will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40.

39 and 40 show a flowchart of the main processing on the main control unit side according to the third embodiment of the present invention and its source code. Is shown. FIG. 39 shows an example in which the flowchart of the main control unit side main process according to the first embodiment is changed, and FIG. 40 shows an example in which the source code of the main control unit side main process according to the first embodiment is changed. Is shown. In addition, in FIGS. 39 and 40, the description of the same components (with the same reference numerals) as those in the first embodiment is omitted in order to avoid duplicate description unless otherwise required, and is different from the first embodiment. The explanation will focus on the points. Hereinafter, the third embodiment will be described in detail.

With reference to FIG. 39, the present embodiment is different from the first embodiment (FIGS. 6A to 6B) in the case of following the setting change processing route, after the change management process of step S023 is completed, in step S029. The point is that the transmission address table selection process is executed when the RAM is cleared. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 40, the source code includes SPd1 (acquisition of the command transmission address table (D_MKCADR2A) at the time of setting change in step S024: word length 3) and SPd2 (step S030) of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 31A. Jumping to the transmission command table selection process: Word length 2) is no longer necessary, and in the example of the source code shown in FIG. 6A, the total reduction is about 5 bytes. Further, since the command transmission address table (D_MKCADR2A) at the time of setting change is not required, the memory capacity for the table can be reduced.

However, in the case of the present embodiment, the RAM clear command is transmitted immediately after the "setting completion command" (see steps S921 to S922 in FIG. 10) is transmitted during the setting change management process in step S023 (step S029). (Refer to S030), there arises a problem of whether to perform the setting change completion effect based on the setting completion command or the RAM clear notification effect based on the RAM clear command. Therefore, it is preferable to configure the effect control shown in the following (α) to (δ) to be executable.
Configuration (α): When a RAM clear command is received after receiving the setting completion command (for example, when two commands are continuously received), the RAM clear notification effect is executed (RAM clear notification effect control). In this case, a common RAM clear notification effect appears in the setting change processing route and the RAM clear processing route. Therefore, it is not necessary to prepare the setting change completion effect itself.
Configuration (β): After receiving the setting completion command, when the RAM clear command is received, the "setting change completion effect" or the "RAM clear notification effect at the time of setting change" described above is executed (RAM clear notification effect at the time of setting change). Production control). This configuration is useful in that different notification effects can be displayed for the setting change processing route and the RAM clear processing route. That is, the RAM clear notification effect side is made to function simply as an effect of notifying that the RAM clear has been executed, and the setting change completion effect side or the RAM clear notification effect side at the time of setting change is executed to change the setting and clear the RAM. It can function as an effect to notify the effect. In the case of this configuration example, an effect system having a relationship between the "setting change completion effect" and the "RAM clear notification effect" in the first embodiment is realized after reducing the program capacity as compared with the first embodiment. can do.
Configuration (γ): The configuration completes the setting completion command itself is not transmitted, and the RAM clear notification effect is executed when the RAM clear command is received. In this case, the process related to the setting completion command (steps S921 to S922 in FIG. 10) may be deleted. In the case of this configuration, during the setting change period, the setting changing effect based on the setting changing command appears, and when the RAM clear command is received, the executing setting changing effect is terminated and the RAM is cleared. The effect operation may be controlled so as to execute the notification effect.
Configuration (δ): The setting change completion effect is executed when the setting completion command is received, and the RAM clear notification effect is not executed even if the RAM clear command is received after that (RAM clear command invalid control when the setting is changed). This configuration (δ) has the same contents as the above configuration (β) in terms of effect, but the start timing of the setting change completion effect is different. Specifically, in the case of the configuration (β), the RAM clear command reception is the execution trigger, and in the configuration (δ), the setting completion command reception is the production execution trigger.

[Fourth Embodiment]
In the first embodiment, when the "game start command (BA77H)" transmitted in step S038 (see FIG. 6B) after the merging point is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 and the effect control unit 24 receives the "game start command (BA77H)". Described the configuration for executing the initial operation (initialization operation) related to the movable body accessory. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and can be configured as follows (fourth embodiment).

In the first embodiment, since the "game start command (BA77H)" for the execution command of the initialization operation is transmitted after the merging point, "setting change", "RAM clear", "setting confirmation", "backup recovery", and "re-start" The initialization operation is executed after each processing route of "waiting for power-on (RAM error)" is completed. However, the initialization operation may be configured to be executable in at least one of the processing routes.

For example, a command transmission address table in which an execution command for the initialization operation (game start command) can be selected may be provided, and the game start command may be transmitted at a predetermined timing. Specifically, a command transmission address table as shown in FIG. 41 is provided.

FIG. 41 shows an example of the command transmission address table according to the present embodiment. FIG. 41 is typically a command transmission address table in which the game start command is included in the transmission target in the RAM clearing command transmission address table of FIG. 33B. By using the RAM clearing command transmission address table shown in FIG. 41, a game start command is transmitted at the time of RAM clearing (when the RAM clearing process in the area is executed), and the initialization operation related to the movable object can be executed. it can.

In addition to the RAM clear command transmission address table of FIG. 33B, the game start command is also included in the transmission target in the command transmission address table when the setting is changed in FIG. 33A and the command transmission address table when the backup is restored in FIG. 33C. It can be a command transmission address table.

Although not shown, for example, a'setting change start command transmission address table (D_MKCADR3A)'that sends a "game start command" together with a "setting changing command" is provided during the setting change operation period (step in FIG. 6A). In (S023, etc.), the game start command may be transmitted. In this case, the processing contents of steps S022-S022 are the same as the processing contents of steps S029-S030, for example, the above-mentioned "address acquisition processing of command transmission address table (D_MKCADR3A) at the start of setting change" and "transmission command table selection". It can be realized by changing to "processing (_MKCADR)". Although not shown, for example, a'setting confirmation command transmission address table (D_MKCADR4A)'that sends a "game start command" together with a "setting confirmation command" or a "setting confirmation end command" is provided, and the setting confirmation process is in progress. In (step S027 of FIG. 6B), the game start command may be transmitted. In this case, it can be realized by changing the processing contents of steps S930-S931 or S942-S943 to "address acquisition processing of command transmission address table at the time of setting confirmation" and "transmission command table selection processing (_MKCADR)".

According to the present embodiment, the initialization operation can be executed in at least one processing route of each processing route. That is, the execution timing of the initialization operation can be set to one or a plurality of timings. This point is significantly different from the first embodiment in which only the initialization operation can be executed at one timing after the merging point. In this embodiment, in particular, the initialization operation can be executed during a process that requires a relatively long time, for example, during the setting change operation period (during the setting change processing route), so that the time until the game can be started can be shortened. it can.

[Fifth Embodiment]
In at least one of the setting changing effect, the setting change completion effect, the RAM clear notification effect, the setting confirmation effect, the setting confirmation end effect, the power restart instruction effect, and the restoration completion effect, the movable body accessory (the present embodiment). In the case of, the effect mode using the movable body effect by the clock-type accessory 80 and / or the flower-type accessory 90) may be used (however, as in the fourth embodiment, the initialization operation is performed during any of the effects. If done, exclude the operating period). Further, when the movable body effect is executed in at least two of the above-mentioned setting changing effect to the restoration completion effect, it is preferable to execute the movable body effect in which the movement patterns of the movable body accessory are different from each other. In particular, from the viewpoint of preventing fraudulent activity, it is preferable to execute the movable body effect in the case of the "setting changing effect" and / or the "setting change completion effect".

[Sixth Embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, it has been described that the operation check (all blinking) related to the performance indicator 99 is executed for a predetermined time (5 seconds) when the power is turned on, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it can be configured as follows.

Configuration (ε): After the operation check is completed when the power is turned on, the operation check can be executed again by performing a predetermined operation on a specific switch. The specific switch is not particularly limited, but for example, the RAM clear switch 98 is pressed a predetermined number of times.
Configuration (ζ): The variable display of the symbol (special symbol and / or normal symbol: hereinafter, the same meaning in the sixth embodiment) can be started even while the operation of the performance indicator 99 is being confirmed. You may. In this case, the operation check of the performance indicator 99 can be continued until the variation display of the first symbol starts. As the end condition of the confirmation display, it is possible to set the case where the variation display of the first symbol is started or the case where the out monitoring switch 49a detects the entry of a ball.
Configuration (η): If an error related to the gaming machine is detected during the operation check, the operation check may be terminated. However, instead of setting all errors as the end conditions for the operation check, if the error type has a high severity of game progress or damage to the gaming machine, the operation check will be terminated, while the error type with a low severity will be terminated. In that case, it is not necessary to end the operation check. Examples of the above-mentioned highly serious error types include RAM error, fraud-related error (radio error, magnetic error, vibration error, fraudulent winning error for winning opening), door opening error, and random number related to random numbers for use in lottery. Examples of error types having a low severity such as a circuit error (main board error) include a payout shortage error, a movable body accessory error, a voice LSI error, a supply shortage error, and a ball jam error. The door opening error is an error that belongs to a high-severity error type, but the door opening error is excluded because the front frame 2 is opened and the display of the performance indicator 99 is visually recognized for operation check. To be taken. In this configuration, error priorities based on severity are set for error types, and in descending order of order, for example, RAM error (including RAM clear error), large winning opening illegal winning error, magnetic error, radio wave error, Vibration error, door opening error. It can be defined as a main board error, a payout shortage error, a movable body accessory error, a supply shortage error, and a ball jam error.

[7th Embodiment]
Further, the control mode related to the operation check related to the performance indicator 99 can have the following configurations (configurations (θ) to (ν)).

Configuration (θ): The base value can be counted even while the operation of the performance indicator 99 is being confirmed. In this case, even if the base value is updated during the operation check, the operation check (all blinking) is continued until the preset operation check time ends, and the updated content is not displayed. Can be done. However, not limited to this, if the base value is updated when the operation check time has not ended, the operation check can be forcibly terminated and the display of the base value can be started.
Configuration (ι): During the operation check related to the performance indicator 99, the initialization operation related to the movable body accessory can be executed. Specifically, "initialization operation start timing T1 ≤ operation confirmation period Tx" can be set.
Configuration (κ): The initialization operation is completed at least by the time the operation check is completed. Specifically, "initialization operation end timing T2 ≤ operation confirmation period Ty" can be set. In this case, if the configuration is such that the initialization operation is completed before the operation check is completed, the initialization operation may be started at a predetermined timing during the operation check period, or the initialization operation may be started at a predetermined timing before the operation check period. The operation may be started. Further, when a plurality of types of movable body accessories are provided, the initialization operation related to at least one of the plurality of types of movable body accessories may be completed by the time the operation check is completed. In recent years, in order to improve the entertainment of the game, various accessories from small to large are provided in the movable accessory, and there are a wide variety of movement patterns such as a combined accessory in which multiple members are united. .. These movable body accessories have different initialization operation times depending on the operation mode, the movable range, and the like. For this reason, it is preferable to use the operation confirmation period to perform the initialization operation because the time until the game startable state is set can be effectively utilized. Of course, when the operation check related to the performance display 99 and the initialization operation related to the movable body accessory are executed independently, the initialization operation is started after the operation check related to the performance display 99 is completed. May be good.
Configuration (λ): During the operation confirmation of the performance display 99, the effect means may be used to notify that the operation is being confirmed. The effect means here is not particularly limited, and one or a plurality of types of effect means can be used. For example, operation is being confirmed using at least one of a light effect, a sound effect, an image display effect, a movable body effect, and a contact pressure effect (effect by a vibration device, a pressurizing device, and a wind pressure device). It may be configured so that the fact can be notified. In this configuration, it can be confirmed that the operation is being confirmed from the front side of the gaming machine, such as those involved in the hall.
Configuration (μ): Although it has been described that the program and data related to the performance display 99 are provided in the out-of-area RAM, the operation confirmation timer may be provided in the in-area RAM side. As a result, when the operation confirmation timer is set in the process at the time of power-on (step S034 in FIG. 6B), it is not necessary to access the out-of-area RAM, so that the program capacity at the time of power-on can be reduced. .. When the operation confirmation timer is provided in the RAM in the area, the operation confirmation timer is counted (corresponding to step S851 in FIG. 27) in the timer management process (step S082) during the main control timer interrupt process in FIG. In the performance display monitor process (step S102) during the interrupt process, the operation check timer value is only referred to, and the count process is not executed.
Configuration (ν): A timer or the like for blinking the display of the performance indicator 99 (in the case of this embodiment, a timer for lighting (a counter that counts the switching timing between the lighting time of 300 ms and the extinguishing time of 300 ms)) and lighting / blinking data. Update cycle counter related to the set cycle (see the operation check process in FIG. 27): Regarding the value of the "blinking cycle counter" below), when the power is turned on, the initial value is set in the same way as the operation check timer. It is preferable to configure it (for example, after clearing the blinking cycle counter to zero, the operation confirmation display is executed). As a result, in the operation check when the power is turned on, it is possible to execute the operation check according to the common blinking cycle and the lighting blinking state every time. Further, the timing for setting the initial value in the blinking cycle counter may be executed by the process at the time of turning on the power (until the game start ready state is set), as in the operation confirmation timer. Preferably, after starting the main control side timer interrupt process (FIG. 17), the setting is made immediately before the operation check display control is executed in the performance display monitor process (step S102). For example, it is preferable to set it during the operation confirmation timer setting process in step S034 or between the processes in steps S033 to S036. If the operation confirmation display control is not executed in the performance display monitor process (step S102), it is set in the process between CTC setting process (step S030) and S040 related to the activation of the timer interrupt process. May be good. Other setting timings include before the execution of the operation check process (step S833 in FIG. 27) during the performance display monitor process (after the determination result in step S826 is determined to be'≠ 0'), or the operation check process. Before the process of step S851 in the middle, the initial value may be set in the blinking cycle counter on condition that the operation confirmation timer is the initial value (initial value of 5000 ms).
Here, if, among the 7-segment displays 99a to 99d of the performance display 99, the setting value display segment is also used, after the setting is changed (the setting completion switch 96 or the setting key switch 94 is turned off). After that, the setting value display ends, and then the operation check is executed. Therefore, for example, if the operation check is started from the lit state, the display is performed in the order of "setting value display ⇒'operation check (lighting) ⇔ operation check (off)'" (setting value). Immediately after the lighting state ends, the operation confirmation display starts from the lighting state). For this reason, the displayed contents are not busy, which causes a problem that the visibility is lowered. Therefore, it is preferable to set the blinking cycle counter value so that the operation check is started from the off state every time. As a result, it is possible to display in the order of "setting value display ⇒'operation check (lights off) ⇔ operation check (lights up)'". That is, a one-beat extinguishing period can be provided between the display of the set value and the lighting display of the operation confirmation. As a result, it is possible to prevent the display contents from being busy and improve the visibility and convenience at the time of operation check. In this way, when the operation check at the time of power-on is executed, once the predetermined process related to the performance display is reset or the appropriate initial setting process is performed, the performance indicator 99 is displayed from the time of power-on. It is possible to make the content a common display content (excluding the base value) every time, and it is possible to improve the visibility and convenience related to the operation check.

[8th Embodiment]
Further, when transmitting the setting completion command or the setting confirmation end command (command transmission processing in step S922 in FIG. 10 and step S943 in FIG. 13), the following configuration (configuration (ξ) to (ρ)) may be used. ..

Configuration (ξ): A waiting time (for example, 10 seconds) may be set after the command transmission processing (steps S922 and S943) so that the subsequent processing cannot proceed until the waiting time elapses (waiting). Time management process). The above-mentioned waiting time is used as an effect time width of the setting confirmation end effect or the setting change completion effect. As a result, for example, when a display such as "setting change is completed" is being performed on the liquid crystal display device 36, another command (for example, a customer waiting command or a RAM clear command) is transmitted from the main control unit 20. A power failure recovery display command, etc.) is not transmitted, and the effect being executed is not suddenly ended or another effect is not suddenly started, so that a sufficient effect time can be secured.
Configuration (ο): The movable body may be initialized during the waiting time.
Configuration (π): To prepare for the start of the game by displaying an effect image such as "Please close the door" (game start preparation effect) along with or instead of the setting confirmation end effect or the setting change completion effect. You may make an instruction effect to urge you to appear.
Configuration (ρ): The operation check related to the performance indicator 99 may be executed during the standby time. After the setting confirmation is completed, the setting value display is terminated (see step S940 in FIG. 13), but after the setting change operation is completed, the setting confirmation display is executed (see step S918 in FIG. 10). Focusing on this point, in the case of a configuration in which both the base display and the setting display are used, if the operation check related to the performance indicator 99 is immediately executed during the above standby time, the setting confirmation display and the operation confirmation display are displayed. There is a problem that and is duplicated. In this case, it is conceivable that the display at the time of setting confirmation itself is not executed, but it is preferable to display at the time of setting confirmation as much as possible. Therefore, the first half period (for example, waiting time start to 5 seconds) of the waiting time (for example, 10 seconds) is set to the display time width of the display at the time of confirmation, and the second half period (5 seconds to the end of the waiting time) is displayed as an operation confirmation. Assign to the display time width of. As a result, the problem of duplicate display can be solved, and the operation check can be completed at an early stage. It is preferable that the standby time is a time width in which both the functions of the setting confirmation display and the operation confirmation display can be fully exhibited. On the other hand, when the performance display 99 is not also used (in the case of the first embodiment), the display operations can be executed independently during the standby time, so that there is no problem with duplicate display. However, when the display period at the time of setting confirmation and the operation confirmation display period overlap, there may be a problem that the number of display objects to be visually recognized increases and becomes complicated, and the confirmation operation becomes troublesome. Therefore, during the standby time, it is possible to execute only the display at the time of setting confirmation and not execute the operation confirmation display.

[9th Embodiment]
As described above, the game is started in the state where the RAM is cleared when the setting is changed and in the state where the state at the time of power failure is restored when the backup is restored. That is, the state of the gaming machine 1 (for example, the display modes of the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, the normal symbol display device 39a, the right-handed display device 39b, the composite display device 38c, etc.) changes between the setting change and the backup restoration. Likely to be different. For example, in the case of the first embodiment, when the setting is changed, the stop symbol data of a specific loss (for example, loss A) is set in the special stop symbol number (the initial data setting process at power-on in FIG. 6B). (See step S032), the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b are in a standby state (customer waiting state) in a state in which a special symbol corresponding to the loss A is displayed. Therefore, even though the pachinko parlor closed while the special symbol for Loss C was stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device 38a during the game on the previous day, the special symbol display device was opened today. If another symbol (for example, a special symbol corresponding to Loss A) is stopped and displayed on 38a, it is highly possible that the gaming machine has been operated to change settings or clear RAM, at least not from the previous day's deferment. Can be inferred. Utilizing such an event, if you are an advanced game player, you can check whether the settings have been changed by inspecting the pachinko parlor just before the store closes the day before and observing the state of the pachinko parlor in the store immediately after the pachinko parlor opens. Inferring, based on the inspection results of the previous day, there is a problem that a technical intervention element is created in which gaming machines with a possibility of high setting are selected and played in the game, which causes inequality among the players. Therefore, it is preferable not to leave the trace as much as possible when the setting is changed (when the RAM is cleared).

Therefore, when the special symbol is not changing at the time of backup restoration (step S954 in FIG. 14), the stop display mode (special stop symbol) of the special symbols of the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b is changed when the setting is changed and / Alternatively, specific data is set in the special figure 1 stop symbol number (W_T1STPNO) and the special figure 2 stop symbol number (W_T2STPNO) so that the stop display mode is the same as when the RAM is cleared (RMA clear by the RAM clear processing route). It can be configured as follows. Specifically, when the special symbol is non-variable (when the determination result in step S954 in FIG. 14 is YES), it is the same as the initial data set in the power-on initial data setting process (step S032). Provide a process to set data (initial data setting process when restoring backup). As described above, the initial data includes, for example, specific lost symbol data, other specific data (dedicated symbol when clearing RAM), extinguishing data, and the like.

With such a configuration, the special stop symbol of the special symbol display device has the same display mode when the backup is restored and when the setting is changed (when the RAM is cleared), and thereby when the setting is changed (when the RAM is cleared). Since the traces can be erased, the above-mentioned technical intervention elements can be contained. The condition "when the special symbol is not changing" is added because if the special symbol is changing, the game result will be forcibly rewritten. Is. In detail, even if the special symbol is changing (during the special symbol fluctuation display game), if the above-mentioned initial data setting process at the time of backup restoration is executed, the fluctuation is assumed to be a hit fluctuation. In that case, the hit is forcibly rewritten as a loss, and the legitimacy of the game result is lost. In this way, the configuration of "changing (rewriting) the game result regardless of whether or not the RAM is cleared" may give an unreasonable disadvantage to the player, and the game is also from the viewpoint of legal request. This is because it does not meet the standards that can be provided to the market as an opportunity.

Although the configuration focusing on the special symbol has been described above, it is preferable to set the same data for the normal symbol when the backup is restored and when the setting is changed. As a result, the trace when the setting is changed can be further erased. The normal symbol also has a normal symbol operation status that has the same function as the special symbol operation status. When the normal symbol operation status is judged and the normal symbol is not in a non-variable state, when the setting is changed. The same data as the initial data to be set may be set to the normal stop symbol number (W_FSTPNO) (the same process as the initial data setting process at the time of backup restoration is performed for the normal symbol). Further, it is preferable to perform the same processing on the right-handed display device 39b and the composite display device 38c. However, if there is an electric support when the power is cut off, or if the fluctuation time reduction function is operating (during time reduction) and during a high probability state (during high probability), the data at the time of backup restoration remains as it is. Restore and make sure that there is no contradiction with the setting change.

As a modification of this embodiment, the following configuration may be used. For example, similarly to the set value storage area, the work area (special figure 1 stop symbol number (W_T1STPNO) and special figure 2 stop symbol number (W_T2STPNO)) related to the special symbol is defined as the RAM clear exclusion target area. When the inner RAM clear process (step S031 in FIG. 6B) is executed, the condition of whether or not to clear the work area is determined according to whether or not the special symbol is not changing. , When the special symbol is non-variable, the work area related to the special symbol is not cleared, and when the special symbol is not non-variable, the work area related to the special symbol can be cleared. When the normal symbol is also targeted, the work area related to the normal symbol (normal stop symbol number (W_FSTPNO)) is defined as the RAM clear exclusion target area, and when the normal symbol is non-variable, the normal symbol is related. If the work area is not cleared and the normal symbol is not in a non-variable state, it can be configured to clear the work area related to the special symbol. Thereby, either when the setting is changed and / or when the RAM is cleared. In this case as well, it is possible to restore the display state in the same state as before the power failure, so that it is difficult to determine whether or not the setting has been changed.

In the above, the display device controlled by the main control unit 20 has been described, but the display of the display device (decorative lamp 45 and the liquid crystal display device 36) controlled by the effect control unit 24 is also set at the time of backup restoration. The display mode can be the same as that at the time of change. Specifically, the display mode is the same as the display mode when the first power is turned on and the display mode when the second power is turned on, which have already been described. Further, it is preferable that the ordinary decorative symbol, the fourth symbol, and other display objects (sun and mountain background) shown in FIG. 5 have the same effect display mode when the backup is restored and when the setting is changed.

In the above, the form that makes it impossible to determine the presence or absence of the setting change has been described, but the game is enhanced by intentionally leaving the guessing element of the setting change and configuring it so that the presence or absence of the setting change can be easily determined. It may be configured as. For example, by clearing the RAM, the fluctuation pattern distribution designation number (Tcode) is not cleared. In this case, if the game is completed during the CZ when the store is closed the day before, the CZ is completed by executing the symbol variation display game a predetermined number of times (up to 4 times in this embodiment) at the time of opening the store. The fluctuation pattern can change dynamically, that is, a dramatic change can occur. As a result, it is possible to generate an inferring element as to whether or not the setting has been changed. If the variable pattern distribution designation number (Tcode) is not cleared and the variable pattern distribution designation number (Tcode) specifies CZ, the same CZ effect mode is used when the backup is restored and when the setting is changed. It is preferable to use the display mode (background image) of. In this case, it is not possible to determine whether or not the setting has been changed just by looking at the liquid crystal screen at the time of opening the store, and at least it is necessary to execute the symbol variation display game, so that it is possible to prevent a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine. The CZ of the present embodiment is a game mode that ends in 4 rotations, but may end in a relatively long game period of about several tens of rotations to 50 rotations. In addition, the same data may be set for the special symbol when the backup is restored and when the setting is changed, and for the normal symbol, different data may be set when the backup is restored and when the setting is changed (when the backup is restored, the power is cut off). Data is set to the initial value when the setting is changed).

As described above, which work area is cleared by the RAM clearing process is appropriately determined in consideration of game playability such as how much a guessing factor for the presence or absence of setting change is given, and security. Can be decided.

[10th Embodiment]
In the first embodiment, the setting changing effect, the setting change completion effect, the RAM clear notification effect, the setting confirmation effect, the setting confirmation end effect, the power re-on instruction effect, the restoration completion effect, and the like are executed by the effect means. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Various display devices controlled by the main control unit 20 (corresponding to display devices such as reference numerals 38a, 38b, 39a, 39b, 38c, 97, 99 shown in FIG. 3: Hereinafter, abbreviated as "main control side display device". ) Is used to indicate that the settings are being changed, that the settings have been changed, and that the RAM has been cleared, that is, the contents related to the above-mentioned setting changing effect to restoration completion effect. Notifications related to power-on processing such as setting confirmation, setting confirmation completed, power-on again, recovery completed (backup restoration completed), etc. (hereinafter, "power supply" It can be used for "notification at the time of input"). In the present embodiment, while the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed, the timer interrupt process has not yet been started (game prohibited state), that is, the gameable state has not yet been prepared and the firing operation is impossible. , The winning to the start port is invalid, or the process related to the symbol variation display game is not executed. Therefore, in this state, it is not possible to display the various display devices (main control side display devices) controlled by the main control unit 20 during the normal game. Therefore, the game-prohibited period can be used to configure the power-on notification to be executed. Of the various power-on notifications from the fact that the settings have been changed to the fact that the restoration has been completed, which main control-side display device should be used to perform the power-on notification should be appropriately selected. Can be done. However, this is intended to exclude when the main control side display device is used for power-on notification when the display device is used for other notifications. For example, since the setting display 97 is used for setting display while the setting is being changed, the setting is being confirmed, or the setting is being completed, it cannot be used for the power-on notification itself. In this case, other display devices other than the setting display 97 can be used.

With respect to the above-mentioned power-on notification, if more main control side display devices are used, visibility can be improved by a large number of LED groups. In addition, when a specific single main control side display device is used for notification, or when the display device is out of order, notification is not possible, but when notification is performed using all main control side display devices. Don't worry about that. However, considering that failure is a rare case, any one of a plurality of main control side display devices may be used. In this case, a plurality of main control side display devices are used. There is an advantage that the program capacity for light emission control can be reduced as compared with the case of notifying.

As for the power-on notification mode, there is no particular limitation on the notification mode because it is unlikely that the hall personnel will mistakenly recognize that the notification is related to a normal game regardless of the light emitting mode. Notification when the power is turned on in a predetermined light emission mode (lighting / extinguishing / blinking, etc. (If an LED capable of emitting light in a chromatic color is used, lighting / blinking may be performed in a predetermined color)). Can be done. Preferably, the notification is performed in a mode other than the light emitting mode during the game. In the case of this embodiment, since it is not a so-called "simultaneous variable machine", the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b do not perform the variable display operation at the same time. Therefore, as a power-on notification mode, it is preferable to execute the power-on notification by simultaneously blinking / lighting the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b. Further, when a plurality of power-on notifications are executed (for example, the setting is being changed and the setting is being confirmed), all of them may have a common notification mode, but from the viewpoint of distinctiveness, a plurality of notification modes may be used. It is preferable that all or part of the power-on notification is different. Further, in order to improve the distinctiveness of the processing state, it is preferable to use both the notification at the time of turning on the power and the notification (effect) by the effect means. It should be noted that lighting, blinking, etc. as the light emitting mode refer to those visually recognized as such. When the main control side display device is controlled by the dynamic lighting method, even if it is in the lighting state, it is actually in a high-speed blinking state, but this is in the lighting state. The blinking state refers to a case where the lighting state (high-speed blinking) and the extinguishing state (lighting off) are visually repeated at predetermined intervals.

In addition, when controlling the main control side display device during the game, the dynamic lighting method is used, and when controlling the main control side display device during power-on notification such as when the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed, the static lighting method is used. May be good. For example, since the timer interrupt processing of 4 ms is allowed to occur during the game, the data related to lighting is sent to any display device of each main control side display device for each interrupt by using the interrupt processing. It is possible to switch the common data that determines whether to transmit, which makes it easy to perform dynamic lighting control that repeats lighting / extinguishing at predetermined intervals for each interrupt, while changing settings or checking settings. It is before the game can be started, and the timer interrupt processing of 4ms is not allowed to occur during this period. Therefore, if the same processing is to be executed, the program capacity required to realize it is sufficient. It will increase. In that respect, if the control of the main control side display device by the power-on notification is a static lighting method, it is only necessary to transmit the lighting data to one of the main control side display devices. The program capacity can be overwhelmingly reduced as compared with the case of dynamic lighting control. As described above, the lighting control method of the main control side display device may be different between the notification during the normal game and the notification when the power is turned on.

Further, when a part of a plurality of 7-segment displays 99a to 99d constituting the performance display 99 is used as the setting display 97, static lighting control (first display control) is used when the setting display 97 is used. When used as the performance display 99 after the start of the game, dynamic lighting control (second display control) can be used. However, if the 7-segment displays 99a to 99d have specifications assuming only dynamic lighting control, there is a possibility that a problem may occur by performing static lighting control.

For example, as the absolute maximum rating of 7 segments for the performance indicator 99, the maximum value of the forward current is 15 mA / seg (static), and the maximum value of the peak forward current is 60 mA / seg (duty 1/5 plus with 1 ms) (. In the case of dynamic), if only the base value is displayed, only dynamic lighting control needs to be considered, so the maximum value of the peak forward current is 60 mA / seg (duty 1/5 plus with 1 ms). The current value within the range that does not exceed may be set, but when static lighting control is performed when used as the setting display means 215, the maximum value of the peak forward current is 60 mA / seg (duty 1/5 plus with 1 ms). And the current value must not exceed 15mA / seg, which is the maximum value of the forward current. Here, if the current value does not exceed 15 mA / seg, the brightness at the time of one lighting when performing the dynamic lighting control will decrease, and the lighting display when displaying the base value will flicker. There is a risk that it will end up.

Therefore, for example, the maximum value of the peak forward current does not exceed 60 mA / seg (duty 1/5 plus width 1 ms), and the current value is set in the range exceeding the maximum value of the forward current of 15 mA / seg to be dynamic. It can be configured so that the lighting display during lighting control is less likely to flicker. In this case, since the current value is set in the range exceeding the maximum value of the forward current of 15 mA / seg, when performing static lighting control during power-on notification (for example, during setting change or setting confirmation). In addition, if the lighting control is performed so as to simply repeat the transmission of only the lighting data, the maximum value of the forward current will naturally be exceeded, but the lighting data and the extinguishing data are alternately transmitted at predetermined intervals. (The lighting data is continuously sent for a predetermined time, and then the extinguishing data is continuously sent for a predetermined time), so that the current value is set in the range exceeding the maximum value of the forward current of 15 mA / seg. Despite this, it is possible to control the lighting so that the maximum value is not exceeded. In this way, pseudo dynamic lighting control using static lighting control may be realized. That is, during the dynamic lighting control when displaying the base value, the lighting is controlled so as to repeat lighting / extinguishing by switching the common data for designating the 7 segments to be lit, while when displaying the set value, the setting value is displayed. Similarly, if the common data is switched, the control program is increased by that amount. Therefore, the common data is not switched, and the control is performed so that the lighting data and the lighting data are alternately transmitted at predetermined intervals. In this case, since it is only necessary to switch the data to be transmitted at predetermined intervals, it is possible to realize the lighting control with far fewer programs than switching the common data. As described above, by devising the control method, it is possible to realize both static lighting control and dynamic lighting control so as not to exceed the absolute maximum rating of 7-segment display.

Further, instead of performing such lighting control, the maximum value of the forward current is 60 mA / seg (static), and the maximum value of the peak forward current is 60 mA / seg (duty 1/5 plus with 1 ms) (dynamic). It is also conceivable to use a high quality 7-segment display as specified. In this case, since the absolute maximum rating value is superior to the above-mentioned 7-segment display, the unit price of parts naturally increases. If high-quality 7-segment displays are used for all of the plurality of 7-segment displays 99a to 99d for displaying the base value, a cost will be incurred. Therefore, among the 7-segment displays 99a to 99d for displaying a plurality of base values, the 7-segment display having an excellent absolute maximum rating is used for the 7-segment display (for example, the 7-segment display 99a) that displays the set value. However, for the other 7-segment displays 99b to 99d for displaying the base value, the 7-segment display having a low absolute maximum rating value may be used. As a result, the cost can be suppressed to the minimum necessary, and the program capacity can be reduced because it is not necessary to perform pseudo dynamic lighting control using static lighting control during setting change or setting confirmation. it can.

For the 7-segment display that displays the set value, it was decided to use the 7-segment display, which has an excellent absolute maximum rating, but the maximum value of the peak forward current and the maximum value of the forward current are the same or higher. It suffices to use 7-segment which is an approximate value less than that. In addition, among the other specified as the absolute maximum rating of the 7-segment for base value display, the maximum value of the forward current of the 7-segment for setting value display is at least compared with the maximum value of the forward current. You may try to use the one that is set to a large value. In addition, among those specified as the absolute maximum rating of the 7-segment for base value display other than the set value display, the peak forward direction of the 7-segment for setting value display is compared with at least the maximum value of the peak forward current. It is preferable to use the one in which the maximum value of the current is set to an approximate value of the same value or more / less than that. In this way, the 7-segment display for set value is superior to the 7-segment display for base value in the absolute maximum rating of the forward current, and the absolute maximum rating of the peak forward current is the same. By using the one that is set to an approximate value of more than or less than that, the static lighting control during power-on notification and the dynamic lighting control in the base value display during the game are used in common 7-segment display. Even if it has to be done, it can be easily realized. Of course, high-spec 7-segments may be used for all of the plurality of 7-segments for displaying the base value (including the 7-segments for setting display).

[11th Embodiment]
The security signals output from the frame external terminal board 21 can have the following configurations (σ) to (ψ).

Configuration (σ): In the first embodiment, a security signal is output during setting change management (step S023 in FIG. 6A) (see step S906 in FIG. 10), but after the setting change operation is completed, a timer is output. The external terminal output process of the interrupt process (step S099 in FIG. 17) may be configured to perform the output process and the stop process of the security signal. The output time of the security signal can be appropriately determined.

Configuration (τ): Further, in the first embodiment, the security signal is output / stopped during the setting change management process (see steps S906 and S920), but the security signal is stopped during the setting change management process. Instead, the security signal may be stopped in the external terminal output process (step S099) of the timer interrupt process. In this case, unlike the first embodiment in which the security signal is stopped immediately after the setting change operation is completed, the output can be continued for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after the setting change operation is completed. It should be noted that the same configuration can be applied not only to the security signal during the setting change management but also during the setting confirmation process (step S027).

Configuration (υ): Further, the security signal may be stopped after the initial data setting process at power-on (step S032) is completed without stopping the security signal during the setting change management process. This configuration (υ) has the following advantages. In the first embodiment, in the initial data setting process at power-on (step S032), an output process for outputting a new security signal for 30,000 ms (the error notification timer described above is set to 30,000 ms, and the security signal is transmitted. The process of turning it on) is performed, and the security is intermittently output between the setting change management process and the initial data setting process at power-on (steps S023 to S032). On the other hand, in the case of this configuration (υ), the security signal output during the setting change management is continuously output until the end of the initial data setting process at power-on, so security is provided after the initial data setting process at power-on is completed. Only the process of stopping the signal (security signal OFF) needs to be provided, and the output process of a new security signal as in the first embodiment is unnecessary. Therefore, the memory capacity can be reduced and the control load can be reduced. The stop (OFF) timing of the security signal does not have to be immediately after the power-on initial data setting process, and may be stopped at an appropriate timing after the power-on initial data setting process is completed. For example, an appropriate output time (for example, 31000 ms) may be set at the end of the setting change operation (when the setting change completion switch is OFF), and the output of the security signal may be stopped after the output time has elapsed. This output time is monitored by the timer interrupt of FIG. 17 that is started after that, and the security is controlled by the external terminal output process (step S099) of the timer interrupt process in the same manner as the above configuration (τ). Signal stop processing can be performed.

Configuration (φ): Further, the security signal may be stopped immediately after the subsequent in-region RAM clearing process (step S031) without stopping the security signal during the setting change management process. In this case, the security signal can be maintained until the in-area RAM clearing process is completed. That is, it is possible to guarantee the output of the security signal at least until the execution of the "setting change management process + in-area RAM clear process" is completed. Further, when the setting change management process is completed, the output of the security signal is temporarily stopped, and then when the in-area RAM clear process is executed, the security signal is output again for a predetermined time (for example, 50 ms). You may. In this case, the security signal output during the setting change management process and the security signal output during the in-area RAM clear process may be the same security signal or may be different types of security signals. ..

Configuration (χ): Further, when it is determined in the RAM error determination process of steps S015 to S016 of FIG. 6A that an abnormality has occurred in the contents of the RAM, the process is controlled to a stopped state in which the progress of the process is stopped. (See steps S017 to S020 of FIG. 6A), at this time, it may be configured to output a security signal indicating a RAM error. The security signal output at this time may be the same security signal as the security signal transmitted during setting change or setting confirmation, or may be a different security signal.
Configuration (ψ): Further, when a RAM error occurs, the setting display 97 (7-segment setting / performance display may be used) may be configured to execute a RAM error display indicating the occurrence of the RAM error. .. In order to prevent confusion with the setting display and the base display, the RAM error display mode is preferably a display mode other than the display mode used in the setting display and the base display (either lighting or blinking). .. Further, although the error display can be performed by at least one of the main control side display devices, it is preferable to display the error by the setting display 97 because there is a possibility of a setting abnormality error. Further, when the setting / performance display combined 7-segment display (for example, the 7-segment display 99a) is provided, the setting / performance display combined use 7-segment display 97 and / or the setting / performance display combined 7-segment display can be used.

[Twelfth Embodiment]
Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, the history information related to the game can be configured to be displayable by the liquid crystal display device 36. This will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 to 43. 42 to 43 show an example of the screen display of the liquid crystal display device 36 related to the history information display, FIG. 42 is a display example of a list (list) of history information, and FIG. 43 is a history. An example of displaying information is shown.

In the present embodiment, the "game history mode" that displays the history information related to the game in a dramatic manner during the specific period of the power-on processing (FIGS. 6A to 6B) can be executed and controlled. Specifically, the effect control unit 24 is either changing the setting (the period from receiving the command during the setting change to receiving the setting completion command) or confirming the setting (the period from receiving the command during setting confirmation to receiving the setting confirmation end command). ), The presence or absence of a'menu display request operation (for example, long-pressing the effect button 13)'from the user (for example, a person involved in the hall) is monitored, and if there is a menu display request operation, it is normal. The display is switched from the display during setting change or setting confirmation to the "history list selection screen 100" shown in FIG. 42. The history list selection screen 100 is a menu screen that displays a plurality of options (selected items).

With reference to FIG. 42, on the history list selection screen 100, as shown in the figure, menu item images 102a to 102h corresponding to eight types of history information as options (details of the history information will be described later) are displayed on a grid. On the lower side, along with character information (selection, decision) for explaining the operation method on the menu screen, a cross key image 104 imitating the cross key 75 and a button image 106 imitating the effect button 13. Is displayed side by side. Further, in the menu item images 102a to 102h, the names of history information such as "setting history list" and "error history list" are described so that the contents of the menu items can be easily understood.

While the history list selection screen 100 is being displayed, the cross keys 75 (75a to 75d), which are controlled during the menu item selection state and can be operated in four directions of up, down, left, and right, are used to select item images 102a to 102h from eight menu items. One item can be selected. During this menu item selection state, the menu item to be selected is switched according to the operation of the cross key 75, the background color of the currently selected selection item image is changed, and any menu item is being selected. Is notified to the user. In the example of FIG. 42, an example in which the selection item image 102a (setting history list) is currently selected is shown. Immediately after the screen is switched to the history list selection screen 100 and displayed, the selection item image 102a is displayed as being selected as the initial selection item. Then, when the effect button 13 is pressed, the selected menu item is confirmed as a display target, and the history information corresponding to the menu item is displayed in a list.

The history information is displayed, for example, in the manner shown in FIG. 43. In the figure, as menu items, a list display of each history information when the setting history list 102a, the error history information 102b, and the jackpot history information 102c are determined is typically shown. Hereinafter, in order to avoid duplicate description, the display screen of the history information according to the present embodiment will be described in detail by taking the three history information shown in FIG. 43 as a representative example.

First, a case where the menu item “setting history list 102a” is determined will be described with reference to FIG. 43 (A).

When the menu item "setting history list 102a" is determined on the history list selection screen 100, the history list selection screen 100 is switched to the setting history confirmation screen 110, and as shown in the figure, the presence / absence of setting change and the setting confirmation are displayed. History information regarding the presence / absence (hereinafter referred to as "setting change confirmation history information") is displayed in a list (list table 112). A maximum of 10 history information can be displayed in a time-series list on one history display screen, and the history number is displayed in the list 112, starting from the most recent event. History information is displayed in order (the smaller the history number, the latest). Further, in the display area at the bottom of the history display screen, along with character information (page switching, returning) for explaining the operation method on the menu screen, a cross key image 114 imitating the cross key 75 and an effect button 13 are imitated. The button image 116 and the button image 116 are displayed side by side, and the term number image 118 indicating the current number of pages of the history display screen is displayed in the center thereof (in this example, one item out of the five terms is shown). ). In the case of this embodiment, five history display screens (for pages 1 to 5) are prepared, and a maximum of 50 history information can be displayed. The history display screens 1 to 5 can be switched by operating the cross key 75 in the left-right direction. Further, if the effect button 13 is pressed while the history display screen is being displayed, the screen can be returned to the history list selection screen 100. If there is no history information, for example, "---" is displayed (see the columns of numbers 9 and 10 in FIG. 43 and FIG. 44 described later). The structure of the history display screen described above is the same for other history information. Although not shown, the effect control unit 24 is provided with a reset means for clearing (resetting) the history information. The reset means can be provided with at least one of three functions of clearing history information by menu item, clearing by number in the list, and clearing all history information at once.

In the above "setting change confirmation history information", as history information regarding the presence or absence of a setting change operation, "information indicating that a setting change operation has been performed, setting value information confirmed at that time, and information associated with the confirmed date and time information ( "Setting change history information)" and "setting confirmation information, setting value information confirmed at that time, and information related to the confirmation date and time information (setting confirmation history information)" "Is included. As shown in the figure, these historical information are in the format of "setting change setting ○ time information (year / month / day / hour / minute)" and "setting confirmation setting ○ time information (year / month / day / hour / minute)". Is displayed. For example, if the number 1 "setting confirmation setting 4 2017/10/4 00:45" is displayed, it means "confirmed that the setting is 4 at 0:45 am on October 4, 2017". Since the setting change history information is more important than the setting confirmation history information, it is displayed in a highlighting mode. In this example, the setting confirmation history information is displayed in a normal format, and the setting change history information is displayed in bold. Also, on Sundays or public holidays, the background color is highlighted in a different color than usual (see numbers 3 and 4). It is possible to easily confirm when the setting change or setting confirmation operation was performed, or whether or not there is a setting change operation or setting confirmation operation due to a goto act.

Regarding whether or not there was a setting change operation or setting confirmation operation, the "setting changing command", "setting completion command", "setting checking command", and "setting confirmation end command" sent from the main control unit 20 side. (These commands are treated as commands including set value information as described in the second embodiment), and the effect control unit 24 side grasps the event and manages it as history information. That is, regarding the setting change history information, the setting completion command may be used if the history is "when the setting is confirmed", and the setting changing command may be used if the history is "at the start of the setting change operation". Regarding the information, if the history is "at the start of setting confirmation", the command during setting confirmation may be used, and if the history is "at the end of setting confirmation", the command at the end of setting confirmation may be used.

When the effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) according to the present embodiment receives the setting completion command, the effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) outputs the setting change history information based on the information included in the setting completion command and the date and time information managed by the RTC function unit. When the command is created and stored in a predetermined area (history information storage area) of the RAM 243 and the setting confirmation end command is received, the setting is made based on the information included in the setting confirmation end command and the date and time information managed by the RTC function unit. Confirmation history information is created and stored in a predetermined area (history information storage area) of the RAM 243. Then, when the selection item image 102a is selected by the user's history display request operation on the history list selection screen 100, the CPU 241 reads the history information (setting change confirmation history information) corresponding to the item from the RAM 243 and displays the liquid crystal display. The display device 36 is displayed and controlled, and the setting history confirmation screen 110 is displayed. In this way, the list display of the history information is realized. The same display control is performed even when any of the selection item images 102b to 102h is selected and determined.

Next, a case where the menu item “Error history list 102b” is determined will be described with reference to FIG. 43 (B). In the description of FIG. 43 (B), the content substantially the same as the content described in FIG. 43 (A) will be omitted in order to avoid duplicate description.

When the menu item "Error history list 102b" is determined on the history list selection screen 100, the history list selection screen 100 is switched to the error history confirmation screen 120, and as shown in the figure, the error related to the error that occurred in the gaming machine 1 is displayed. History information (hereinafter referred to as "error history information") is displayed in a list (list 122). This error history information includes "information associating error type information with its occurrence date and time information", and in the present embodiment, the occurrence history information of "main error" and the effect control unit monitored by the main control unit 20 side. The occurrence history information of the'sub error' monitored by 24 is included. As shown in the figure, the above error history information is displayed in the format of "error type occurrence time information (AD / month / day / hour / minute)".

On the error history confirmation screen 120, the history display with a white background in the list 122 indicates an error type in which the severity of the game progress or damage to the game machine is low, and the history display with the background highlighted in black is (emphasized). History display), showing the error type with high severity. This makes it easier to understand the status of occurrence of highly serious errors. Regarding the high and low severity, for example, as described in the sixth embodiment, for example, the error types with high severity include RAM error (including RAM clear error), large winning opening illegal winning error, and magnetic error. , Radio error, vibration error, door opening error. Error types with low severity, including main board errors, include insufficient payout errors, movable body accessory errors, out-of-supply errors, ball jam errors, and the like. Since the installation of the performance indicator 99 has a strong legal requirement, the "performance display error" related to the performance indicator 99 belongs to an error type with a high degree of seriousness.

The effect control unit 24 grasps the occurrence of the main error by the "error command" sent from the main control unit 20 side, and grasps the occurrence of the sub error by the error monitoring means of the effect control unit 24 itself, and makes an error. Manage as history information. When the effect control unit 24 receives an error command, the effect control unit 24 creates error history information based on the information included in the error command (error type information) and the date and time information managed by the RTC function unit, and creates a history information storage area. The error history confirmation screen 120 is displayed based on the history display request operation by the user. As the error history information, only the occurrence of an error type having a high severity may be used as the history information.

Next, a case where the menu item “big hit history list 102c” is determined will be described with reference to FIG. 43 (C). In the description of FIG. 43 (C), the content substantially the same as the content described in FIGS. 43 (A) and 43 (B) will be omitted in order to avoid duplicate description.

When the menu item "big hit history list 102c" is determined on the history list selection screen 100, the history list selection screen 100 is switched to the big hit history confirmation screen 130, and as shown in the figure, history information regarding the occurrence of the winning game ( Hereinafter, "big hit history information") is displayed in a list (List 132). This jackpot history information includes "information relating to the jackpot type information, the number of rotations since the power is turned on, and the occurrence date and time information", and in the present embodiment, not only the jackpot but also the history information regarding the small hit is included. Is done. As shown in the figure, the jackpot history information is displayed in the format of "hit type rotation speed information and its occurrence time information (AD / month / day / hour / minute)".

On the jackpot history confirmation screen 130, the history display with a white background in the list 132 indicates a hit type with a relatively low profit status (for example, a short-time jackpot or a small hit), and the background is highlighted in black. The history display shows a hit type with a relatively high profit status (for example, probabilistic jackpot, latent jackpot, etc.).

The effect control unit 24 grasps the occurrence of the hit game and the hit type by the "big hit start command" and the "small hit start command", and manages it as the big hit history information. The number of rotations from the time the power is turned on is grasped by counting the number of rotations based on the fluctuation pattern specification command and the fluctuation stop command. When a hit game occurs, the effect control unit 24 creates jackpot history information and stores it in the history information storage area, and displays the jackpot history confirmation screen 130 by a history display request operation by the user. As the jackpot history information, one or a plurality of specific hit types (for example, two types of probability variation jackpot and probability variation jackpot and latent probability jackpot) may be used as history information.

Although the typical history information has been described above, as other history information, the difference ball history information, the rotation speed history information, the base history information, the operation rate information, and the like can be configured to be displayable.

The "difference ball history information" is the difference ball information during the business hours of the day (when the power is turned on to when the power is turned off). Specifically, the total number of out balls (out balls) to the total number of prize balls (safe) It is the number of sphere information obtained by subtracting the sphere). For out balls, the detection information by the OUT monitoring switch 49a is transmitted, and for safe balls, prize ball number information is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, and the effect control unit 24 calculates the difference ball and stores it as history information at the time of power failure. Then, when the "difference ball history list 102d" is selected, the difference ball history information may be displayed in a list. The counting period of the difference ball is not limited to the time when the power is turned on to the time when the power is turned off, and the counting may be started and ended on time using the RTC (the rotation speed history information, the base history, and the operating rate information described later). The same applies to the counting period).

"Rotation speed history information" is total rotation speed information during business hours of the day (when the power is turned on to when the power is turned off). Regarding the rotation speed count, the effect control unit 24 counts the number of times the fluctuation stop command is received, stores the count count as history information, and when "rotation speed history list 102e" is selected, the rotation speed is counted. It may be configured to display a list of history information.

The "base history information" is information regarding the previous base value (history base value) displayed on the performance display 99. Since the history base value is managed by the main control unit 20, each time the history base value is updated, the history base value at that time is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, and the effect control unit 24 controls the effect control unit 24. The new history base value may be stored as history information, and when the "base history list 102f" is selected, the base history information may be displayed in a list. The base value of this embodiment means the ball output rate in the normal state, but B% (B%) information obtained by subtracting the base value from 100 (suction rate in the normal state) and when there is electric support ( The ball output rate (total number of prize balls with electric support ÷ total number of out-balls with electric support) × 100) information in the probabilistic state and the time saving state) may be displayed as history information.

"Operating rate history information" is information on how much the gaming machine has been operating during business hours. Specifically, "during the business hours of the day (when the power is turned on to when the power is turned off)" It is a value calculated by "the actual number of out-balls'÷'theoretical maximum number of out-balls' x 100" (the displayed value is an appropriate value such as a value rounded to the first decimal place). This operating rate may be stored as history information, and when the "operating rate history list 102g" is selected, the operating rate history information may be displayed in a list. The theoretical maximum number of out balls is generally 78,000 when the business hours are 13 hours and the performance of the launcher 32 (100 shots per minute) is used as the theoretical maximum number of out balls. Be done.

The history information described above is game information obtained from the game operation status of the game machine 1 and various processing states, but the present embodiment is not limited to this. For example, the user himself / herself may be configured to be able to input arbitrary information (for example, repair history of game parts, replacement history, etc.) by using the operation means (direction key 75 or effect button 13). The input information may be stored as a "user comment history (special history)" so that the history information can be displayed in a list. As a method of inputting the history information, for example, a 50-sound list screen (kanji conversion) may be used. (With function) -A widely known input processing method such as displaying the Kanji number list screen and selecting and determining an arbitrary character from the character group by an operation means can be adopted. "User comment history" in FIG. 42. “List 102h” is an example in which the history information input by the user is displayed so as to be selectable as a menu item.

It is not necessary to add the date and time information to all of the various history information described above, and it can be appropriately determined which history information to add the date and time information to. Further, the maximum number of accumulated history information may be 50. The number may be 20 or 100, and the number can be appropriately determined. In addition to the types of history information described above, specific reach occurrence history information (for example, strong SP reach occurrence history), history information regarding what kind of production was a big hit (reach type at the time of winning, big hit type at that time) History) and so on. Further, the type of history information may be at least one type, and the number of types is not particularly limited.

[13th Embodiment]
In the twelfth embodiment described above, an example of displaying history information in which a predetermined event is associated with date and time information has been described, but not only date and time information but also other time information may be associated and displayed. For example, the elapsed time from the occurrence of a predetermined event may be listed as history information.

FIG. 44 shows an example in which information associated with the “elapsed time of energization from the previous time” is listed as history information instead of the date and time information of FIG. 43 (A) described above. The "elapsed time of energization from the previous time" described in this embodiment is the power ON time (power OFF) until the next setting change operation is performed, starting from the time when the current setting change operation is performed (zero). If not counted). The maximum value that can be counted as the elapsed energization time is 999 hours 59 minutes (999: 59).

A display example of FIG. 44 will be described. Here, "the time when the setting change operation is performed" is treated as "the time when the setting completion command is received". Further, regarding the "setting confirmation", as in the twelfth embodiment, the time when the setting confirmation end command is received is treated as being stored as history information. In the case of this example, since the numbers 9 and 10 indicate that the history information is not stored, the oldest history information corresponds to the column of the number 8.
Since the number 8 is the display of "setting change setting 1 999: 59", "the power ON time from the previous setting change was confirmed (changed) to setting 1 after at least 999 hours 59 minutes".
Means,
Since the number 7 is the display of "setting confirmation setting 100:02", it was confirmed that the setting was set 2 minutes after the power was turned on 2 minutes after the previous setting change (here, when the setting 1 of the number 8 was confirmed). That means'.
Since the number 6 is the display of "setting change setting 6 17:12", it is confirmed (changed) to the setting 6 17 hours and 12 minutes after the power ON time from the previous setting change (here, when the setting 1 of the number 8 is confirmed). ) Means'what you did'and also
Since the number 5 is the display of "setting confirmation setting 6:00:03", it was confirmed that the setting 6 was set 3 minutes after the power was turned on from the time when the previous setting was changed (here, when the setting 6 of the number 6 was confirmed). That means'. The same applies to numbers 1 to 4, so the description thereof will be omitted.

In this way, by displaying the information in a list as the setting change confirmation history information in association with the elapsed time of energization from the previous time, how long the setting change operation has not been performed, the setting change and setting confirmation operation by the goto act. It is possible to easily confirm the presence or absence of.

It may be a configuration in which one or a plurality of all the embodiments described above (including all of the configurations and modifications described in each embodiment) are combined, and the contents described in each embodiment are limited to individual embodiments. It is not limited.

In each of the above-described embodiments, a pachinko gaming machine using a gaming ball as a gaming medium has been described, but the pachinko gaming machine is not particularly limited as long as it can achieve the object of the present invention. For example, a gaming machine that uses a gaming medal as a gaming medium, a gaming machine that uses a gaming medium that uses electromagnetic recording (a gaming machine such as a so-called "enclosed gaming machine (managed gaming machine)"), or a pachinko machine. It may be a pachinko / pachislot machine.

The present invention is useful for gaming machines.

1 Pachinko machine,
2 Front frame (door),
3 game board,
3a Game area,
6 glass door,
9 Upper saucer,
15 Launch operation handle,
19 Game ball payout device,
20 Main control unit (main control board),
24 Production control unit (Production control board, LCD control board)
28 Launch control board,
29 Payout control board,
32 launcher,
34, 34a Upper start port, upper start port sensor 35, 35a Lower start port, lower start port sensor,
36 Liquid crystal display device,
37, 37a Normal symbol start port, normal symbol start port sensor,
38a, 38b special symbol display device,
39a Ordinary symbol display device,
50, 52a Large winning opening, large winning opening sensor 41, 41c Ordinary variable winning device, ordinary electric accessory solenoid,
52, 52c Special variable winning device, large winning opening solenoid,
43, 43a General winning opening, general winning opening sensor,
45 decorative lamps,
46 speakers,
47 Movable wing pieces,
49 out mouth,
60 full detection sensor,
61 Door open sensor,
94 setting key switch,
95 setting change switch,
96 Setting change completion switch,
97 Setting indicator,
98 RAM clear switch,
99 Performance indicator,
201 Main control CPU,
202 main control ROM,
203 Main control RAM,
241 production control CPU,
242 production control ROM,
243 Production control RAM.

Claims (1)

A control means configured to be able to execute the power-on process when the power is turned on, to execute the lottery process based on a predetermined start condition, and to control the special gaming state when the lottery process is won.
Door open detection means that can detect the open state of the front door that is openable and closable on the game machine body,
With the setting switch
Equipped with a RAM clear switch,
A gaming machine configured to be able to set a set value related to the probability of winning in the lottery process.
The power-on process is
Control to start the settable period in which the set value can be set when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, end the settable period when the predetermined end condition is satisfied, and determine the set value. Setting value setting control processing and
Setting confirmation control processing that controls the current setting value to a confirmable setting confirmation state,
Backup recovery processing to recover from backup and
Acquires a setting switch signal indicating an on / off state of the setting switch, a door opening signal indicating a door opening / closing state of the door opening detecting means, and a RAM clear switch signal indicating an on / off state of the RAM clear switch. Possible signal acquisition processing and
Includes a determination process for determining the state of the signal acquired by the signal acquisition process.
The determination process is
Based on the state of the setting switch signal, the state of the door opening signal, and the state of the RAM clear switch signal, the set value setting transition determination process for determining whether or not to shift to the set value setting control process,
The setting confirmation transition determination process for determining whether or not to shift to the setting confirmation control process based on the state of the setting switch signal, the state of the door open signal, and the state of the RAM clear switch signal is included.
When it is determined by the setting confirmation migration determination process that the process does not shift to the setting confirmation control process, the process is configured to shift to the backup restoration process.
Information display means capable of displaying predetermined information that is display-controlled based on predetermined display pattern data and calculated based on game performance, and
An information display control means that controls the information display means and
A data table in which a plurality of types of display pattern data that can be displayed on the information display means are stored, and the like.
The information display control means
After the power is turned on, a confirmation display process for displaying the confirmation display on the information display means for a predetermined time and a predetermined information display process for displaying the predetermined information on the information display means after executing the confirmation display for a predetermined time are executed. It is possible and
In the predetermined information display process, the information display means is displayed and controlled using the display pattern data corresponding to the predetermined information, and in the confirmation display process, the information display means is displayed using the display pattern data corresponding to the confirmation display. Control and
Of the predetermined information display process and the confirmation display process, the display pattern data is configured to be acquired from the data table only in the case of the predetermined information display process.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images